53d Congress, ) 
 igion. ) 
 
 SENATE. 
 
 2d 
 
 (Repot 
 V No. 22 
 
 IN THE SENATE OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 REPORT 
 
 FROM THE 
 
 NOV 3 
 
 COMMITTEE ON FOREIGN RELATION 
 
 AND 
 
 FPE^DIX 
 
 ^AlION 10 
 
 THE iiAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 UC-NRLF 
 
 SB 3DM T7M 
 
 
 
 February 26, 1894.— Submitted by Mr. Morgan. 
 
 WASHINGTON: 
 
 GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 
 
 1894. 
 
■ 11 
 
 \>.\ 
 
53d Congress, > SENATE. ( Report 
 
 2d Session, f pfo. 227, 
 
 Of THE SENATE OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 I 
 
 February 26, 1894.— Ordered to be printed. 
 
 Mr. Morgan .submitted the following report irom the Committee on 
 
 Foreign Relations : 
 
 The following resolution of the Senate defines the limits of the 
 authority of the committee in the investigation and report it is required 
 to make: 
 
 "Resolved, That the Committee on Foreign Relations shall inquire and 
 report whether any, and, if so, what irregularities have occurred in the 
 diplomatic or other intercourse between the United States and Hawaii 
 in relation to the recent political revolution in Hawaii, and to this end 
 said committee is authorized to send for persons and papers and to 
 administer oaths to witnesses." 
 
 The witnesses were examined under oath when it was possible to 
 secure their appearance before the committee, though in some instances 
 affidavits were taken in HaAvaii and other places, and papers of a scien- 
 tific and historic character will be appended to this report and pre- 
 sented to the Senate for its consideration. 
 
 The committee did not call the Secretary of State, or any person con- 
 nected with the Hawaiian Legation, to give testimony. It was not 
 thought to be proper to question the diplomatic authorities of either 
 government on matters that are, or have been, the subject of negotia- 
 tion between them, and no power exists to authorize the examination 
 of the minister of a foreign government in any proceeding without his 
 consent. 
 
 The resolutions include an inquiry only into the intercourse between 
 the two governments, and regard the conduct of the officers of the 
 United States as a matter for domestic consideration in which Hawaii 
 is not concerned, unless it be that their conduct had some unjust and 
 improper influence upon the action of the people or Government of that 
 country in relation to the revolution. 
 
 The future policy of the two governments as to annexation, or in 
 respect of any other matter, is excluded by the resolutions from the 
 consideration of the committee, and such matters are alluded to only as 
 being incidental to the investigation which was ordered by the Senate. 
 
 The inquiry as to irregularities that may have occurred in our diplo- 
 matic or other intercourse with Hawaii must relate, first, to the con- 
 duct of the Government as shown in its official acts and correspondence,* 
 and, second, the conduct of its civil and military officers while they 
 were engaged in the discharge of their public duties and functions. 
 
 As a Government dealing with Hawaii and with any form of govern- 
 ment in that country, whether de facto ov de jure^ the United States 
 can have no separation or break in its line of policy corresponding to 
 
 M32820 
 
Uubl 
 
 II HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 any change in the incumbency of the office of President. It is in 
 all respects as much the same Government "in every right and lespon- 
 sibility as if it had been under the same President during the entire 
 period covered by the recent revolution in Hawaii and the succeeding 
 events. 
 
 This view of the situation will enable us to examine more dispas- 
 sionately the conduct of our Government, and to ascertain whether it 
 lia$-*bfcen sucluttiat^itjcan be safely drawn into precedent in any future 
 quesf ions- that? m'ay-arise in our intercourse with this or other Ameri- 
 cuxi/ge^enimentS;. •"■"**• 
 
 -. ; Jftie^glifc off &Je/VPreki dent of the United States to change his opin- 
 ions and conduct respecting a course of diplomatic correspondence 
 with a foreign government is no more to be questioned than his right 
 to institute such correspondence; and it can hot be assumed that the 
 opinions of one President, differing from those of his predecessor, has 
 any other effect upon the attitude of the Government than would fol- 
 low T a change of opinion in the mind of the same person if there had 
 been no change in the incumbency of the office. This is a view of 
 the situation in which all foreign nations may have an interest, under 
 the usages of independent powers and the international laws. But 
 the question now under consideration is regarded as being peculiar to 
 what we may term the American system. It may be true that Hawaii 
 can not be considered as a separate and independent power in respect 
 of all its relations with the United States, yet the acts of successive 
 Presidents of the United States which affect it must be regarded as the 
 acts of one President. But there are many good reasons and a long 
 and consistent course of dealing between the United States and Hawaii 
 that materially affect, if they do not entirely change, the actual rela- 
 tions between Hawaii and the United States and make them excep- 
 tional. When we claim the right to interfere in the domestic affairs of 
 Hawaii, as we would not interfere with those of a European nation, we 
 must also admit her right to whatever advantages there may be in the 
 closeness and interdependence of our relations, and her right to ques- 
 tion us as to any conflicts of policy between Mr. Harrison and. Mr. 
 Cleveland that may be justly said to work a disadvantage to the inter- 
 ests of Hawaii, if there are any. 
 
 And another principle which does not apply in our dealings with 
 European powers comes into application in this case to influence the 
 rights of Hawaii in her intercourse with the United States. 
 
 Hawaii is an American state, and is embraced in the American com- 
 mercial and military system. This fact has been frequently and firmly 
 stated by our Government, and is the ground on which is rested that 
 peculiar and far-reaching declaration so often and so earnestly made, 
 that the United States will not admit the right of any foreign govern- 
 ment to acquire any interest or control in the Hawaiian Islands that is 
 in any way prejudicial or even threatening toward the interests of the 
 United States or her peopler This is at least a moral suzerainty over 
 Hawaii. In this attitude of the two Governments, Hawaii must be 
 entitled to demand of the United States an indulgent consideration, 
 if not an active sympathy, when she is endeavoring to accomplish what 
 every other American state has achieved — the release of her people 
 from the odious antirepublican regime which denies to the people the 
 right to govern themselves, and subordinates them to the supposed 
 divine right of a monarch, whose title to such divinity originated in 
 the most slavish conditions of pagan barbarity. 
 
 The point at whicli it is alleged that there was a questionable inter- 
 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. Ill 
 
 ference by our minister and our ^Tavy with the affairs of Hawaii was 
 the landing of troops from the ship Boston in Honolulu on the 16th 
 day of January, 1893, at 5 o'clock in the afternoon. That ship, on 
 which the minister was a passenger, had been off on a practice cruise 
 at llilo, a distance of nearly 100 miles, since the 4th day of January. 
 On her return to the harbor a condition of affairs existed in Honolulu 
 which led naturally to the apprehension that violence or civil com- 
 motion would ensue, in which the peace and security of American 
 citizens residing in that city would be put in peril, as had been done 
 on three or more separate occasions previously when changes occurred 
 or were about to occur in the government of Hawaii. Whatever we 
 may conclude were the real causes of the situation then present in 
 Honolulu, the fact is that there was a complete paralysis of executive 
 government in Hawaii. The action of the Queen in an effort to over- 
 turn the constitution of 1887, to which she had sworn obedience and 
 support, had been accepted and treated by a large and powerful body 
 of the people as a violation of her constitutional obligations, revolu- 
 tionary in its character and purposes and that it amounted to an act 
 of abdication on her part, so far as her powers and the rights of the 
 people under the constitution of 1887 were concerned. This state of 
 opinion and this condition of the executive head of the Hawaiian 
 Government neutralized its power to protect American citizens and 
 other foreigners in their treaty rights, and also their rights under the 
 laws of Hawaii. There was not in Honolulu at that time any efficient 
 executive power through which the rights of American citizens 
 residing there could be protected in accordance with the local laws. 
 It is evident that the Queen's Government at that time had no power 
 to prevent the landing of troops from any quarter, no power to protect 
 itself against invasion, no power to conduct civil government, so far 
 as the executive w r as concerned, if the effort to exert such power was 
 antagonized by any opposing body of people in considerable numbers. 
 Indeed, no effort seems to have been made to exert the civil authority 
 except through the presence of a small and inefficient body of police- 
 men. The authority of the Queen was not respected by the people * it 
 was opposed, and no force appeared to be used for the purpose of 
 overcoming the opposition. It yielded to a silent but ominous opposi- 
 tion. Without reference to the question whether, in strict law, the 
 action of -the Queen in her effort to overturn the constitution of 1887, 
 and to substitute one by a proclamation which she had prepared, was a 
 revolution in government, or an effort at revolution, or amounted to 
 an actual abdication, the result was that an interregnum existed. 
 
 If we give full effect to the contention that this interregnum occurred 
 because of the apprehensions of the Queen that force would be used by 
 the United States to compel her abdication, those apprehensions could 
 not have occurred before the landing of the troops from the Boston, or, 
 if they existed, they were idle, unfounded, and unjust toward the 
 United States. It was her conduct, opposed by her people, or a large 
 portion of them, that paralyzed the executive authority and left the 
 citizens of the United States in Honolulu without the protection of any 
 law, uidess it was such as should be extended to them by the American 
 minister, in conjunction with the arms of the United States then on 
 board* the Boston. 
 
 It will appear hereafter in this report that there is w T ell-settled author- 
 ity for the position that at the moment when the Queen made public 
 her decision to absolve herself from her oath to support the constitution 
 of 1887 her abdication was complete, if the people chose so to regard 
 it. That constitution and the Queen's oath to support it was the only 
 
IV HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 foundation for her regal authority and, when she announced that her 
 oath was annulled in_its effect upon her own conscience, she could no 
 longer rightfully hold office under that constitution. In such matters 
 the word of the Queen, once sedately uttered, fixes a condition that is 
 irrevocable, uidess by the consent of those whose condition or rights 
 would be injuriously affected by its subsequent withdrawal ; as in the 
 case of a voluntary abdication in favor of a named successor; or of a 
 pardon granted to a person accused or convicted of crime; or the sig- 
 nature to a legislative act, or declaration of war. The official act of 
 the chief executive of a nation is uniformly regarded as creating a con- 
 dition or status which can not be altered or revoked at pleasure. In- 
 deed, in every case, the word of the king that works a change in exist- 
 ing conditions is the final act of the king. In the crime of treason and 
 the misprision of treason, the word that is spoken by the culprit, though 
 quickly repented of or recalled, has completed the crime and placed 
 the offender beyond the reach of all mercy except that of the sovereign 
 power. In this instance the sovereign power to pardon or condone the 
 Queen's offense resided in the people, and they have so far decided and 
 have adhered to the decision that her abdication was complete. The 
 recantation was two days later than the completed crime and was tem- 
 porary and conditional, and, in the meantime, popular sovereignty had 
 risen to the assertion of its rights, an indignant resentment had aroused 
 the people, and a large body of citizens claiming to represent them had 
 inaugurated a government of the people and for the people. Whether 
 the people opposing the Queen were strengthened in their purpose to 
 accept and act upon this abandonment by the Queen of her obligations 
 to keep her oath to support and obey the constitution by the presence 
 of the troops of the United States, or whether the Queen was dismayed 
 by their presence and was deterred from supporting her criminal act 
 by the employment other household soldiery, did not alter the fact that 
 she had openly renounced the constitution of 1887 before the troops 
 were landed or any preparation was made or any order was issued to 
 land them, and the people were preparing to substitute the monarchy, 
 which was still existing in the constitution, by a ruler of their own 
 choice before any troops left the Boston. 
 
 Whether the people would permit the restoration of the Queen, or 
 whether they would constitute a new executive head of the Government 
 of Hawaii, was a matter then undetermined, and as to that the Govern- 
 ment of the United States had but one concern, and that was that the 
 interregnum should be ended, the executive head of the Government 
 should be supplied, and the laws of Hawaii and the treaty rights of 
 American citizens should have full effect, peacefully, in the protection 
 of their rights and interests. When the Queen found that her Govern- 
 ment was opposed by a strong b6dy of the people she did not attempt 
 to reassemble the Legislature, but left the public safety in charge of a 
 committee of thirteen men, organized by those who were endeavoring 
 to preserve the peace and to restore the Government .to its full con- 
 stitutional powers by choosing an executive head. This condition of 
 things' continued from Saturday until the succeeding Tuesday, during 
 all of which time the citizens of the United States residing in Honolulu 
 had no protection of law, except such as was guarantied to them by the 
 presence of the Boston in the bay of Honolulu, or the moral influence 
 of the American legation and consulate. 
 
 When the Kamehameha dynasty ended, the monarchy in Hawaii was 
 doomed to a necessary dissolution. The five kings of that family, 
 assisted by their premiers, who were Kanaka women, and by such mis 
 sionaries as Judd, Bingham, Chamberlain, Coan, Goodrich, and Dainou 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. V 
 
 maintained the progress on civilization and prosperity, but when Ivala - 
 kaua was elected king, the most surprising and disgraceful corruptions 
 infected the Government. Without detailing in this report the con- 
 stant decline from bad to worse, which the evidence discloses, without 
 contradiction or explanation, when Liliuokalani was enthroned the 
 monarchy was a mere shell and was in condition to crumble on the 
 slightest touch of firm opposition. Under her brief rule, it was kept 
 alive by the care and forbearing tolerance of the conservative white- 
 people, who owned $50,000,000 of the property in Hawaii, until they 
 saw that the Queen and her party had determined to grasp absolute 
 power and destroy the constitution and the rights of the white people. 
 When they were compelled to act in self defense the monarchy disap- 
 peared. It required nothing but the determined action of what was 
 called the missionary party to prostrate the monarchy, and that action 
 had been taken before the troops from the Boston landed. 
 
 There was then no executive head of the Government of Hawaii ; it 
 had perished. 
 
 In landing the troops from the Boston there was no demonstration ot 
 actual hostilities, and their conduct was as quiet and as respectful as 
 it had been on many previous occasions when they were landed for the 
 purpose of drill and practice. In passing the palace on their way to the 
 point at which they were halted, the Queen appeared upon the balcony 
 and the troops respectfully saluted her by presenting arms and dipping 
 the Hag, and made no demonstration of any hostile intent. Her atti- 
 tude at that time was that of helplessness, because she found no active 
 or courageous support in her isolated position, which was self-imposed 
 and was regretted by few of her former subjects. In this condition of 
 Hawaii the laws for the protection of life and property were, in fact, 
 susx>ended so far as the executive power was concerned, and the citi- 
 zens of the United States in Honolulu and all the islands, and their 
 property rights, were virtually outlawed. The citizens of Honolulu 
 were not held amenable to the civil authorities, but were treated by* 
 the Queen, as well as by the people, as if the country was in a state of 
 war. A policeman was shot down on the streets by a person who was 
 conducting a wagon loaded with arms to the place of rendezvous where 
 the people had assembled, and no action was taken for the purpose of 
 arresting or putting on trial the man who did the shooting. 
 
 In a country where there is no power of the law to protect the 
 citizens of the United States there can be no law of nations nor any 
 rule of comity that can rightfully prevent our flag from giving shelter 
 to them under the protection of our arms, and this without reference 
 to any distress it may give to the Queen who generated the confusion, 
 or any advantage it might give to the people who are disputing her 
 right to resume or to hold her regal powers. In every country where 
 there is no effective chief executive authority, whether it is a newly- 
 discovered island fthere only savage government prevails, or one 
 where the government is paralyzed by internal feuds, it is the right, 
 claimed and exercised by all civilized nations, to enter such a country 
 with sovereign authority to assert and protect the rights of its citizens 
 and their property, and to remain there without the invitation of any- 
 body until civil government shall have been established that is adequate, 
 in a satisfactory sense, for their protection. 
 
 The committee agree that such was the condition of the Hawaiian 
 Government at the time that the troops were landed in Honolulu from 
 the steam warship Boston', that there was then an interregnum in 
 Hawaii as respects the executive office; that there was no executive 
 power to enforce the laws of Hawaii, and that it was the right of the 
 
VI . , HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 United States to land troops upon those islands at any place where it 
 was necessary in the opinion of onr minister to protect our citizens. 
 
 In what occurred in lauding the troops at Honolulu there may have 
 been an invasion, but it was not an act of war, nor did it create that 
 condition of the public law in Hawaii. 
 
 In the period of reconstruction, as it is called, which followed the civil 
 war of 1861-'G5 in the United States, a very similar condition existed, 
 or was assumed to exist, which caused Congress to provide for vacat- 
 ing the gubernatorial offices in several of the Southern States and 
 filling them by appointments of the President. 
 
 In these States strong military bodies were stationed and general 
 officers of the Army took command and enforced the laws found on their 
 statute books and also the laws of the United States. All the civil 
 officers in those sovereign States were required to obey the commands 
 of those Army officers, and they did so, often under protest, but with 
 entire submission to the military power and authority of the President, 
 exerted through the instrumentality of the Army. That was not war. 
 Yet it was j:he presence of military force, employed actively in the 
 enforcement of the civil laws, and in full supremacy over the civil 
 authority. 
 
 The only reason that could justify this invasion of sovereign states 
 by the armies of the United States was the declaration by Congress 
 that the executive governments in those states were not in the lawful 
 possession of the incumbents 5 that there was an interregnum in those 
 states as to the office of governor. 
 
 If the Queen, or the people, or both acting in conjunction, had opposed 
 the landing of the troops from the Boston with armed resistance, their 
 invasion would have been an act of war. But wheu their landing was 
 not opposed by any objection, protest, or resistance the state of war 
 did not supervene, and there was no irregularity or want of authority 
 to place the troops on shore. 
 
 In this view^ of the facts there is no necessity for inquiring whether 
 Minister Stevens or Capt. Wiltse, in arranging for the landing of the 
 troops, had any purpose either to aid the popular movement against 
 the Queen that was then taking a definite and decisive shape, or to 
 promote the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands to the United States. 
 But justice to these gentlemen requires that we should say that the 
 troops from the Boston were not sent into Honolulu for any other pur- 
 pose than that set forth fully and fairly in the following order from 
 Capt. Wiltse to the officer in command of the detachment: 
 
 U. S. S. Boston (Second Bate), 
 Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands, January 1G, 1893. 
 Lieut. Commander W. T. Swinburne, U. S. Navy, 
 
 Executive Officer, U. 8. 8. Boston: 
 Sir : You will take command of the battalion and land in Honolulu 
 for the purpose of protecting our legation, consulate, and the lives and 
 property of American citizens, and to assist in preserving public order. 
 Great prudence must be exercised by both officers and men, and no 
 action taken that is not fully Warranted by the condition of affairs and 
 by the conduct of those who may be inimical to the treaty rights of 
 American citizens. 
 
 You will inform me at the earliest practicable moment of any change 
 in the situation. v 
 
 Yery respectfully, 
 
 G. C. Wiltse, 
 Captain, TJ. 8. Navy, Commanding U. 8. 8. Boston. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. VII 
 
 As between the United States and Hawaii, as separate and inde- 
 pendent governments, that order defines the full liability of the Gov- 
 ernment of the United States in respect of landing the troops at 
 Honolulu. As between the Government of the United States and its 
 officers, the question may arise whether that order was issued in good 
 faith and tor the purposes declared upon its face, or whether it was a 
 pretext used for the purpose of assisting in the overthrow of the 
 Queen's Government and the ultimate annexation of Hawaii to the 
 I'nited States. 
 
 In reference to this last suggestion, the committee, upon the evidence 
 as it appears in their report (which they believe is a full, fair, and 
 impartial statement of the facts attending and precedent to the landing 
 of the troops), agree that the purposes of Capt. Wiltse and of Minister 
 Stevens were only those which were legitimate, viz, the preservation 
 of law and order to the extent of preventing a disturbance of the 
 public peace which might, in the absence of the troops, injuriously 
 affect the rights of the American citizens resident in Honolulu. 
 
 The troops from the Boston having rightfully and lawfully entered 
 Honolulu, and having carried with them the protection of the laws of the 
 United States for their citizens who otherwise were left without the pro- 
 tection of law, it was the right of the United States that they should 
 remain there until a competent chief executive of Hawaii should have 
 been installed in authority to take upon himself the civil power and to 
 execute the necessary authority to provide for the protection of all the 
 rights of citizens of the United States then in Honolulu, whether such 
 rights were secured by treaty or were due to them under the laws of 
 Hawaii. It was the further right of the officers representing the United 
 States in Hawaii to remain there with the troops until all the conditions 
 were present to give full assurance of security to the rights of all the 
 citizens of the United States then in Honolulu. 
 
 Before the landing of the troops a committee of safety had been* 
 organized that sent a request to the commander of the Boston that 
 troops should be landed for the purpose of preserving the public peace. 
 To this request no response was made, and later in the day the com- 
 mander of the Boston was informed that the committee of safety had 
 withdrawn its request and then desired that no troops should be landed. 
 But, disregarding all the action of the committee of safety and acting 
 only upon his sense of duty to the people of the United States who were 
 in Honolulu, Capt. Wiltse came to che conclusion that the troops should 
 be landed, and he put them in a state of preparation for that purpose 
 by lowering the boats, filling the cartridge belts of the meu, and sup- 
 plying them with proper accouterments for a stay on shore. After these 
 preparations had been completed Minister Stevens went on board the 
 ship (on Monday), and had an interview with. Capt. Wiltse. The evi- 
 dence shows that this interview related alone to the question of the pre- 
 servation of law and order in Hawaii and the protection of Americans 
 in their treaty rights. It seems that neither Minister Stevens nor Capt. 
 Wiltse then fully comprehended the fact that the United States had 
 the right, of its own authority, to send the troops on shore for the pur- 
 pose of supplying to American citizens resident there the protection of 
 law, which had been withdrawn or annulled, because of the fact that 
 there Avas then an interregnum in the executive department of the Gov- 
 ernment of Hawaii. The rights of the United States at that moment 
 were greater than they were supposed to be by Minister Stevens or 
 Capt. Wiltse, and they were not the result of treaty rights or obliga- 
 tions, but of that unfailing right to give protection to citizens of the 
 
VIII HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 United States in any country where they may be found when the 
 local authorities have, through their own mismanagement or contriv- 
 ance, rendered nugatory the power of the government to perform its 
 proper duties in the protection of their lives, property, and peace. 
 
 A further statement of ascertained facts may be necessary in order 
 to bring out more clearly the situation in Hawaii on Saturday, the 
 14th day of January, and to render more conspicuous the justification 
 of the United States in entering with its troops upon the soil of Hawaii 
 for the protection of all the rights of its citizens. 
 
 On Saturday afternoon and Sunday earnest and decisive steps were 
 being taken by the people of Honolulu who were most prominent in 
 social influence and in commerce and the professions to arm the people 
 who resented the disloyalty of the Queen to the constitution and to 
 install a new executive head of the Government. This movement had 
 resulted in the organization of a committee of safety that proposed a 
 programme for the purpose of inaugurating a provisional government. 
 This was an open, public movement, which the Queen took no steps to 
 suppress. No arrests were made, and even the apprehension of arrests 
 seems to have been almost entirely absent from the minds of the people 
 engaged in this movement. An eifort was made to divert those people 
 from their purpose, on Monday morning, by the Queen and her minis- 
 ters, who caused the following notice to be posted on the streets of Hon- 
 olulu: 
 
 "BY AUTHORITY. 
 
 "Her Majesty's ministers desire to express their appreciation for the 
 quiet and order which have prevailed in this community since the 
 events of Saturday, and are authorized to say that the position taken 
 by Her Majesty in regard to the promulgation of a new constitution 
 was under the stress of her native subjects. 
 
 " Authority is given for the assurance that any changes desired in 
 the fundamental law of the land will be sought only by the methods 
 provided in the constitution itself. 
 
 "Her Majesty's ministers request all citizens to accept the assurance 
 of Her Majesty in the same spirit in which it is given. " 
 
 This paper purported to be signed by the Queen and her ministers, 
 Samuel Parker, minister of foreign affairs ; W. H. Com well, minister 
 of finance; John F. Oolburn, minster of the interior; and A. P. Peter- 
 son, attorney- general. 
 
 The Queen did not sign it in her official character by affixing the 
 letter R to her name, and the tenor of the paper indicates that it was, 
 in fact, the act of her ministers, to which she had not given her royal 
 assent and pledge. This paper in itself contains undeniable evidence 
 that the Queen had instituted a coup Wetat on Saturday by the pro- 
 mulgation of "a new constitution," as far, at least, as she could bind 
 herself by such an act, and that she offered the excuse for this revolt 
 against the existing constitution which she had sworn to support, that 
 she acted "under stress of her native subjects." 
 
 Passing by the fact that the existence of this "stress" is not estab- 
 lished by any satisfactory evidence, the reference to it in this procla- 
 mation discloses her willing connection with the purpose to disfranchise 
 her foreign-born subjects, that being the effect of the provisions of the 
 "new constitution" that she in fact promulgated, so far as she could, 
 but hesitated to swear to for the want of sufficient support from " her 
 native subjects." The assurance given that future efforts "to change" 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. IX 
 
 the constitution of 1887 should be conducted only in the method therein 
 prescribed, was no assurance that her foreign-born subjects should be 
 protected in their vital liberties. To the reverse, it was a continuing 
 threat that they should be disfranchised and placed at the mercy of 
 racial aggression, backed by the power of the crown. The declarations 
 of the Queen made in person to Minister Willis, on three occasions, 
 and at long intervals of time after the lapse of nine months of sedate 
 reflection, show that this assurance, given in fact by her ministers, was 
 only a thin disguise of her real purpose to drive out the white popula- 
 tion and confiscate their property, and, if need be, to destroy their 
 lives. The people made no mistake as to her animosity toward them, 
 and proceeded in the same orderly manner, for which the ministers 
 gave them thanks in this proclamation, to designate an executive 
 head of the Government in place of the abdicated Queen, the abdica- 
 tion being completed and confirmed by the only authentic expression 
 of the popular will, and by the recognition of the supreme court of 
 Hawaii. 
 
 Another fact of importance connected with the situation at that time 
 is that a committee of law and order, consisting of supporters of the 
 Queen, had on Monday morning posted in public places in Honolulu 
 the following call for a public meeting and explanation of the purposes 
 of the Queen in abrogating the constitution of 1887 and in substituting 
 one which she desired and attempted to promulgate by their authority 
 as the organic law of the land. This proclamation was printed in the 
 Hawaiian language, and a translation of it is appended to this report. 
 It was printed in an extra edition of a newspaper called the Ka Leo O 
 Ka Lahui, published in Honolulu in the Hawaiian language. "The 
 stress of her native subjects," which is mentioned by the Queen in the 
 proclamation which was posted in English on the morning of January 
 16, is evidently expressed in the terms of this announcement and call, 
 and it shows that it was based upon racial distinction and prejudice 
 entirely, and indicates the feeling of resentment and controversy which, 
 if carried into effect as the Queen proposed to carry it into effect under 
 the constitution which she intended to proclaim, would have resulted 
 in the destruction of the rights of property and lives of those persons 
 who were styled "missionaries" and their posterity, from whom Hawaii 
 had derived her enlightened civilization, Christianity, constitution, 
 laws, progress, wealth and position amongst the nations of the earth. 
 This was a threat of dangerous significance, and it shows the spirit 
 of the controversy that was then pervading the minds of the people of 
 Honolulu, and illustrates how easy it was to foment strife that would 
 result in the worst of evils, in a community thus divided and thus 
 excited. The abuse of the missionaries and missionary party in this 
 call shows that the Queen and her immediate followers had concentrated 
 their efforts upon the disfranchisement of all white people in Hawaii, 
 and the return of the Governments that condition of debasement from 
 which these very people and their fathers had relieved it. 
 
 The second paragraph in this call is as follows: 
 
 "THE YOICE OF THE CHIEF. 
 
 "On the afternoon of Saturday last the voice of the Sacred Chief of 
 Hawaii, Liliuokalani, the tabued one, speaking as follows: 
 
 " *0, ye people who love the Chief, I hereby say to you, I am now 
 ready to proclaim the new constitution for my Kingdom, thinking that 
 it would be successful, but behold obstacles have arisen ! Therefore 
 
X HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 J say unto you, loving people, go with good hope and do not be dis- 
 turbed or troubled in your minds. Because, within the next few days 
 now coming, I will proclaim the new constitution. 
 
 "'The executive officers of the law (the cabinet) knew the errors in 
 this new constitution, but they said nothing. 
 
 " l Therefore, 1 hope that the thing which you, my people, so much 
 want will be accomplished ; it also is my strong desire. 7 " 
 
 Here is a direct accusation by the Queen against her cabinet, all of 
 whom, with one exception, were white men, that they had misled her 
 as to the effect of the constitution, and had failed to point out errors in 
 it which, as a pretext, led to its rejection by them, causing them to 
 refuse at- the last moment to join with her in its promulgation. This 
 call was, in fact, a new promise which was made by the Queen, with the 
 evident consent of her immediate native followers*, that within the 
 next few days now coming she would proclaim the new constitution, 
 notwithstanding her failure to give it a successful promulgation on the 
 preceding Saturday. The intensity of the Queen's opposition to the 
 missionaries and the white people was caused by her intention that the 
 Kingdom should return to its former absolute character, and that the 
 best results of civilization in Hawaii should be obliterated. 
 
 Civilization and constitutional government in Hawaii are the foster 
 children of the American Christian missionaries. It can not be justly 
 charged to the men and women who inaugurated this era of humanity, 
 light, and justice in those islands that either they or their posterity 
 or their followers, whether native or foreign, have faltered in their 
 devotion to their exalted purposes. They have not/pursued any devious 
 course in their conduct, nor have they done any wrong or harm to the 
 Hawaiian people or their native rulers. They have not betrayed any 
 trust confided to them, nor have they encouraged any vice or pandered 
 to any degrading sentiment or practice among those people. Among the 
 native Hawaiians, where they found paganism in the most abhorrent 
 forms of idolatry, debauchery, disease, ignorance and cruelty 75 years 
 ago, they planted and established, with the free consent and eager 
 encouragement of those natives and without the shedding of blood, the 
 Christian ordinance of marriage, supplanting polygamy; a reverence 
 for the character of women and a respect for their rights; the Christian 
 Sabbath and freedom of religious faith and worship, as foundations of 
 society and of the state; universal education, including the kings and 
 the peasantry; temperance in place of the orgies of drunkenness that 
 were all-pervading; and the separate holdings of lands upon which the 
 people built their homes. In doing these benevolent works the Amer- 
 ican missionary did not attempt to assume the powers and functions of 
 political government. As education, enlightenment, and the evident 
 benefits of civilization revealed to those in authority the necessity of 
 wise and faithful counsels in building up and regulating the govern- 
 ment to meet those new conditions, the kings invited some of the best 
 qualified and most trusted of these worthy men to aid them in devel- 
 oping and conducting the civil government. As a predicate for this 
 work they freely consented to and even suggested the giving up of 
 some of their absolute powers and to place others under the constraint 
 of constitutional limitations. They created an advisory council and a 
 legislature and converted Hawaii from an absolute despotism into a 
 land of law. The cabinet ministers thus chosen from the missionary 
 element were retained in office during very long periods, thus estab- 
 lishing the confidence of the kings and the people in their integrity, 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XI 
 
 wisdom, and loyalty to tie Government. Xo charge of defection or dis- 
 honesty was ever made against any of these public servants during the. 
 reign of the Karnehamehas, nor indeed at any time. They acquired 
 property in moderate values by honest means, and labored to exhibit 
 to the people the advantages of industry, frugality, economy, and 
 thrift. 
 
 The progressive elevation of the country and of the people from the 
 very depravity of paganism into an enlightened and educated common- 
 wealth and the growth of their industries and wealth will be seen at a 
 glance in the statements of the most important events and in the tables 
 showing the most important results of their work and influence, which 
 are set forth in the evidence accompanying this report. This array of 
 undisputed facts shows that, with Christianity and education as the 
 basis, there has come over Hawaii the most rapid and successful improve- 
 ment in political, industrial, and commercial conditions that has marked 
 the course of any people in Christendom. 
 
 In the message of President Tyler to Congress he says: 
 
 "The condition of those islands has excited a good deal of interest, 
 which is increasing by every successive proof that their inhabitants are 
 making progress in civilization and becoming more and more competent 
 to maintain regular and orderly government. They lie in the Pacific 
 Ocean, much nearer to this continent than the other, and have become 
 an important place for the refitment and provisioning of American and 
 European vessels. 
 
 Ui Owing to their locality and to the course of the winds which pre- 
 vail in this quarter of the world the Sandwich Islands are the stopping 
 place for almost all vessels passing from continent to continent across 
 th e Paci fi c Ocean . Th ey are especially resorted to by the great numbers 
 of vessels of the United States which are engaged in the whale fishery 
 in those seas. The number of vessels of all sorts and the amount of 
 property owned by citizens of the United States which are found in those 
 islands in the course of a year are stated probably with sufficient 
 accuracy in the letter of the agents. 
 
 u i Just emerging from a state of barbarism, the Government of the 
 islands is as yet feeble; but its dispositions appear to be just and 
 pacific, and it seems anxious to improve the condition of its people by 
 the introduction of knowledge, of religious and moral institutions, 
 means of education, and the arts of civilized life.' n 
 
 In the House of Representatives this subject was referred to the 
 Committee on Foreign Affairs, and Hon. John Q. Adams, in conclud- 
 ing his report upon the subject, says: 
 
 "It is a subject of cheering contemplation to the friends of human 
 improvement and virtue that, by the mild and gentle influence of 
 Christian charity, dispensed by humble missionaries of the gospel, 
 unarmed with secular power, within the last quarter of a century the 
 people of this group of islands have been converted from the lowest 
 debasement of idolatry to the blessings of the Christian gospel; united 
 under one balanced government; rallied to the fold of civilization by a 
 written language and constitution, providing security for the rights of 
 persons, property, and mind, and invested with all the elements of right 
 and power which can entitle them to be acknowledged by their brethren 
 of the human race as a separate and independent community. To 
 the consummation of their acknowledgment the people of the North 
 
XII HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 American Union are urged by an interest of tlieir own deeper than 
 that of any other portion of the inhabitants of the earth — by a virtual 
 right of conquest, not over the freedom of their brother man by the 
 brutal arm of physical power, but over the mind and heart by the 
 celestial panoply of the gospel of peace and love." 
 
 It can not be other than a proud reflection of the American people 
 that the free institutions of the United States gave origin and impulsive 
 zeal, as well as guidance, to the good men who laid these foundations 
 of civil government in Hawaii upon written constitutions supported 
 by the oaths of those in authority and loyally sustained by those of 
 the people who are virtuous and intelligent. Is or can the American 
 people condemn the firm adhesion of those whose rights are guaranteed 
 by constitutional law in Hawaii to the demand that is now r made for 
 the maintenance of its permanent integrity. If nothing but a decent 
 respect for our national example was in question, if there was no 
 question in Hawaii that concerned the people of the United States 
 except that of a relapse of that Government into absolute monarchy, if 
 there was no degradation of society involved in this falling away, no 
 destruction of property and liberty in contemplation, there would 
 still be enough in the conditions now presented there to excite the 
 most anxious interest of our people. Citizens of the United States with 
 wisclom, charity, Christian faith, and a love of constitutional govern- 
 ment, have patiently, laboriously, and honestly built up Hawaii into a 
 civilized power under a written constitution, and they can justly 
 claim the sympathy and assistance of all civilized people in resisting 
 its destruction, either to gratify a wanton lust of absolute power on 
 the part of the Queen, or the abuse of its authority in fostering vice 
 and rewarding crime. The facts of recent history present broadly ana 
 distinctly the question between an absolute and corrupt monarchy in 
 Hawaii, and a government in which the rights and liberties guaranteed 
 by a written constitution shall be respected and preserved. The facts 
 do not show that the people who built up this constitutional system 
 and have based upon it wholesome laws and a well balanced and well 
 guarded plan of administration have had any desire to abrogate the 
 organic laws, corrupt the statute laws, or to dethrone the Queen. In 
 every phase of their dealings with these questions their course has 
 been conservative, and the defense of their lives, liberty, and property, 
 and the honest administration of the government has been the real 
 motive of their actions. They are not, therefore, to be justly classed 
 as conspirators against the Government. That they turn their thoughts 
 toward the United States and desire annexation to this country could 
 not be denied without imputing to them the loss of the sentiment of 
 love and reverence for this Eepublic that is utterly unknown to our 
 people. 
 
 On Monday, the 16th of January, 1893, Hawaii was passing through 
 the severe ordeal of a trial which was conducted by the people who 
 arrayed themselves on the side of the Queen and those who were organ- 
 ized in opposition to her revolutionary purposes. The Queen seems to 
 have abandoned the controversy into the hands of the people, and made 
 no effort to suppress, the meeting of the citizens opposed to her revolu- 
 tionary proceedings by calling out her troops to disperse the meeting 
 or to arrest its leaders. Both the meetings were quiet and orderly, but 
 the meeting at the arsenal was intensely earnest, and men were heard to 
 express their opinions freely and without interruption at both meet- 
 ings, and they came to their resolutions without disturbance. When 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, XIII 
 
 these meetings dispersed, the Queen's effort to reject the constitution 
 of 1887 had been approved by the one meeting heJd on the palace 
 grounds and composed almost entirely of native Kanakas; the other 
 meeting had resolved to establish a provisional government, and formed 
 a committee to proceed with its organization. The Queen, though thus 
 strongly indorsed by her native-born subjects, as she calls them, did 
 not venture any arrests of the alleged revolutionists, but, evidently 
 conscious that the revolution which she had endeavored to set on foot 
 had failed of efficient support, she did not use her troops or the police 
 or any other power in the direction of asserting her royal authority. 
 The meeting of the people at the arsenal was followed by organization, 
 the arming of the citizens, the strong array of forces, and a determined 
 spirit of success which has materialized into an established government 
 that has continued to exist for more than a year, practically without 
 any opposition in Hawaii, and with the recognition of many great 
 powers, including the United States. These events show, beyond rea- 
 sonable dispute, the acceptance by the people of Hawaii of the judg- 
 ment and determination of the meeting at the arsenal that the Queen 
 had abdicated, that her authority had departed, that she and her 
 ministers had submitted to the inevitable, and that they retained no 
 longer any substantial ground of hope or expectation that the Queen 
 would be restored to her former office. 
 
 The question whether such a state of affairs as is shown by the 
 undisputed iacts in this case constitute an abdication and created an 
 interregnum was passed upon in England with more care, because of 
 the serious results that followed the decision, than seems to have been^ 
 bestowed upon a like controversy in any other country. 
 
 The people of Great Britain have many liberties that are firmly 
 established in the traditions of that country, and on many occasions 
 they have asserted their rights, as the basis of governmental power, with 
 great determination and success. In 1688, when James II was on the 
 throne, his severe conduct, exercised through the judiciary of the King- 
 dom and in other ways, and a strong adhesion to the Catholic religion, 
 caused the people of Great Britain to accuse him of an intention to vio- 
 late their unwritten constitution. He was a great and powerful king, 
 and had accomplished very much for the glory and honor of England. 
 But the people of England held him to an observance of the spirit of 
 his oath of loyalty to the constitution of that country, and, when they 
 became satisfied that he had made an effort to subvert it, they in their 
 Parliament passed upon the question of his abdication and held that 
 his intention and effort to violate the constitution robbed him of his 
 title to the crown and opened the door to the establishment of a new 
 dynasty. Blackstone, in speaking of these events, says: 
 
 "King James II succeeded to the throne of his ancestors, and 
 might have enjoyed it during the remainder of his life but for his own 
 infatuated conduct which, with other concurring circumstances, brought 
 on the revolution in 1688. 
 
 "The true ground and principle upon which that memorable event 
 proceeded was an entirely new case in politics, which had never 
 before happened in our history — the abdication of the reigning mon- 
 arch and the vacancy of the throne thereupon. It was not a defeas- 
 ance of the right of succession and a new limitation of the crown by 
 the King and both Houses of Parliament ; it was the act of the nation 
 alone upon the conviction that there was no king in being. For, in a 
 full assembly of the lords and commons, met in a couveution upon the 
 
XIV HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 supposition of this vacancy, both houses came to this resolution: 'That 
 King* James II, having' endeavored to subvert the constitution of the 
 Kingdom by Breaking the original contract between King and people; 
 and, by the advice of Jesuits and other wicked persons, having violated 
 the fundamental law and having withdrawn himself out of this King- 
 dom has abdicated the Government, and that the throne is hereby 
 vacant.'" 
 
 Proceeding further, this eminent jurist says: 
 
 "For whenever a question arises between the society at large and 
 any magistrate vested with powers originally delegated by that soci- 
 ety it must be decided by the voice of the society itself; there is not 
 upon earth any other tribunal to resort to. And that these conse- 
 quences were fairly deduced from these facts our ancestors have sol- 
 emnly determined in a full parliamentary convention representing the 
 whole society." 
 
 Further quoting from Blackstone, he says : 
 
 "They held that this misconduct of King James amounted to an 
 endeavor to subvert the constitution and not to an actual subversion 
 or total dissolution of the Government, according to the principles of 
 Mr. Locke, which would have reduced the society almost to a state of 
 nature; would have leveled all distinctions of honor, rank, offices, and 
 property; would have annihilated the sovereign power, and in conse- 
 quence have repealed all positive laws, and would have left the people 
 at liberty to have erected a new system of State upon a new foundation 
 of polity. They therefore very prudently voted it to amount to no 
 more than an abdication of the Government and a consequent vacancy 
 of the throne, whereby the Government was allowed to subsist though 
 the executive magistrate w 7 as gone, and the kingly office to remain 
 though King James was no longer King. And thus the constitution 
 was kept entire, which upon every sound principle of government must 
 otherwise have fallen to pieces had so principal and constituent a part 
 as the royal authority been abolished or even suspended. 
 
 "This single postulatum, the vacancy of the throne, being once estab- 
 lished the rest that was then done followed almost of course. For, if 
 the throne be at any time vacant (which may happen by other means 
 besides that of abdication, as if all the blood-royal should fail, with- 
 out any successor appointed by Parliament) — if, I say, a vacancy, by 
 any means whatsoever; should happen, the right of disposing of this 
 vacancy seems naturally to result to the Lords and Commons, the trus- 
 tees and representatives of the nation. For there are no other hands 
 in which it can so properly be intrusted; and there is a necessity of its 
 being intrusted somewhere, else the whole frame of government must 
 be dissolved and perish." 
 
 The principle on which this decision in regard to the abdication of 
 King James II rests is still stronger when it is applied to persons who 
 are citizens of the United States but who reside in Hawaii, and by 
 the constitution and laws of Hawaii are admitted into an active par- 
 ticipation in the conduct of government, both as officeholders and as 
 qualified electors. If they, in connection with the native or natural- 
 ized subjects of the Kingdom of Hawaii, unite in demanding the pres- 
 ervation of their constitutional rights, there should be no captious or 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XV 
 
 technical objections taken to the assertion of that right, or'to the man- 
 ner of its exercise. 
 
 In reference to all citizens of the United States residing in Hawaii 
 and not actual members or officers of that Government, the spirit of 
 our laws, in accordance with the principles of the Constitution and the 
 traditions of the people, should be applied to their protection, when it 
 is the duty of the United States to protect them, and especially are 
 they entitled to the full advantage of the protection that is afforded 
 under that doctrine of personal liberty and security which upholds the 
 authority of governments de facto. When such a government arises 
 out of alleged abuses and grievances and is set up in good faith by the 
 intelligent classes to succeed a monarchy in a state that is the only 
 monarchy in a sisterhood of many republics, the rules governing its 
 recognition are not those that seem to control in cases where the state 
 is a sole republic surrounded by an environment of monarchies. 
 
 in Europe, where governmental successions have no relation to the 
 will of the people, every presumption that can be made to support the 
 regal system is adopted and enforced with rigid care. The old condi- 
 tions are presumed to exist in a regal government until the new gov- 
 ernment has accomplished a complete revolution and until nothing 
 remains to be done to secure an uninterrupted and unembarrassed 
 installation of its authority. Those presumptions are all in favor of 
 the crown and are easily applied in practical use, as the crown is a 
 political unit and acts with certainty in the assertion of its claims. 
 When the rights asserted against the crown are set up by the people, 
 or for the people, the act is necessarily a representative act, and the 
 authority of the alleged representative is severely questioned. Indeed, 
 it is not considered as existing in European countries until, through 
 bloodshed or an overwhelming exhibition of forces, its acknowledgment 
 is literally compelled. The reverse of this rule should obtain in that 
 part of the world where it is held, universally, that the right to govern 
 depends upon the consent of the governed and not upon a divine inher- 
 itance of power. In a controversy like that in Hawaii the presumption 
 is in favor of those who unite to assert the constitutional rights of the 
 people, that they are acting in good faith, and that they are not seek- 
 ing personal aggrandizement, but the good of the people. When such 
 a popular movement engages the evident support of those whom the 
 people have trusted for their integrity to an extent that inspires a just 
 confidence of success a sufficient foundation exists, at least, for a gov- 
 ernment de facto ; and it is no more necessary to its validity that every 
 possible obstacle to its final success has been removed than it would be 
 necessary, on the other hand, to the permanency of the crown that 
 every rebellious subject of the Queen had been slain or banished and 
 their estates had been confiscated. 
 
 The supporters of Liliuokalani seem to be forced into the attitude of 
 claiming that it is of no consequence that she may have forfeited her 
 right to the crown and had placed it in the power of the people law- 
 fully to claim that this was an abdication, unless the people had over- 
 come and removed every vestige of her power before they proclaimed 
 the Provisional Government. Her known purpose to press the abso- 
 lute powers claimed by her in the new constitution to the extent of 
 the banishment or death of the white population seems not to be per- 
 mitted to excuse the action of the people in displacing her, if they had 
 not captured her small force of policemen and soldiers before the 
 American minister had recognized the Provisional Government. 
 
XVI HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Liliuokalani did not seem to take this narrow view of the revolution 
 she had inaugurated. 
 
 The banishment or death of the white people and the confiscation 
 of their estates was the final decree recorded in the Queen's heart and 
 mind, as she freely stated to Minister Willis, and until this cruel work 
 had been accomplished she held that her policy of revolution would 
 be a failure. There is some ground for hope that these were not her 
 sincere purposes or wishes but that in giving expression to them she 
 was " playing a part." As opposed to such purposes, or to a Queen 
 who could imagine them in the presence of the constitutional protec- 
 tion given to the rights and liberties of the people throughout this 
 hemisphere, Americans should not hesitate in the support of a govern- 
 ment de facto, set up to oppose her, because she had not made a formal 
 surrender of a place where a few soldiers and policemen had been 
 stationed, who were powerless to hold it against the people then under 
 arms. It was an act of mercy to her and her retainers that they were 
 not forced into the commission of acts of violence. An interregnum 
 existed in the executive Government of Hawaii, which was caused by 
 the effort of the Queen to destroy the constitution of 1887, and by the 
 act of the people in accepting her will for the completed coup aVetat, 
 and, in making that the occasion for supplying the executive depart- 
 ment of the Government with a chief. 
 
 A careful investigation has failed to show that any conspiracy now 
 exists that is directed to the virtual displacement of the Provisional Gov- 
 ernment. The personal efforts of the Queen seem to have been directed 
 toward a provision for a safe and comfortable life, free from the anxie- 
 ties of office and "the stress of her native subjects." Her power of 
 attorney to Paul jSewman and his mission to the United States indicate 
 a reliance on the u arts of peace" rather than of war for indemnity for 
 the past and security for the future. The opinions, or sentiments, 
 expressed by her in the three interviews she had with Mr. Willis, in 
 which she uttered the severest denunciations against the Avhite race in 
 Hawaii, and declared her willingness, if not her purpose, to confiscate 
 their ewstates and to banish or to destroy them, while they are a seeming 
 expression of the lofty indignation of an offended ruler, are so un suited 
 to the character of a queen crowned by a Christian and civilized people, 
 and so out of keeping with her character as a woman who had received 
 kindly recognition and personal regard from other good and refined 
 ladies, that they shock all right-minded people in Christendom. The 
 Government of the United States should willingly forbear to regard 
 these utterances as her official expression of such designs upon the 
 lives and liberties of those whom she would find in her power, upon her 
 restoration to the throne, and accept them as a means adopted by her 
 to convince Mr. Willis that her restoration to the throne was impossi- 
 ble, and was not in accordance with her wishes. 
 
 The President, on the first intimation of these harsh declarations of 
 the Queen, at once laid them before Congress, and abandoned the 
 further exercise of his good offices to bring about a reconciliation between 
 her and those who were conducting and supporting the Provisional 
 Government. 
 
 Mr. Willis, however, regarding his instructions as continuing to 
 require his intercession beyond the point where the President consid- 
 ered that it should cease, held a second and third interview with Lili- 
 uokalani. After these interviews had closed, the Queen being still 
 firm in her course, Mr. Carter, a trusted friend, obtained her signa- 
 ture to a pledge of amnesty, and made that the basis of his proposition 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XVII 
 
 to Mr. Dole for the abandonment of the •Provisional Government, which 
 was summarily refused. This closed that incident. Mr. Willis, in 
 what he did, obeyed what he conceived to be his instructions, and being 
 so distant from Washington, it is a matter of regret, bu»t not of surprise, 
 that there was an apparent want of harmony between his action in con- 
 tinuing his interviews with Liliuokalani after the President had deter- 
 mined that the full duty of the Government had been performed. 
 
 The attitude of Liliuokalani at the conclusion of this proceeding is 
 that of waiting for a pleasant retirement from the cares of public life, 
 rather than of waiting for an opportunity to bring about a hostile col- 
 lision with the people who support the new order of government in 
 Hawaii. 
 
 In dealing with a grave subject, now for the first time presented in 
 America, we must consider the conditions of public sentiment as to 
 monarchic government, and Ave shall derive also material help from the 
 light of English history. In the Western Hemisphere, except as to 
 the colonial relation, which has become one of mere political alliance 
 chiefly for commercial reasons, and does not imply in any notable 
 case absolute subjection to imperial or royal authority, royalty no 
 longer exists. When a crown falls, in any kingdom of the Western 
 Hemisphere, it is pulverized, and when a scepter departs, it departs 
 forever j and American opinion can not sustain any American ruler in 
 the attempt to restore them, no matter how virtuous and sincere the 
 reasons may be that seem to justify him. There have been heathen 
 temples in the older States in this hemisphere where the bloody orgies 
 of pagan worship and sacrifice have crimsoned history with shame ; and 
 very recently such temples have been erected in the United States to 
 abuse Christianity by the use of its sacred name and ritual. When 
 the arms of invaders, or mobs of the people, have destroyed these 
 temples, no just indignation at the cruelties that may have been perpe- 
 trated in their destruction could possibly justify their restoration. 
 
 It is a great blessing to this Western World that the nations are to be 
 spared the calamities which Blackstone describes as "imbruing the 
 kingdom of England in blood and confusion," growing out of claims ot 
 succession to the crown. In almost every reign prior to that of the 
 present house of Hanover, the lives aud property of the people of 
 England, amid the greatest cruelties, have been sacrificed in settling 
 pretensions to the crown. It was these conflicts and this distress ot 
 innocent sufferers that caused the people to claim through the judges 
 the protection of the doctrine, that service rendered to the king who 
 held the scepter was lawful, although he was not rightfully in possession 
 of the crown. No greater liberty of the people was ever devised or 
 granted than the right of protection under a king de facto against a king 
 de jure. 
 
 Be facto governments, when they seek to supply the gap created by 
 an interregnum, are favored in the international law, and when they 
 are also based on the right of popular government in conflict with regal 
 government, or to prevent its reestablishment, once it has disappeared 
 in a State of the Western Hemisphere, it is so rooted and established in 
 the foundations of the rightful authority to rule that it is justly to be 
 ranked among the cardinal liberties of the people. 
 
 This doctrine is not new, and yet it is modern in England, where the 
 
 right to the crown and its prerogatives have bled the people for fifteen 
 
 centuries. The stringent doctrine that a de facto government must be 
 
 established firmly and in all respects before it is entitled to recognition 
 
 S. Rep. 227 n 
 
XVIII HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 "by another sovereign and independent power had no application to 
 the facts and circumstances that attended the recent revolution in 
 Hawaii; moreover, if the revolution tli ere had been directed agai ist 
 the entire government and for the overthrow of the constitution of 1887, 
 and all monarchic rule, if it was a sincere, strong, earnest and success- 
 nil movement of the people for the recovery of their natural right to 
 rule themselves, they should not be narrowly questioned and held to 
 rigid account for a proper and discreet performance of every act neces- 
 sary to their resumption of their natural rights, but all America must 
 unite in the declaration that, under such circumstances, the presump- 
 tions of law should be favorable to such movements, rather than 
 unfriendly to the establishment by the people of the foundations of their 
 liberties, based upon their right to govern themselves. 
 
 The parliament of Hawaii had been prorogued by the Queen on the 
 14th day of January, and could not be again assembled under the con- 
 stitution, except by the chief executive authority. Until that author- 
 ity was supplied in some way, therefore, the Legislature could not be 
 reconvened. It was the establishment of that authority, the chief 
 executive head of the nation, which was the question at issue, and 
 when that was decided, an appeal to the Legislature of Hawaii for its 
 confirmation or ratification was not only unnecessary, but might have 
 resulted in a counter revolution. It was, therefore, in the interest of 
 peace, good order, and right government, that the people of Hawaii, 
 who were unopposed in their process of organizing an executive head 
 for the Government, should proceed to do so as they did, regularly and 
 in an orderly, firm, and successful manner. Thus the abdication of Lil- 
 iuokalani was confirmed and has so continued from that day to this. 
 The Government of the United States has on various occasions recog- 
 nized the succession to the executive authority as residing in the Pro- 
 visional Government initiated at that public meeting at the arsenal and 
 consummated on the 17th day of January by public proclamation. 
 Then, on the 17th day of January, according to the recognition of the 
 United States, from which there has been no dissent or departure, the 
 interregnum ceased, and the executive head of the Government of 
 Hawaii was established. Until this was completed, on the 17th day of 
 January, by the proclamation of the Provisional Government, the 
 United States was still charged, under every principle of law and jus- 
 tice and under the highest obligation of duty, to keep her forces in 
 Honolulu, and to enforce, in virtue of her sovereign authority, the 
 rights of her citizens under the treaty obligations and also under the 
 laws of Hawaii, relating to the safety of person and property and the 
 rights of industry, commerce, and hospitality in their free pursuit and 
 enjoyment. And when the Provisional Government was thus estab- 
 lished, it rested with the United States to determine whether the Gov- 
 ernment of Hawaii was so far rehabilitated and so safely established 
 that these rights of her citizens could be intrusted to its keeping. The 
 recognition of such a state of affairs, within a country whose executive 
 department has been made vacant in consequence of domestic strife, is 
 quite a separate and different proceeding, both in form and effect, from 
 the recognition of the political independence of a government that is 
 complete in its organization. In the latter case, the recognition excludes 
 all right of interference in its domestic affairs, while in the former it is 
 the right and duty of supplying the protection of law to the citizen 
 that makes interference necessary as well as lawful. 
 
 The independence of Hawaii, as a sovereign State had been long 
 recognized by the United States, and this unhappy occasion did not 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XIX 
 
 suggest the need of renewing that declaration. The question presented 
 in Honolulu on and after the 12th of January, 1893, was whether the 
 Queen continued to be the executive head of the Government of 
 Hawaii. That was a question of fact which her conduct and that of 
 her people placed in perilous doubt until it was decided by the proc- 
 lamation of a new executive. Pending that question there was no 
 responsible executive government in Hawaii. On the 17th of January 
 that doubt was resolved to the satisfaction of the American minister, 
 and of all other representatives of foreign governments in Hawaii, in 
 favor of the Provisional Government. This recognition did not give 
 to the Government of Hawaii the legal or moral right to expel the 
 troops of any government, stationed in Honolulu in the period of inter- 
 regnum, until it had so firmly established its authority as to give to 
 foreigners the security to provide for which these troops had been 
 landed. Good faith and an honest respect for the rights of friendly 
 nations would certainly require the withdrawal of all further interfer- 
 ence with the domestic affairs of Hawaii as soon as that government 
 had provided security that was reasonably sufficient for the protection 
 of the citizens of the United States. But the Government of the 
 United States had the right to keep its troops in Honolulu until these 
 conditions were performed, and the Government of Hawaii could cer- 
 tainly acquiesce in such a policy without endangering its independence 
 or detracting from its dignity. This was done, and the troops from 
 the Boston camped on shore for several months. The precise hour 
 when or the precise conditions under which the American minister 
 recognized the Provisional Government is not a matter of material 
 importance. It was his duty, at the earliest safe period, to assist by 
 his recognition in the termination of the interregnum, so that citizens 
 of the United States might be safely remitted to the care of that Gov- 
 ernment for the security of their rights. As soon as he was convinced 
 that the Provisional Government was secure against overthrow it Avas 
 his duty to recognize the rehabilitated State. Whether this was done 
 an hour or two sooner or later could make no substantial difference 
 as to his rights or duties, if he was satisfied that the movement was 
 safe against reversal. If no question of the annexation of Hawaii to 
 the United States had existed, the conduct of the American minister 
 in giving official recognition to the Provisional Government would not 
 have been the subject of adverse criticism. But the presence of that 
 question and his anxious advocacy of annexation did not relieve him 
 from the duty or abridge his right to call for the troops on the Boston 
 to protect the citizens of the United States during an interregnum in 
 the office of chief executive of Hawaii. They were not to be put into 
 a state of outlawry and peril if the minister had been opx>osed to 
 annexation, nor could his desire on that subject in anyway affect their 
 rights or his duty. He gave to them the protection they had the 
 right to demand, and, in respect of his action up to this point, so far 
 as it related to Hawaii, his opinions as to annexation have not affected 
 the attitude of the U. S. Government, and the committee finn* no cause 
 of censure either against Minister Stevens or Capt. Wiltse, of the 
 Boston. 
 
 Afterward, on the 1st day of February, 1893, the American minister 
 caused the flag of the United States to be raised on the Government 
 building in Honolulu, and assumed and declared a protectorate over 
 that nation in the name of the United States. This act on the part of 
 our minister was without authority, and was void for want of power. 
 It was disavowed by Secretary Foster and rebuked by Secretary 
 
XX HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Gresham, and the order to abandon the protectorate and haul down 
 the flag was in accordance with the duty and honor of the United 
 States. To haul down the flag of the United States was only an order 
 to preserve its honor. 
 
 The diplomatic officers of the United States in Hawaii have the right 
 to much larger liberty of action in respect to the internal affairs of that 
 country than would be the case with any other country with which 
 we have no peculiar or special relations. In oar diplomatic corre- 
 spondence with Hawaii and in the various treaties, some of them trea- 
 ties of annexation, which have been signed and discussed, though not 
 ratified, from time to time, there has been manifested a very near rela- 
 tionship between the two governments. The history of Hawaii in its 
 progress, education, development, and government, and in Christianity, 
 has been closely identified with that of the United States — so closely, 
 indeed, that the United States has not at any time hesitated to declare 
 that it would permit no intervention in the affairs of Hawaii by any 
 foreign government which might tend to disturb the relations with the 
 United States, or to gain any advantages there over the Americans 
 who may have settled in that country. The United States has assumed 
 and deliberately maintained toward Hawaii a relation which is entirely 
 exceptional, and has no parallel in our dealings with any other people. 
 
 The justification for this attitude is not a matter with which the pres- 
 ent inquiry is necessarily connected, but its existence furnishes a good 
 excuse, if excuse is needed, for a very lively concern on the part of our 
 diplomatic representatives in everything that relates to the progress of 
 that people. 
 
 The causes that have led to this peculiar situation are altogether 
 apparent. They are in every sense honorable, just, and benevolent. 
 One nation can not assume such an attitude toward another, especially 
 if the latter is, by contrast, small, weak, and dependent upon the good 
 will or forbearance of the world for its existence, without giving to it 
 a guaranty of external and internal security. 
 
 The attitude of the United States toward Hawaii, thus voluntarily 
 assumed, gives to Hawaii the right to regard it as such a guaranty. 
 
 In the absence of a policy to establish a colonial system and of any 
 disposition for territorial aggrandizement, the Government of the United 
 States looked with approbation and gave encouragement to the labors 
 and influence of their citjzens in Hawaii, in laying the groundwork of 
 a free and independent government there which, in its principles and 
 in the -distribution of powers, should be like our own, and ultimately 
 become republican in form. This has been the uuconcealed wish of the 
 people of the United States, in which many of the native Hawaiian s 
 have participated. 
 
 Observing the spirit of the Monroe doctrine, the United States, in the 
 beginning of our relations with Hawaii, made a firm and distinct decla- 
 ration of the purpose to prevent the absorption of Hawaii or the political 
 control of that country by any foreign power. Without stating the 
 reasons for this policy, which included very important commercial and 
 military considerations, the attitude of the United States toward Hawaii 
 was in moral effect that of a friendly protectorate. It lias been a settled 
 policy of the United States that if it should turn out that Hawaii, for 
 any cause, should not be able to maintain an independent government, 
 that country would be encouraged in its tendency to gravitate toward 
 political union with this country. 
 
 The treaty relations between Hawaii and the United States, as fixed 
 by several conventions that have been ratified, and by other negotia- 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XXI 
 
 turns, have been characterized by a sentiment of close reciprocity. Tn 
 addition to trade relations of the highest advantage to Hawaii, the 
 Tinted States has so far interfered with the internal policy of Hawaii 
 as to secure an agreement from that Government restricting the disposal 
 of bays and harbors and the crown lands to other countries, and has 
 secured exclusive privileges in Pearl Harbor of great importance to 
 this Government. 
 
 This attitude of the two governments and the peculiar friendship of 
 the two peoples, together with the advantages given to Hawaii in com- 
 merce, induced a large and very enterprising class of people from the 
 United States to migrate to those islands and to invest large sums of 
 money in the cultivation of sugar and rice, and in other trade and 
 industry. The introduction of laborers from Japan and China in great 
 numbers gave to the governing power in Hawaii a new and very sig- 
 nificant importance, and made it necessary, for the protection of the 
 interests of the white or European people and of the natives, that the 
 safeguards of the organic law of the Kingdom should be carefully 
 preserved. In the efforts to secure these guarantees of safe govern- 
 ment, no distinction of race was made as to the native or Kanaka pop- 
 ulation, but Chinese and Japanese were excluded from participation in 
 the government as voters, or as officeholders. 
 
 Apprehensions of civil disturbance in Hawaii caused the United States 
 to keep ships of war at Honolulu for many years past, almost without 
 intermission, and the instructions that were given to our diplomatic 
 and consular officers and to the naval commanders on that station went 
 beyond the customary instructions applicable to other countries. In 
 most instances, the instructions so given included the preservation of 
 order and of the peace of the country, as well as the protection and 
 preservation of the property and of the lives and treaty rights of Amer- 
 ican citizens. 
 
 The circumstances above mentioned, which the evidence shows to 
 have existed, create a new light under which we must examine into the 
 conduct of our diplomatic and naval officers in respect of the revolution 
 that occurred in Hawaii in January, 1893. In no sense, and at no time, 
 has the Government of the United States observed toward the domes- 
 tic affairs of Hawaii the strict impartiality and the indifference enjoined 
 by the general law of noninterference, in the absence of exceptional 
 conditions. We have always exerted the privilege of interference in 
 the domestic policy of Hawaii to a degree that would not be justified, 
 under our view of the international law, in reference to the affairs of 
 Canada, Cuba, or Mexico. 
 
 The cause of this departure from our general course of diplomatic 
 conduct is the recognized fact that Hawaii has been all the time under 
 a virtual suzerainty of the United States, which is, by an apt and 
 familiar definition, a paramount authority, not in any actual sense an 
 actual sovereignty, but a de facto supremacy over the country. This 
 sense of paramount authority, of supremacy, with the right to inter- 
 vene in the affairs of 1 Tawaii, has uever been lost sight of by the United 
 States to this day, and it is conspicously manifest in the correspondence 
 of Mr. Willis with Mr. Dole, which is set forth in the evidence which 
 accompanies this report. 
 
 Another fact of importance in considering the conduct of our diplo- 
 matic and naval officers during the revolution of January, 1803, is that 
 the annexation of Hawaii to the United States has been the subject of 
 careful study and almost constant contemplation among Hawaiians and 
 their kings >>ince the beginning of the reign of Kamehameha I. This 
 
XXII HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, 
 
 has always been regarded by the ruling xwwer in Hawaii as a coveted 
 and secure retreat — a sort of house of refuge — whenever the exigencies 
 of fate might compel Hawaii to make her choice between home rule and 
 foreign domination, either in the form of a protectorate, or of submis- 
 sion to some foreign sovereign. 
 
 Hawaii has always desired an escape to a freer government, when 
 she has to be forced to the point where the surrender of racial pride 
 and her standing as a nation would be the severe penalty of her 
 weakness. Hawaiians prefer citizenship in a great republic to the 
 slavery of subjection to any foreign monarchy. Annexation to the 
 United States has never been regarded with aversion, or with a sense 
 of national degradation, by the Hawaiian people. On the contrary, it 
 has been adopted as a feature of political action by those who have 
 attempted to recommend themselves to the support of the people in 
 times of danger. 
 
 In the revolution of January, 1893, those who assumed the sovereign 
 power, declaring that there was an interregnum, made it a conspicuous 
 part of their avowed purpose to remain in authority until Hawaii 
 should be annexed to the United States. This was stated as an argu- 
 ment for the creation of a provisional government, without which there 
 would be less advantage in the change of the situation. Annexation 
 was an avowed purpose of the Provisional Government, because it 
 would popul arize the movement. No one could project a revolution 
 in Hawaii for the overthrow of the monarchy, that would not raise 
 the question among the people of annexation to the United States. 
 
 In the diplomatic correspondence of the United States with our min- 
 isters to Hawaii, frequent and favorable allusion is made to this sub- 
 ject as a matter of friendly consideration for the advantage of that 
 country and people, and not as a result that would enhance the wealth 
 or power of the United States. This treatment of the subject began 
 very early in the history of Hawaiian civilization, and it was taken up 
 and discussed by the people of the islands as a topic of patriotic inspi- 
 ration. It was their habit to celebrate the anniversary of the independ- 
 ence of the United States, as a national fete day. So that, there was 
 no thought of conspiracy against the monarchy in openly favoring the 
 project of annexation. Whether annexation is wise and beneficial to 
 both countries is a question that must receive the consideration of both 
 governments before it can be safely settled. 
 
 The testimony taken by the committee discloses the well-considered 
 opinion of several of oar most eminent naval and military officers, that 
 the annexation of Hawaii is a fact indispensable to the proper defense 
 and protection of our Western coast and cities. But this is a matter 
 with which the committee is not especially charged, and reference is 
 made to these opinions as supporting the statement that all intelligent 
 men in Hawaii and in the United States, who have taken pains to con- 
 sider the subject, are convinced that the question is one deserving of 
 thorough investigation and a correct and friendly decision. The ques- 
 tion of annexation, however, is distinctly presented in the proclama- 
 tion of the Provisional Government as one to be settled by the action 
 of the Government of the United States. 
 
 Commissioners to treat with the United States tor the annexation of 
 Hawaii were sent to Washington immediately upon the adoption and 
 promulgation of the Provisional Government, and they negotiated and 
 signed a treaty in conjunction with Mr. Secretary Fostor, which was 
 submitted to the Senate of the United States and was subsequently 
 withdrawn by the present administration. Accompanying that treaty 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XXIII 
 
 was a paper signed by Liliuokalaui, in which she staled no objection 
 to the project of annexation to the United States, but in which she pro- 
 tested earnestly against her dethronement, and alleged that the United 
 States, through the abuse by its diplomatic and naval officers of the 
 powers entrusted to them, had virtually compelled her abdication. 
 The President of the United States, after a further examination of the 
 subject, concluded that it was his duty to withdraw this annexation 
 treaty from the Senate for further consideration, and so notified the 
 Provisional Government through Mr. Willis, our present minister. 
 
 The recognition of the Provisional Government was lawful and 
 authoritative, and has continued without interruption or modification 
 up to the present time, it may be justly claimed for this act of recog- 
 nition that it has contributed greatly to the maintenance of peace and 
 order in Hawaii and to the promotion of the establishment of free, per- 
 manent, constitutional government in Hawaii, based upon the consent 
 of the people. 
 
 The complaint by Liliuokalani in the protest that she sent to the 
 President of the United States and dated the 18th day of January, is 
 not, in the opinion of the committee, well founded in fact or in justice. 
 It appears from the evidence submitted with this report that she was in 
 fact the author and promoter of a revolution in Hawaii which involved 
 the destruction of the entire constitution, and a breach of her solemn 
 oath to observe and support it, and it was only after she had ascertained 
 that she had made a demand upon her native subjects for support in 
 this movement which they would not give to her, that she, for the time, 
 postponed her determination to carry this revolution into effect, and 
 made known her determination to do so as soon as she could feel that 
 she had the power to sustain the movement. 
 
 But the President of the United States, giving attention to Liliuoka- 
 lani's claim that this Government had alarmed her by the presence of 
 its troops into the abdication of her crown, believed that it was proper 
 and necessary in vindication of the honor of the United States to 
 appoint a commissioner to Hawaii who would make a careful investiga- 
 tion into the facts and send the facts and his conclusions to the Presi- 
 dent, for his information. The commissioner, Mr. Blount, went to 
 Hawaii under circumstances of extreme embarrassment and executed 
 his instructions with impartial care to arrive at the truth, and he pre- 
 sented a sincere and instructive report to the President of the United 
 States, touching the facts, the knowledge of which he thus acquired. 
 In the agitated state of opinion and feeling in Hawaii at that time, it 
 was next to impossible to obtain a full, fair, and free declaration in 
 respect of the facts which attended -this revolution, and particularly 
 was this difficult to obtain from the persons who actively participated 
 in that movement. 
 
 The evidence submitted by the committee, in addition to that which 
 was i> resented by Mr. Blount, having been taken under circumstances 
 more favorable to the development of the whole truth with regard to 
 the situation, has, in the opinion of the committee, established the fact 
 that the revolutionary movement in Hawaii originated with Liliuoka- 
 lani, and was promoted, provided for, and, as she believed, secured by 
 the passage of the opium bill and the lottery bill through the Legisla 
 tare, from which she expected to derive a revenue sufficient to secure 
 the ultimate success of her purpose, which was distinctly and maturely 
 devised to aboln.-hthe constitution of 1887, and to assume to herself abso- 
 lute power, free from constitutional restraint of any serious character. 
 
XXIV HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 The fact cannot be ignored that this revolutionary movement of 
 Liliuokalani, which had its development in the selection of a new 
 cabinet to supplant one which had the support of all the conservative 
 elements in the islands, was set on foot and accomplished during the 
 abseuce of the American minister on board the ship Boston during 
 the ten days which preceded the prorogation of the Legislature. The 
 astonishment with which this movement was received by the American 
 emigrants and other white people residing in Hawaii, and its inaugura- 
 tion in the absence of the Boston and of the American minister, show 
 that those people, with great anxiety, recognized the fact that it was 
 directed against them and their interests and welfare and that when 
 it was completed they would become its victims. These convictions 
 excited the serious apprehensions of all the white people in those 
 islands that a crisis was brought about in which not only their rights 
 in Hawaii, and under the constitution, were to be injuriously affected, 
 but that the ultimate result would be that they would be driven^ from 
 the islands or, remaining there, would be put at the mercy of 'those 
 who chose to prey upon their property. This class of people, who 
 were intended to be ostracised, supply nine-tenths of the entire tax 
 receipts of the Kingdom; and they were conscious that the purpose 
 was to inflict taxation upon them without representation, or else to 
 confiscate their estates and drive them out of the country. This pro- 
 duced alarm and agitation, which resulted in the counter movement 
 set on foot by the people to meet and overcome the revolution which 
 Lilioukalani had projected and had endeavored to accomplish. Her min- 
 isters were conscious of the fact that any serious resistance to her revo- 
 lutionary movement (of which they had full knowledge before they 
 were inducted into office) would disappoint the expectations of the 
 Queen and would result in the overthrow of the executive government; 
 and, while they had evidently promised the Queen that they would 
 support here in her effort to abolish the constitution of 1887 and sub- 
 stitute one which they had secretly assisted in preparing, when the 
 moment of the trial came they abandoned her— they broke faith with 
 her. The Queen's ministers took fright and gave information to the 
 people of the existence of the movements and concealed purposes ot 
 the Queen and of her demands upon them to join her in the promulga- 
 tion of the constitution, and they appealed to the committee of safety 
 for protection, and continued in that attitude until they saw that the 
 kindled wrath of the people would not take the direction of violence 
 and bloodshed without the provocation of a serious necessity. Being 
 satisfied that they could trust to the forbearance of the people, who 
 were looking to the protection of their interests and had no desire for 
 strife and bloodshed, they began to finesse in a political way to effect 
 a compromise between the people and the Queen, and they induced 
 her to make the proclamation of her intentions to postpone the com- 
 pletion of her revolutionary purposes, which was circulated in Honolulu 
 on Monday morning. These men, whose conduct can not be character- 
 ized as anything less than perfidious, hastened to give to the President 
 of the United Stotes false and misleading statements of the facts lead- 
 ing up to, attending, and succeeding this revolution. To do this they 
 made deceptive and misleading statements to Mr. Blount. Upon them 
 must rest the odium of having encouraged the Queen in her revolu- 
 tionary intentions; of having then abandoued her in a moment of appar- 
 ent danger; of having thrown themselves upon the mercy of the people, 
 and then of making an attempt, through falsehood and misrepresenta- 
 
• HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XXV 
 
 Hon, to regain power in the Government of Hawaii, which the people 
 would, naturally, forever deny to them. 
 
 A question has been made as to the right of the President of the 
 United States to dispatch Mr. Blount to Hawaii as his personal repre- 
 sentative for the purpose of seeking the further information which the 
 President believed was necessary in order to arrive at a just conclusion 
 regarding the state of affairs in Hawaii. Many precedents could be 
 quoted to show that such power has been exercised by the President 
 on various occasions without dissent on the part of Congress or the 
 people of the United States. The employment of such agencies is a 
 necessary part of the proper exercise of the diplomatic power which is 
 intrusted by the Constitution with the President. Without such 
 authority our foreign relations would be so embarrassed with difficulties 
 that it would be impossible to conduct them with safety or success. 
 These precedents also show that the Senate of the United States, though 
 in session, need not be consulted as to the appointment of such agents, 
 or as to the instructions which the President may give them. 
 
 An authority was intrusted to Mr. Blount to remove the American 
 flag from the Government building in Hawaii, and to disclaim openly 
 and practically the protectorate which had been announced in that 
 country by Minister Stevens, and also to remove the troops from Hono- 
 lulu to the steamer Boston. This particular delegation of authority 
 to Mr. Blount was paramount over the authority of Mr. Stevens, who 
 was continued as minister resident of the United States at Honolulu, 
 and it raised the question whether the Government of the United 
 States can have at the same foreign capital two ministers, each of 
 whom shall exercise separate and special powers. 
 
 There seems to be no reason why the Government of the United 
 States can not, in conducting its diplomatic intercourse with other 
 countries, exercise powers as broad and general, or as limited and 
 peculiar, or special, as any other government. Other governments 
 have been for many years, and even centuries, in the habit of intrust- 
 ing special and particular missions to one man representing them at a 
 foreign court, and to several men in combination when that was found 
 to be desirable. In fact, there has been no limit placed upon the use 
 of a power of this kind, except the discretion of the sovereign or ruler 
 of the country. The committee fail to see that there is any irregularity 
 in such a course as that, or that the power given to Mr. Blount to with- 
 draw the troops from Honolulu or to lower the flag of the United States 
 was to any extent either dangerous or interrupting to any other lawful 
 authority existing there in any diplomatic or naval officer. There may 
 be a question as to the particular wording of the order which Mr. Blount 
 gave to Admiral Skerrett for the lowering of the flag and the with- 
 drawal of the troops, but that is a hyper criticism, because the substan- 
 tial fact was that Mr. Blount executed the command of the President 
 in communicating to Admiral Skerrett such order, as the order of the 
 President of the United States. Mr. Blount's authority had been made 
 known to Admiral Skerrett; his instructions had been exhibited to 
 Admiral Skerrett; and they both understood that what Mr. Blount 
 was then doing had received the sanction of the President of the United 
 States before Mr. Blount had entered upon the discharge of his minis- 
 terial functions, and that his actwould receive the unqualified approval 
 of the President of the United States. That being so, the mere form 
 in which the order was addressed to Admiral "Skerrett seems to be a 
 matter of no serious consequence. 
 
XXVI HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. • 
 
 The*control given to Mr. Trist over the military operations in Mexico, 
 when war was flagrant, was far greater than that which was confided 
 to Mr. Blount. The secret orders given to the commanders of the 
 Army and of the Navy on that occasion are set out in the appendix to 
 this report. 
 
 When Mr. Willis arrived in Honolulu he was received by the Pro- 
 visional Government, to which he was accredited, and an interchange 
 of the usual courtesies was had between them. He carried instruction s, 
 as minister of the United States, which did not concern the Govern- 
 ment of Hawaii until they had been attended with a certain result 
 which he endeavored to bring about. That result was that Liliuokalani 
 should agree that, in the event of her restoration to the throne, not by 
 the action of the President of the United States, but in any other event, 
 or by any agreement, she would bind herself to grant full and free 
 amnesty to all persons who had been engaged in opposition to her 
 alleged authority. When that agreement had been obtained Mr. Willis 
 was instructed to submit it to the Provisional Government and ascer- 
 tain whether they would agree to restore the Queen to the throne under 
 those circumstances and upon those conditions. If this was inter- 
 vention, it was in the interest of Americans in Hawaii. It was an 
 exaction upon Liliuokalani which would forbid, under the penalty of war, 
 that should she acquire the throne by whatever means, that she should 
 openly disavow any purpose to inflict any pains andL penalties upon 
 those who had supported the Provisional Government. Liliuokalani, 
 after several efforts on the part of Mr. Willis to obtain her consent 
 to this proposition, finally signed, it without the assent of her min- 
 isters, and it was attested by Mr. Carter, who was m> personal and 
 political friend. Her declaration or agreement thus signed and deliv- 
 ered to Mr. Willis was by him presented to the President of the Pro- 
 visional Government (who was also minister of foreign affairs), and 
 the question whether or not it would be accepted by the Government 
 of Hawaii was submitted to him. Whereupon the President of the 
 Provisional Government declined to accept the proposition; declined 
 to yield the power which had been vested in him as the chief execu- 
 tive of Hawaii j and nothing more was done either to induce him, or to 
 compel him, to consent to, or to assist in, the restoration of Liliuoka- 
 lani to the throne or the restoration of the Monarchy. 
 
 If, in this course of proceeding, the President of the United States 
 had intended to compel obedience to what is termed his " decision" in 
 the matter by using the force of the United States to assist the Queen 
 in being enthroned, that would have been an act of war, entirely beyond 
 his power, and would not have received the sanction of any consider- 
 able part of the American people, and would have no warrant in inter- 
 national law. But such w^as not the intention of the President, as is 
 shown by contemporaneous acts, by his declarations, and by his subse- 
 quent treatment of the subject. Therefore, the question between the 
 United States and Hawaii touching the propriety of an intervention in 
 the domestic affairs of Hawaii to the extent of gaining the final deci- 
 sion and agreement of both parties upon these propositions is one that 
 is strictly within the accepted right or authority of a sovereign to ten- 
 der his good offices to reconcile the conflicts of two or more factions, 
 or parties, that may be opposed to each other within any country. The 
 tender of good offices has often been voluntarily made in the interest 
 of humanity ? of peace, Of law, and of order, or at the suggestion of one 
 of two belligerent powers actually engaged in war. Sometimes it has 
 
HAWAII AX ISLANDS. XXVII 
 
 been made at tlie suggestion of that party in a government, engaged 
 in actual hostilities, which had the evident power to crush its opponent 
 by prosecuting the war to extremities. In such cases the intervention 
 has often been accepted as a merciful interposition, and it has been con- 
 sidered an honor by other governments that they should be requested, 
 under such circumstances, to exercise their good offices in favor of pro- 
 curing peace through a submission to inevitable results. When the 
 tender of good offices is made at the request of both of the contending 
 parties it is difficult to conceive how any sovereign of a foreign country 
 could refuse to act in such matter. 
 
 In the public act by which the Provisional Government of Hawaii was 
 established there was a distinct declaration that that Government was 
 to continue until Hawaii was annexed to the United States. That 
 declaration, apart from every other consideration, would have justified 
 the United States in an interference for the protection of the Provi- 
 sional Government which would not have been tolerated under other 
 circumstances. That declaration created an intimacy of relationship 
 between the United States and the recognized Government of Hawaii 
 which is entirely exceptional, and which placed within the reach and 
 control of the United States very largely, if not entirely, the disposal 
 of those questions collateral to that of annexation which might have 
 interfered with the peaceful and appropriate solution of any difficulty 
 which might arise in its execution. So that the Provisional Govern- 
 ment of Hawaii, having thus thrown itself into the arms of the United 
 States in the first declaration of its existence, can not justly complain 
 that the United States should scrutinize, under the authority thus 
 given, all its pretensions of right thus to dispose of an entire country 
 and people. And Liliuokalani, having reference to the same project of 
 annexation, of which she was fully cognizant, made complaint that the 
 United States had assisted in driving her from her throne by bringing 
 its troops on shore in military array at a time when there was no neces- 
 sity for it, distinctly announced at the moment of her final and avowed 
 abdication that she would abdicate provisionally and would await the 
 decision of the United States as to whether that abdication and the 
 destruction of the Kingdom and the annexation of Hawaii to the United 
 States should become completed facts. Under such circumstances the 
 President of the United States, believing that the information then in 
 possession of the Government was not sufficient to justify summary 
 annexation, could not have done justice to himself, to his country, to 
 the people of Hawaii, to the Provisional Government, or to Liliuokalani, 
 without having made an effort to use his good offices for the purpose 
 of ascertaining Avhether it was practicable that the Queen should be 
 restored to her authority, leaving the question to be determined by the 
 people interested in Hawaii whether such restoration would be accept- 
 able to them or not. If Liliuokalani had been restored to her throne 
 by the consent of the membership of the Provisional Government, upon 
 the terms and conditions of the proposition which she signed and 
 delivered to Mr. Willis, the President of the United States would not 
 have been in any sense responsible for her restoration, would not have 
 espoused the monarchy, nor would he have done anything that was 
 contradictory of American sentiment, opinion, or policy. He would 
 only have been the mutual friend, accepted, really, by both parties, 
 whose intervention would have secured, with their consent, the final 
 solution of that question. In the absence of' such committal on ?>is 
 part to the claims of Liliuokalani or resistance on his part to the 
 
XXVIII HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 recognized lights of the Provisional Government, there is no reason for 
 withholding approval of the conduct of the President of the United 
 States in thus accepting and executing a function which he was entitled 
 to perfoim, in submitting the question, in due and final form, to the 
 contending parties or factions in Hawaii, whether they preferred to 
 maintain the authority of the Provisional Government, with whatever 
 results may follow from that, or a return to the monarchy under Liliuo- 
 kalani. 
 
 Therefore your committee conclude to report that the President of 
 the United States has not, in this particular, in any wise been a party 
 to any irregularity or any impropriety of conduct in his high office. 
 
 The committee find nothing worthy of criticism in the negotiation 
 of the treaty of annexation with the Provisional Government of 
 Hawaii. 
 
 The revolution in Hawaii had the effect of displacing one chief of 
 the executive department) and substituting another. Except the 
 Queen and her cabinet, no officer of the Government was removed. 
 The legislative body, including the house of nobles and "house of 
 representatives and their presiding officers, remained in commission. 
 The supreme court and all other judicial magistracies and the officers 
 of the courts were left undisturbed, and, when the interregnum ended, 
 they pursued their duties without change or interruption; commerce 
 with foreign countries and between the islands was not in any way 
 prevented, and the commercial and banking houses were open for busi- 
 ness, which resumed activity when the executive head of the Govern- 
 ment was again in the exercise of lawful authority. 
 
 The Government had not been displaced and another substituted, but 
 only a department which was left vacant had been rehabilitated. 
 
 When this was done and the fact was recognized, the Government of 
 Hawaii was as competent to treat of annexation to the United States 
 as it had ever been, or as it ever will be, until the United States shall 
 decide that it will annex no more territory unless with the consent of 
 the people to be annexed, to be ascertained by a plebiscite. 
 
 Complaint is made also that this project of annexation was attempted 
 to be consummated in too great haste. 
 
 That raises a question of due consideration; for, if the people of both 
 countries desired it, or if, according to every precedent to be found in 
 the various annexations of countries and States to the United States, 
 the respective governments desired it, speedy action in completing the 
 cession was desirable for many obvious reasons, among which the inju- 
 rious disturbance of commerce and danger to the public peace grow- 
 ing out of a protracted agitation of so grave a matter, are conspicuous. 
 
 But this is a question of long standing, which has been under favor- 
 able consideration by the kings and people of Hawaii and the Govern- 
 ment and people of the United States for more than fifty years. 
 
 It is well understood, and its importance increases with every new 
 event of any consequence in Hawaii, and with the falling-in of every 
 island in the Pacific Ocean that is captured by the great maritime 
 powers of Europe. The committee have copied, in the Appendix to 
 this report, portions of the remarks of Hon. William. P. Draper in the 
 House of Eepresentatives on the 4th of February, 1894, which refer in 
 a very clear and concise way to the progress of foreign intervention in 
 the Pacific Ocean by European powers. The committee also present 
 the following message of President Grant to the Senate, with the 
 accompanying letter of Hon. Henry A. Peirce, then our minister to. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XXIX 
 
 Hawaii, which shows that the subject of cession and annexation have 
 been on several occasions carefully considered by the governments of 
 Hawaii and the United States. 
 
 [Confidential. — Executive B. — Forty-second Congress, first session.] 
 
 Message of the President of the United States, transmitting a copy of a 
 dispatch relative to the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands, addressed 
 to the Department of State by Henry A. Pierce, minister resident of 
 the United States at Honolulu. 
 
 April 7, 1871. — Read and, with the dispatch referred to the Committee on Foreign 
 Relations, ordered to be printed in confidence for the use of the Senate. 
 
 To the Senate of the United States: 
 
 I transmit confidentially, for the information and consideration of 
 the Senate, a copy of a dispatch of the 25th of February last, relative 
 to the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands, addressed to the Depart- 
 ment of State by Henry A. Pierce, minister resident of the United 
 States at Honolulu. Although I do not deem it advisable to express 
 any opinion or to make any recommendation in regard to the subject 
 at this juncture, the views of the Senate, if it should be deemed proper 
 to express them, would be very acceptable with reference to any future 
 course which there might be a disposition to adopt. 
 
 U. S. Grant. 
 
 Washington, April 5, 1871. 
 
 Mr. Pierce to Mr. Fish. 
 
 ;No. 101.] Legation of the United States of America, 
 
 Honolulu, February 25, 1871. 
 
 Sir: Impressed with the importance of the subject now presented 
 lor consideration, I beg leave to suggest the inquiry wmether the period 
 has not arrived making it proper, wise, and sagacious for the IT. S. 
 Government to again consider the project of annexing the Hawaiian 
 Islands to the territory of the Kepublic. That such is to be the 
 political destiny of this archipelago seems a foregone conclusion in 
 the opinion of all who have given attention to the subject in this 
 country, the United States, England, France, and Germany. 
 
 A majority of the aborigines, Creoles, and naturalized foreigners of 
 this country, as I am credibly informed, are favorable, even anxious for 
 the consummation of the measure named. 
 
 The event of the decease of the present sovereign of Hawaii, leaving 
 no heirs or successor to the throne, and the consequent election to be 
 made by the legislative assembly of a king, and new stirps for a royal 
 family, will produce a crisis in political affairs which, it is thought, will 
 be availed of as a propitious occasion to inaugurate measures for 
 annexation of the islauds to the United States, the same to be effected 
 as the manifest will and choice of the majority of the Hawaiian 
 people, and through means proper, peaceful, and honorable. 
 
 It is evident, however, no steps will be taken to accomplish the 
 object named without the proper sanction or approbation of the U. S. 
 Government in approval thereof. 
 
 The Hawaiian people for fifty years have been under educational 
 instruction of American missionaries, and the civilizing influences of 
 
XXX . HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 New England people, commercial and maritime. Hence they are puri- 
 tan and democratic in tlieir ideas and tendencies, modified by a trop- 
 ical climate. Tlieir favorite songs and airs are American. Sherman's 
 "Marching Through Georgia" and " John Brown's Soul is Marching 
 On" are daily heard in the streets and in their schoolrooms. The 
 fifteenth amendment to the Constitution of the United States has 
 made the project of annexation to our Union more popular than ever 
 both here and in the United States. 
 
 The native population is fast disappearing • the number existing is 
 now estimated at 45,000, having decreased about 15,000 since the 
 census of 1866. The number of foreigners in addition is between 
 5,000 and 6,000, two-thirds of whom are from the United States, and 
 they own more than that proportion of foreign capital, as represented 
 in the agriculture, commerce, navigation, and whale fisheries of the 
 Kingdom. 
 
 This country and sovereignty will soon be left to the possession ot 
 foreigners, u to unlineal hands, no sons of theirs succeeding." To 
 what foreign nation shall these islands belong if not to the great Repub- 
 lic? At the present those of foreign nativities hold all the important 
 offices of government and control legislation, tne judiciary, etc. Well 
 disposed as the Government now is towards the United States and its 
 resident citizens here, in course of time it may be otherwise, as was the 
 case during our civil war. 
 
 I now proceed to state some points of a more general character, 
 which should influence the U. S. Government in their decision of 
 the policy of acquiring possession of this archipelago, their geo- 
 graphical position occupying, as it does, an important central, 
 strategical point in the North Pacific Ocean, valuable, perhaps neces- 
 sary, to the United States for a naval depot and coaling station, and 
 to shelter and protect our commerce and navigation, which in this hem- 
 isphere is destined to increase enormously from our intercourse with 
 the 500,000,000 population of China, Japan, and Australia. Huinbolt 
 predicted that the commerce on the Pacific would, in time, rival that 
 on the Atlantic. A future generation, no doubt, will see the prophecy 
 fulfilled. 
 
 The immense injury inflicted on American navigation and commerce 
 by Great Britain in the war of 1812-1814 through her possessions of 
 Bermuda and other West India Islands, as also that suffered by the 
 English from French privateers from the Isle of France during the 
 wars between those nations, are instances in proof of the necessity of 
 anticipating and preventing, when we can, similar evils that may issue 
 from these islands if held by other powers. Their proximity to the 
 Pacific States of the Union, fine climate and soil, and tropical produc- 
 tions of sugar, coffee, rice, fruits, hides, goatskins, salt, cotton, fine 
 wool, etc., required by the West, in exchange for flour, grain, lumber, 
 shooks, and manufactures of cotton, wool, iron, and other articles are 
 evidence of the commercial value of one to the other region. 
 
 Is it probable that any European power who may hereafter be at 
 war with the United States will refrain from taking possession of this 
 weak kingdom, in view of the great injury that could be done to our 
 commerce through their acquisition of them? 
 
 It is said that at a proper time the United States may have the 
 sovereignty of these islands without money and without price, except, 
 perhaps, for purchase of the Crown and public lands, and moderate 
 annuities to be given to the five or six high chiefs now living with 
 uncertain elainrs as successors to the Crown. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XXXI 
 
 His Hawaiian Majesty, although only in his forty-first year, is liable 
 to a sudden decease, owing to frequent attacks of difficulty in breath- 
 ing and danger of suffocation from congestion caused by obesity. His 
 weight is 300 pounds. He is sole survivor of the royal race of Kame- 
 hameha; unmarried, no heir, natural or adopted; possesses the consti- 
 tutional prerogative of naming his successor, but it is believed he will 
 not exercise it, from a superstitious belief his own death would follow 
 immediately the act. 
 
 Prince Alexander and Lott Kamehameha (the former subsequently 
 became the fourth Hawaiian King and the latter the fifth) and Dr. G. 
 P. Judd, my informant, visited England in 1850 as Hawaiian commis- 
 sioners. 
 
 Lord Palmerston, at their interview with him, said, in substance, 
 "that the British Government desired the Hawaiian people to maintain 
 proper government and preserve national independence. If they were 
 unable to do so he recommended receiving a protectorate government 
 under the United States or by becoming an integral part of that nation. 
 Such," lie thought, "was the destiny of the Hawaiian Islands arising 
 from their proximity to the States of California and Oregon and 
 natural dependence on those markets for exports and imports, together 
 with probable extinction of the Hawaiian aboriginal population and its 
 substitution by immigration from the United States." That advice 
 seems sound and prophetic. 
 
 The following historical events in relation to these islands are thought 
 worthy of revival in recollection : 
 
 February 25, 1843. — Lord George Paulet, of Her Britannic Majesty's 
 ship Carysfort, obtained, by forceful measures, cession of the Hawaiian 
 Islands to the Government of Great Britain, July 31, 1843. They were 
 restored to their original sovereignty by the British Admiral Thomas. 
 
 November 28, 1843. — Joint convention of the English and French 
 Governments, which acknowledged the independence of this archi- 
 pelago and reciprocally promised never to take possession of any part 
 of same. Ttie United States Government was invited to be a party to 
 the above but declined. 
 
 August, 1849. — Admiral Tromelin, with a French naval force, after 
 making demands on the Hawaiian Government impossible to be com- 
 plied with, took unresisted possession of the fort and Government 
 buildings in Honolula, and blockaded the harbor. After a few weeks' 
 occupation of the jdace the French departed, leaving political affairs 
 as they were previous to their arrival. 
 
 'January, 1851. — A French naval force again appeared at Honolula, 
 and threatened bombardment and destruction of the town. 
 
 The King, Kamehameha III, with the Government, fearing it would 
 be carried into effect, and in mortal dread of being brought under 
 French rule similar to that placed by the latter over Tahiti, of the 
 Society Islands, executed a deed of cession of all the Hawaiian Islands 
 and their sovereignty forever in favor of the United States of America. 
 
 The document in a sealed envelope was placed in charge of Mr. Sev- 
 erance, United States commissioner here, with instructions to take 
 forma] official possession of the soil of these islands on occasion of the 
 first hostile shot fired by the French. On learning the facts the latter 
 desisted further aggressive acts and departed from the country. 
 
 Since that period the French authorities have pursued a conciliatory 
 course in their relations with the Hawaiian Government, and fully of 
 opinion, it is said, that a secret treaty exists between the United States 
 Government and that of Hawaii, by which these islands pass into tha 
 
XXXII HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 possession of the former in case of aggressions made npon them there- 
 after by any hostile powers. 
 
 In 1854 the administration of President Pierce authorized the 
 United States commissioner, Mr. Gregg, to negotiate a treaty with the 
 Hawaiian authorities for the cession of the sovereignty of these islands 
 to the United States; but Mr. Gregg succeeded only in obtaining a 
 protocol for a treaty, by which the United States were to extend a' 
 protectorate government over them. The matter in that form did not 
 meet with the approval of Mr. Secretary Marcy, and" further negotia- 
 tions ceased. 
 
 I omitted to state in proper sequence that the deed of cession of 1851 
 was, by order of the Secretary of State, Mr. Webster, returned to the 
 Hawaiian Government. 
 
 In conclusion, I herewith inclose Annual Review of the Agriculture 
 and Commerce of the Hawaiian Islands for the year 1870, published by 
 the Pacific Commercial Advertiser, February 25, 1871. Additional 
 copies will accompany my dispatch No. 102. Permit me to refer you to 
 a lithographic map, published in 1867 by U. S. Bureau of Statistics, as 
 showing in convenient form the relative position of these islands to the 
 continents of America, Asia, etc. ; also, steamship lines radiating there- 
 from. 
 
 With great respect, your obedient, humble servant, 
 
 Henry A. Pierce. 
 
 Hon. Hamilton Fish, 
 
 Secretary of State, Washington, D. (7. 
 
 A President informed as to the history of his country could find no 
 difficulty in dealing with the question of the annexation of Hawaii to the 
 United States on the ground that it is new; and a minister to Hawaii 
 who should fail to inform his Government of the political changes in 
 Hawaii that would affect that question would neglect his duty. 
 
 It is not a just criticism upon the correspondence of Minister Stevens 
 with his Government that he earnestly advocated annexation. In this 
 he was in line with Mr. Marcy and nearly every one of his successors 
 as Secretary of State, and with many of Mr. Stevens's predecessors as 
 minister to Hawaii. His letters to his Government were written under 
 the diplomatic confidence that is requisite to secure freedom in such 
 communications, and were not expected to come under the scrutiny of 
 all mankind. They show no improper spirit and are not impeachable as 
 coloring or perverting the truth, although some matters stated by him 
 may be classed as severe reflections. Whatever motives may have 
 actuated or controlled any representative of the Government of the 
 United States in his conduct of our affairs in Hawaii, if he acted within 
 the limits of his powers, with hohest intentions, and has not placed the 
 Government of the United States upon false and untenable grounds, 
 his conduct is not irregular. 
 
 But, in his dealings with the Hawaiian Government, his conduct was 
 characterized by becoming dignity and reserve, and was not in any 
 way harsh or offensive. In the opinion of the committee, based upon 
 the evidence which accompanies this report, the only substantial irregu- 
 larity that existed in the conduct of any officer of the United States, 
 or agent of the President, during or since the time of the revolution of 
 1893, was that of Minister Stevens in declaring a. protectorate of the 
 United States over Hawaii, and in placing the flag of our country 
 upon the Government building in Honolulu. No actual harm resulted 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. XXXI II 
 
 from this unauthorized act, but as a precedent it is not to be con- 
 sidered as being justified. The committee have not considered it 
 necessary to present any resolutions stating the conclusions that arc 
 indicated in this report, and ask that they be discharged from the further 
 consideration of the resolutions under which this report is made. 
 
 We are in entire accord with the essential findings in the exceed 
 ingly able report submitted by the chairman of the Committee on For 
 eign Relations. But it is our opinion — 
 
 First. That the appointment on the 11th day of March, 1893, with- 
 out the advice and consent of the Senate, of Hon. James H. Blount as 
 "special commissioner" to the Hawaiian Government under letters 
 of credence and those of instruction, which declared that u in all mat- 
 ters affecting relations with the Government of the Hawaiian Islands 
 his authority is paramount" was an unconstitutional act, in that such 
 appointee, Mr. Blount, was never nominated to the Senate, but was 
 appointed without its advice and consent, although that body was in 
 session when such appointment was made and continued to be in ses- 
 sion for a long time immediately thereafter. 
 
 Second. The orders of the Executive Department by which the naval 
 force of the United States in the harbor of Honolulu was in effect 
 placed under the command of Mr. Blount or of Mr. Willis were with 
 out authority or warrant of law. 
 
 Third. The order given by Mr. Blount to Admiral Skerrett to lower 
 the United States ensign from the Government building in Honolulu 
 and to embark the troops on the ships to which they belonged, was an 
 order which Mr. Blount had no lawful authority to give. Its object 
 was not to terminate a protectorate. That relation had been disa- 
 vowed by the administration of President Harrison immediately upon 
 receiving information of its establishment. The flag and troops, when 
 such order was given by Mr. Blount, were in the positions from which 
 he ordered them to be removed for the purpose of maintaining order 
 and protecting American life and property. Their presence had been 
 effectual to those ends, and their removal tended to create, and did 
 create, public excitement and, to a degree, distrust of the power of the 
 Provisional Government to preserve order or to maintain itself. That 
 order of Mr. Blount was susceptible of being construed as indicating 
 an unfriendly disposition on the part of the United States toward the 
 Provisional Government, and it was so construed, particularly by the 
 people of Hawaii. 
 
 In the light of subsequent relations between Mr. Blount and Ms suc- 
 cessor, Mr. Willis, with the Queen, whose office had become vacant by 
 her deposition and abdication under the attack of a successful revolu- 
 tion, this order and its execution were most unfortunate and untoward 
 in their effect. Such relations and intercourse by Messrs. Blount and 
 Willis with the head and with the executive officers of an overthrown 
 government, conducted for the purpose of restoring that government 
 by displacing its successor, were in violation of the constitution aad of 
 the principles of international law and were not warranted by the cir- 
 cumstances of the case. 
 
 Fourth. The question of the rightfulness of the revolution, of the 
 lawfulness of the means by which the deposition and abdication of the 
 Queen were effected, and the right of the Provisional Government to 
 S. Eep. 227 m 
 
XXXIV HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 exist and to continue to exist was conclusively settled, as the report 
 so forcibly states, against the Queen and in favor of the Provisional 
 Government, by the act of the administration of President Harrison 
 recognizing such Provisional Government, by the negotiation by that 
 administration with such Provisional Government of a treaty of annex- 
 ation to the United States ; by accrediting diplomatic representation 
 by such administration and by the present administration to such Pro- 
 visional Government; therefore, it incontrovertibly follows that the 
 President of the United States had no authority to attempt to reopen 
 such determined questions, and to endeavor by any means whatever to 
 overthrow the Provisional Government or to restore the monarchy 
 which it had displaced. 
 
 While it is true that a friendly power may rightfully tender its good 
 offices of mediation or advice in cases such as that under present con- 
 sideration, it is also true that the performance of such offices of media- 
 tion or advice ought not to be entered upon without the consent previ- 
 ously given by both the parties whom the action or decision of the 
 friendly power may affect. Such consent was not given in the present 
 instance. The Provisional Government never so consented ; it was never 
 requested to consent. It denied the jurisdiction of the present admin- 
 istration on every proper occasion. Therefore the proceedings by the 
 President, which had for their result his request and monition to the 
 Provisional Government to surrender its powers, to give up its exist- 
 ence and to submit to be displaced by the monarchy which it had over- 
 thrown, had no warrant in law, nor in any consent of one of the parties 
 to be affected by such proceedings. 
 
 Fifth. The avowed opinion of the President of the United States, 
 in substance, that it is the duty of this Government to make repara- 
 tion to the Queen by endeavoring to reinstate her upon her throne by 
 all constitutional methods, is a clear definition of the policy of the 
 present administration to that end. The instructions to Messrs. Blount 
 and Willis must be construed to be other and more ample forms of ex- 
 pression of that policy. No other presumption is permissible than that 
 their actions at Honolulu were with intent to carry out that avowed 
 policy. These considerations make immaterial any discussion, in this 
 connection, of the personal intentions, circumspection, or good faith of 
 these gentlemen in the performance of the task to which they had been 
 plainly commanded by the present administration. 
 
 John Sherman. 
 
 Wm. P. Frye. 
 
 J. N. Dolph. 
 
 Cushman K. Davis. 
 
ADDITIONAL VIEWS SUBMITTED BY MEMBEKS OF THE 
 
 COMMITTEE. 
 
 The undersigned, members of the Committee on Foreign Bela- 
 tions, submit herewith the following views adverse to the report of the 
 committee, upon the subject of the recent political revolution in Hawaii. 
 
 Agreeing as we do with the conclusions submitted by the chairman 
 of the committee that no irregularities were committed either in the 
 appointment of Special Commissioner Blount or in the instructions 
 given him by the President, and without denying or conceding in any 
 manner the correctness of the facts as claimed, or of the statements as 
 made, in said report concerning other matters therein mentioned, we 
 especially dissent from that portion thereof which declares that the 
 only substantial irregularity in the conduct of Mr. Stevens, the late 
 minister, was his declaration of a protectorate by the United States 
 over Hawaii. We are of the opinion also that there are no valid rea- 
 sons and no course of dealing in our past relations with those islands 
 which justifies interference by the United States with the political 
 internal affairs of Hawaii any more than with those of any other inde- 
 pendent state or nation in this hemisphere. We can not concur, there- 
 fore, in so much of the foregoing report as exonerates the minister of 
 the United States, Mr. Stevens, from active officious and unbecoming 
 participation in the events which led to the revolution in the Sandwich 
 Islands on the 14th, 16th, and 17th of January, 1893. His own admis- 
 sions in his official correspondence with this Government, his conduct 
 for months preceding the revolution, as well as the facts established 
 by the evidence before the committee, clearly justify such a conclusion. 
 
 On the other hand, we are not inclined to censure Capt. Wiltse, 
 commanding the United States war-ship Boston, or the officers of that 
 vessel. Their position was one of extreme delicacy and difficulty, and 
 we appreciate their anxiety to afford protection to the lives and prop- 
 erty of American citizens. The force of United States marines of the 
 Boston with their ordinary arms stationed at the American legation, 
 and at the consulate in Honolulu, would have effectually represented 
 the authority and power of the United States Government, and would 
 have afforded whatever protection American interests might have 
 required; and at the same time would have avoided the appearance 
 of coercion or duress, either upon the people of Honolulu or the Queen 
 in the controversy between them. This is our opinion, after a careful 
 examination of all the facts and circumstances disclosed in the evi- 
 dence. But, as we have observed, the position was a delicate and 
 difficult one. Perhaps if we had been on the ground in the presence 
 of the minister, under the influence of his advice and counsel, and 
 of the environments and conditions surrounding Capt. Wiltse, his 
 officers and men, we might have landed the forces as he did; but a less 
 formidable array would have removed from the Queen the excuse for 
 asserting that she and her government were overawed by the United 
 States forces, to which she claims under protest to have surrendered, 
 
 XXXV 
 
XXXVI HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 and at the same time have afforded all necessary protection to the 
 lives and property of our citizens at that port, if they were in any 
 jeopardy. 
 
 The moral support and good offices of this Government, or of any 
 government, is always permissible in promoting the moral tone and polit- 
 ical improvement of the government of foreign countries on terms of 
 amity with their own; but there is nothing in international law, in 
 sound public policy, or in our past history and traditions which justifies 
 a representative of this Government in interfering officiously or improp- 
 erly in the domestic or political affairs of a foreign country, whatever 
 may be the character of its rulers, its form of government, or its politi- 
 cal condition. We. have enough to do to attend to our own business. 
 
 We cannot, therefore, avoid the conviction that the inopportune zeal 
 of Minister Stevens in the project of annexation of the Sandwich 
 Islands to the United States caused him to exceed the proper limits of 
 his official duty and of his diplomatic relations to the government and 
 people of those islands. His conduct as the public representative of 
 this Government was directly conducive to bringing about the condition 
 of affairs which resulted in the overthrow of the Queen, the organiza- 
 tion of the Provisional Government, the landing of the United States 
 troops, and the attempted scheme of annexation; and upon this con- 
 clusion his conduct is seriously reprehensible and deserving of public 
 censure. 
 
 M. 0. Butler, 
 
 David Turpie, 
 
 John M. Daniel, 
 
 George Gray, 
 
 Members of Minority, 
 February 22, 1894. 
 
 The question of annexation is not submitted for the consideration of 
 the committee, except as it incidentally affects the main question dis- 
 cussed; but it may not be improper for me to say, in this connection, 
 that I am heartily in favor of the acquisition of those islands by the 
 Government of the United States; and in a proper case and on an appro- 
 priate occasion I should earnestly advocate the same. But I am unwil- 
 ling to take advantage of internal dissentions in those islands, for 
 which I believe we are in some measure responsible, to consummate at 
 this time so desirable an object. 
 
 M. 0. Butler. 
 
 I concur in the above. 
 
 David Turpie. 
 
APPENDIX TO THE REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE. 
 
 I. The following is the translation of the original poster 
 
 REFERRED TO BY MR. HOES IN HIS STATEMENT. 
 
 [Translation.] 
 
 THE VOICE OF THE PEOPLE. 
 
 1. A mass meeting will be held in front of the opera house, outside 
 of the Palace yard, at 2 o'clock this afternoon, Monday, January 16, to 
 consider the condition of the country. 
 
 By order 
 
 Committee of Law and Order. 
 
 the voice of the chief. 
 
 2. On the afternoon of Saturday last the voice of the sacred chief 
 of Hawaii, Liliuokalani, the tabued one, speaking as follows: 
 
 a Oh, ye people who. love the chief, I hereby say to you, I am now 
 ready to proclaim the new constitution for my Kingdom, thinking that 
 it would be successful ; but behold obstacles have arisen. Therefore I 
 say unto you, loving people, go with good hope, and do not be dis- 
 turbed or troubled in your minds, because within the next few days 
 now coming I will proclaim the new constitution. 
 
 "The executive officers of the law (the cabinet) knew the errors in 
 this new constitution, but they said nothing. 
 
 " Therefore, I hope that the thing which you, my people, so much 
 want will be accomplished; it also is my strong desire." 
 
 And her last order was that we should pray to God to bless this 
 Kingdom and the throne of Hawaii. 
 
 STUBBORNNESS. 
 
 3. From the day of the passage of the lottery bill until the proroga- 
 tion of the Legislature the members of the Keform party in the House 
 have been refractory. It is seen that this is the Missionary party. This 
 is a childish act, showing the lack of principle of the Reform party and 
 the unexampled pride of the missionaries. The missionaries are the 
 parents of these actions, and their reason for so doing is because of 
 their regret and vexation by reason of the failure of their schemes in 
 the Legislature. The National party is not this way. If the Reform 
 party is successful the Hawaiian party does not show its disappoint- 
 ment, but, with its customary patience, continues on working for the 
 good of all without feelings of strife. 
 
 The foreign members of this session have shown their wicked 
 intentions, their causeless jealousy, when the majority of the people, 
 
 1 
 S. Reiv 227 1 
 
Z HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 the H awaiian party, voted as they wished. During all the bribery there 
 has grown up a united determination on the part of the National party 
 to hold their prerogatives and carry out the desires of their constitu- 
 ents who elected them. Great is our contempt for this causeless 
 opposition of the missionaries and their friends, and for the first time 
 we are able to congratulate the Hawaiian members on account of their 
 unanimity during these few days. 
 
 DIFFERENT VIEWS. 
 
 4. We hear that the representatives of the foreign countries have 
 met and decided to help the Queen's cabinet and support her, except 
 the American minister. The Annexationists are seeking some pretext 
 to injure the Queen, and order the American naval forces on shore to 
 protect their property without knowing what they are afraid of, for 
 the ghosts which they are conjuring up will act as they acted in 1887. 
 
 5. To-day a public meeting has been called by the missionaries of 
 the Eeform party and those who are deceived by them at Manamana, 
 with the intention of injuring the Queen because of her love for the 
 people in consenting to promulgate a new constitution, to depose her 
 from being Queen, and to turn the monarchy into a republic. There- 
 fore, those who love the country, those who are born in the country, 
 stand fast in support of the monarchy and do not let one true Hawaiian 
 go to this meeting to which you are invited. Oh, all ye true Hawaiian s, 
 let us support our Queen, and consecrate our lives for the benefit of 
 our Queen and the peace of the land. All of the people who love the 
 chief are invited to go straight to the meeting in front of the opera 
 house at 2 o'clock this afternoon. One loving heart in our breasts 
 throughout the land, oh, descendants of Kamehameha. 
 
 THE HELPERS OF THE CABINET. 
 
 6. The banks of Bishop and Spreckels are ready to help the Govern- 
 ment with money. Certain merchants are also ready to support the 
 Government. It is apparent that it is only certain missionaries who are 
 secretly meeting and seeking a riot as a reason for landing the men of 
 war when there is no reason. 
 
 LET THE PEOPLE BE READY. 
 
 7. To give their thanks to day at the meeting to be held at 2 this 
 afternoon in front of the Opera House, to their Queen, who wanted to 
 execute the desires of her people, but by reason of obstacles she could 
 not lawfully do so. On account of this love of our Queen, and what 
 she tried to do under her spirit of love, but she could not accomplish 
 it, and when she saw that it could not be done she expressed her regret 
 with soTrow, and instructed the committee of the people to go and wait, 
 and their desires would be carried out in accordance with the right, 
 and for them to keep the peace. 
 
 mass meeting! 
 
 8. The meeting which is to be held in front of the opera house is to 
 be held by the party which supports the Government, and the subjects 
 of the Queen are invited to attend and listeu to the voices of the 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 3 
 
 leaders of the people. We are being plotted against without re&son. 
 The independence of Hawaii is being assaulted by the wicked and 
 refractory ones because the Queen listened to the pleadings of her own 
 people to give a new constitution. She has left this thought to her 
 cabinet, and thanks are due for this loving thought of the chief in 
 leaving to them this desire of the people of the land, and they have 
 restrained the love of the chief unlil such time as it may seem good. 
 Because it can not be helped, we had better be patient and listen to her 
 words: "I regret that your desires are not complied with, but you must 
 go and keep the peace, and the time will come when your desires will 
 be satisfied." 
 
 I hereby certify that the foregoing is a correct translation of the 
 accompanying extra issued by the Ka Leo o Ka Lahui, a Honolulu 
 newspaper, published in Honolulu in the Hawaiian language, on Jan- 
 uary 16, 1893. 
 
 Lorrin A. Thurston. 
 
 II. By order of the committee the following instructions 
 of the secretary of the navy to commodore perry, dated 
 april 15, 1847, were made part of the record. 
 
 [Confidential.] 
 
 Navy Department, 
 
 Washington, April 15, 1847. 
 Commodore M. C. Perry, 
 
 Commanding the Home Squadron: 
 
 Sir : The successes which have recently crowned our arms would 
 seem to justify the expectation that the Government of Mexico would 
 feel disposed to submit proposals for peace. That there may be no 
 unnecessary delay in acting on such proposals, if they shall be made, 
 the President has directed Nicholas P. Trist, esq., of the State Depart- 
 ment, to proceed to the headquarters of the Army or to the squadron, 
 as he shall deem most convenient, and be in readiness to receive any 
 proposition for a settlement of the questions at issue. Mr. Trist is 
 clothed with such diplomatic power as to authorize him to enter into 
 arrangements with the Mexican Government for the mutual suspen- 
 sion of hostilities. If he shall communicate to you in writing that the 
 contingency has occurred, you will act in accordance with his directions 
 and suspend actual hostilities until further orders from the Department, 
 unless the enemy shall continue or recommence them. In doing so 
 you will not relinquish any position which you may occupy, or abstain 
 from any change of position which, in your judgment, may be neces- 
 sary for the security or health of your command. 
 
 You will afford to Mr. Trist every facility and accommodation in your 
 power and a speedy passage to New Orleans when he may desire to 
 return. You will not relax the vigor of your operations while he may 
 remain in Mexico, unless he directs you to suspend them, but during 
 that time it is desirable, if it does not conflict with your arrangements, 
 that you shall be in the harbor of Vera Gruz, or as accessible as may be. 
 
 You will be pleased to make your communications to the Depart- 
 ment as frequent as you may find opportunity. 
 
 • I am, very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 John Y. Mason 
 
* v HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 U. S. Flagship Mississippi, 
 
 Anton Lizardo, May 8, 1847. 
 Sir: I have received by Mr. Trist your confidential communication 
 of the 15th instant, and in a personal interview with that gentleman 
 have made the requisite arrangements for carrying out the wishes and 
 intentions of the Department. 
 
 It is highly necessary that I should no longer delay a visit to the 
 eastern coast as far as Laguna and Campeche. This I can do before any 
 communication of interest can be received from Mr. Trist, and we both 
 agree that it is better for me to make the visit now, that I may be at 
 Vera Cruz about the time he shall have been informed of the result of 
 his mission ; but to prevent any inconvenience I shall leave a steamer 
 at Vera Cruz to bring me any communication that Mr. Trist might 
 transmit during my absence. 
 The Potomac will also be left at Vera Cruz. 
 
 With great respect, I am, sir, your most obedient servant, 
 
 M. C. Perry, 
 Commanding Home Squadron, 
 Hon. John Y. Mason, 
 
 Secretary of the Navy, Washington, I). G. 
 
 III. Also the following treaty of annexation made in the 
 
 TIME OF KAMEHAMEHA III, WHICH FAILED OF THE KING'S SIG- 
 NATURE BY REASON OF HIS DEATH, THE ORIGINAL BEING ON 
 FILE IN THE OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE. 
 
 [Confidential.] 
 
 Treaty of annexation concluded between His Majesty the King of the 
 Hawaiian Islands and the United, States of America. 
 
 His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands, being convinced 
 that plans have been and still are on foot hostile to his sovereignty 
 and to the peace of his Kingdom, which His Majesty is without power 
 to resist and against which it is his imperative duty to provide in 
 order to prevent the evils of anarchy and to secure the rights and 
 prosperity of his subjects, and having, in conscientious regard thereto 
 as well as to the general interests of his Kingdom, present and future, 
 sought to incorporate his Kingdom into the Union of the United States 
 as the means best calculated to attain these ends and perpetuate the 
 blessings of freedom and equal rights to himself, his chiefs, and his 
 people, and the Government of the United States, being actuated solely 
 by the desire to add to their security and prosperity and to meet the 
 wishes of His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands and of his 
 Government, have determined to accomplish, by treaty, objects so 
 important to their mutual and permanent welfare. 
 
 For that purpose His Majesty, Kamehameha III, King of the 
 Hawaiian Islands, has granted full powers and instructions to Eobert 
 Chrichton Wyllie, esq., his minister of foreign relations, his secre- 
 tary at war and of the navy, member of his privy council of state, 
 member of the house of nobles, and chairman of the commissioners of 
 his privy purse, and the President of the United States has invested 
 with like powers David Lawrence Gregg, esq., commissioner oi 
 said States to the said Kingdom; and the said plenipotentiaries, after 
 exchanging their full powers, have agreed to and concluded the 'fol- 
 lowing articles: 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 5 
 
 Article I. 
 
 His Majesty, the King of the Hawaiian Islands, acting in conformity 
 with the power vested in him by the constitution of his Kingdom, and 
 with the wishes of his chiefs and people and of the heads of every 
 department of his Government, cedes to the United States his King- 
 dom, with all its territories, to be held by them in Ml sovereignty, 
 subject only to the same constitutional provisions as the other States 
 of the American Union. This cession includes all public lots and 
 squares, Government lands, mines and minerals, salt lakes and springs, 
 fish ponds, public edifices, fortifications, barracks, forts, ports, and 
 harbors, reefs, docks, and magazines, arms, armaments, and accouter- 
 ments, public archives, and funds, claims, debts, taxes, and dues exist- 
 ing, available, and unpaid at the date of the exchange of the ratifica- 
 tions of this treaty. 
 
 Article II. 
 
 The Kingdom of the Hawaiian Islands shall be incorporated into 
 the American Union as a State enjoying the same degree of sover- 
 eignty as other States, and admitted as such, as soon as it can be done 
 in consistency with the principles and requirements of the Federal 
 Constitution, to all the rights, privileges, and immunities of a State as 
 aforesaid, on a perfect equality with the other States of the Union. 
 
 Article III. 
 
 His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands, his chiefs and sub- 
 jects of every class, shall continue in the enjoyment of all their 
 existing personal and private rights, civil, political, and religious, to 
 the utmost extent that is possible under the Federal Constitution, and 
 shall possess and forever enjoy all the rights and privileges of citizens 
 of the United States on terms of perfect equality, in all respects, with 
 other American citizens. 
 
 Article IV. 
 
 The decisions of the Board of Land Commissioners, made and not 
 appealed from at the date of the final ratification of this treaty, shall be 
 and remain forever valid and undisturbed, and all titles to real estate, 
 which are now or shall have then been declared valid under the laws of 
 the Hawaiian Kingdom, shall beheld to be equally valid by the United 
 States, and measures shall be adopted by the United States for the 
 speedy and final adjudication of all unsettled claims to land in con- 
 formity with the laws and usages under which they may have originated. 
 
 Article V. 
 
 All engagements of whatsoever kind, affecting the rights of corpora- 
 tions or individuals, validly construed and lawfully incumbent upou 
 the King's Government or the Hawaiian nation to pay and discharge, 
 shall be respected and fulfilled in as prompt, fall, and complete a man- 
 ner as they would have been respected and fulfilled had no change of 
 sovereignty taken place. 
 
 Article YI. 
 
 The public lands hereby ceded, shall be subject to the laws regulat- 
 ing the public lands in other parts of the United States, liable, how- 
 
b HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 ever, to such alterations and changes as Congress may from time to 
 time enact. The grants of land for the promotion of education here- 
 tofore made by the Government of the King of the Hawaiian Islands, 
 shall be confirmed by the United States, which, in addition thereto, 
 shall grant and set apart, for the purposes of common schools, semi- 
 naries of learning, and universities, so much of the public lands and of 
 the proceeds thereof, as may be equal, proportionally, to the grants for 
 such purposes in any of the States of the Union. 
 
 Article VII. 
 
 The laws of the Hawaiian Kingdom, so far as they are compatible 
 with republican institutions, and conformable to the Constitution of the 
 United States, shall be and remain in full force and effect until modi- 
 fied, changed, or repealed by the legislative authority of the State con- 
 templated by this treaty. 
 
 Article VIII. 
 
 In consideration of the cession made by this treaty, and in compen- 
 sation to all who may suffer or incur loss consequent thereon, the 
 United States shall pay the aggregate sum of $300,000 as annuities, 
 to the King, the Queen, the Crown Prince, those standing next in suc- 
 cession to the throne, the chiefs, and all other persons whom the King 
 may wish to compensate or reward, to be apportioned as may be deter- 
 mined by His Majesty, the King, and his Privy Council of State, which 
 amounts, to be apportioned as aforesaid, shall be paid ratably, without 
 deduction or offset on any ground or in any shape whatever, to the 
 parties severally named in such apportionment, at Honolulu on the 
 1st day of July of each successive year so long as they may live. It 
 is, however, expressly agreed upon, that on the demise of his present 
 majesty, the annuity of the immediate heir to the throne shall then be 
 increased to the same amount before allowed and paid to the King 
 himself. 
 
 As a farther consideration for the cession herein made and in order 
 to place within the reach of the inhabitants of the Hawaiian Islands the 
 means of education, present and future, so as to enable them the more 
 perfectly to enjoy and discharge the rights and duties consequent upon 
 a change from monarchical to republican institutions, the United 
 States agrees to set apart and pay over for the term of ten years the 
 sum of $75,000 per annum, one- third of which shall be applied to con- 
 stitute the principal of a fund for the benefit of a college or university, 
 or colleges or universities, as the case may be, and the balance for the 
 support of common schools, to be invested, secured, or applied as may 
 be determined by the legislative authority of the Hawaiian Islands 
 when admitted as a state into the Union as aforesaid. 
 
 Article IX. 
 
 Immediately after the exchange of the ratifications of this treaty the 
 President of the United States shall appoint a commissioner who shall 
 receive in due form, in the name of the United States, the transfer of 
 the sovereignty and territories of the Hawaiian Islands, also all public 
 property, archives, and other things hereinbefore stipulated to be con- 
 veyed, and who shall exercise all executive authority in said islands 
 necessary to the preservation of peace and order and to the proper 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 7 
 
 execution of the laws until the state contemplated in this treaty can be 
 duly organized and admitted as such state; and until the arrival of 
 such commissioner all departments of His Majesty's Government shall 
 continue as now constituted. 
 
 Article X. 
 
 This treaty shall be ratified by the respective high contracting par- 
 ties and the ratifications exchanged at the city of Honolulu within 
 eight months from the date hereof, or sooner if possible; but it is agreed 
 that this period maybe extended by mutual consent of the two par- 
 ties. 
 
 In witness whereof we, the undersigned, plenipotentiaries of His 
 Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands and of the United States 
 of America, have signed three originals of this treaty of annexation in 
 Hawaiian and three in English, and have thereunto affixed our respec- 
 tive official seals. 
 
 Done at Honolulu, this day of , in the year of our Lord one 
 
 thousand eight hundred and fifty-four. 
 
 SEPARATE AND SECRET ARTICLE. 
 
 Whereas it is desirable to guard against the exigencies declared in 
 the preamble to the foregoing treaty, and to secure the King of the 
 Hawaiian Islands, his chiefs and all who reside under his jurisdiction, 
 from the dangers therein referred to and expressed, it is hereby pro- 
 vided and expressly agreed that at any time before the final exchange 
 of the ratifications of said treaty, if the same shall be duly ratified on 
 the part of His Majesty the King, and satisfactory notice thereof given 
 to the commissioner of the United States, it shall be competent for 
 His Majesty, by proclamation, to declare his islands annexed to the 
 American Union, subject to the provisions of such treaty as negotiated, 
 and the commissioners of the United States for the time being shall 
 receive and accept the transfer of the jurisdiction of the said islands, 
 in the name of the United States, and protect and defend them by the 
 armed forces of the United States as a part of the American Union, 
 holding the same for and in behalf of his Government, and exercising 
 the jurisdiction provided for in said treaty, with the understanding, 
 however, that in case the said treaty is not finally ratified, or other 
 arrangement made, by the free consent and to the mutual satisfaction 
 of the contracting parties, the sovereignty of the islands shall imme- 
 diately revert, without prejudice, to His Majesty, or his immediate 
 heirs in the same condition as before the transfer thereof; and it is 
 further understood and agreed that this article shall be as binding for 
 all the ends and purposes herein expressed as if it formed a part of 
 the foregoing treaty. 
 
 IV. Also the following instructions from hon. w. l. marcy, 
 secretary of war, to maj. gen. winfield scott, commanding 
 the army of the united states in mexico. 
 
 War Department, 
 Washington, I). C, January 18, 1894. 
 Sir: As requested in your letter of the 13th instant, I have the 
 honor to transmit herewith a copy of a confidential letter, dated April 
 14, 1847, addressed by the Secretary of War to Maj. Gen Winfield 
 
8 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Scott, commanding IT. S. Army in Mexico, and advising him that 
 Nicholas P. Trist, esq., has been commissioned by the President of the 
 United States to proceed to the headquarters of the Army in Mexico, 
 or to the naval squadron, for the purpose of receiving any proposal 
 which the enemy may make for peace with the United States, and 
 informing Maj. Gen. Scott as to the diplomatic powers with which Mr.' 
 Trist is clothed under his instructions. 
 
 Attention is invited to House Ex. Doc. "No. 56, Thirtieth Congress, 
 first session, " Correspondence between the Secretary of War and Gen- 
 erals Scott and Taylor, and between Gen. Scott and Mr. Trist," which 
 contains all the information in possession of this Department on the 
 subject. 
 
 Very respectfully, 
 
 Daniel S. Lamont, 
 
 /Secretary of War. 
 Hon. John T. Morgan, 
 
 Chairman Committee on Foreign Affairs, U. S. Senate. 
 
 
 [Confidential.] 
 
 War Department, 
 Washington, April 14. 1847. 
 Maj. Gen. Winfield Scott, 
 
 Commanding the Army of the United States, Mexico: 
 
 Sir : The signal successes which have attended our military opera- 
 tions since the commencement of the present war would seem to justify 
 the expectation that Mexico will be disposed to offer fair terms oi 
 accommodation. With a view to a result so desirable, the President 
 has commissioned Nicholas P. Trist, esquire, of the State Department, 
 to proceed to your headquarters, or to the squadron, as to him may 
 seem most convenient, and be in readiness to receive any proposal 
 which the enemy may see fit to make for the restoration of peace. 
 
 Mr. Trist is clothed with such diplomatic powers as will authorize 
 him to enter into arrangements with the Government of Mexico for the 
 suspension of hostilities. Should he make known to you, in writing, 
 that the contingency has occurred in consequence of which the Presi- 
 dent is willing that farther active military operations should cease, 
 you will regard such notice as a direction from the President to suspend 
 them until further orders from this Department, unless continued or 
 recommenced by the enemy; but, in so doing, you will not retire from 
 any place you may occupy, or abstain from any change of position 
 which you may deem necessary to the health or safety of the troops 
 under your command, unless, on consultation with Mr. Trist, a change 
 in the position of your forces should be deemed necessary to the suc- 
 cess of the negotiation for peace. Until hostilities, as herein proposed, 
 shall be intermitted, you will continue to carry on your operations with 
 energy, and push your advantages as far as your means will enable 
 you to do. 
 
 Mr. Trist is also the bearer of a dispatch to the Secretary of Foreign 
 Affairs of the Government of Mexico, in reply to one addressed to the 
 Secretary of State here. You will transmit that dispatch to the com- 
 mander of the Mexican forces, with a request that it may be laid before 
 his Government, at the same time giving information that Mr. Trist, 
 an officer from our Department for Foreign Affairs, next in rank to its 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 9 
 
 chief, is at your headquarters, or on board the squadron, as the case 
 may be. 
 
 You will afford Mr. Trist all the accommodation and facilities in your 
 power to enable him to accomplish the objects of his mission. 
 Very respectfully^ your obedient servant, 
 
 W. L. Marcy, 
 Secretary of War. 
 
 P. S. — Should a suspension of hostilities take place, you will lose no 
 time in communicating the fact to Maj. Gen. Taylor. 
 
 V. Also the following treaty of reciprocity between the 
 
 UNITED STATES AND HAWAII, DATED AND SIGNED THE 20TH OF 
 JULY, 1855, BUT WHICH WAS NOT RATIFIED BY THE SENATE. 
 
 [Confidential. Executive, No. 7. Special session.] 
 
 TREATY BETWEEN THE UNITED STATES AND HIS MAJESTY THE 
 KING OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 March 9, 1857, on motion by Mr. Mason, referred to the Committee on Foreign 
 Relations, and ordered to be printed in confidence for the use of the Senate. 
 
 The United States of America and His Majesty the King of the 
 Hawaiian Islands, equally animated by the desire to strengthen and 
 perpetuate the friendly relations which have heretofore uniformly existed 
 between them, and to consolidate their commercial intercourse, have 
 resolved to enter into a convention for commercial reciprocity. For this 
 purpose the President of the United States of America has conferred 
 full powers on William L. Marcy, Secretary of State, and His Majesty 
 the King of the Hawaiian Islands has conferred like powers on the hon- 
 orable William Little Lee, chancellor and chief justice of the supreme 
 court of those islands, a member of his Hawaiian Majesty's privy council 
 of state and cabinet, president of the board of land commissioners, and 
 His Majesty's envoy extraordinary and minister plenipotentiary to the 
 United States of America. 
 
 And the said plenipotentiaries, after having exchanged their full 
 powers, which were found to be in due form, have agreed to the follow- 
 ing articles : 
 
 Article I. 
 
 For and in consideration of the rights and privileges granted by His 
 Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands in the next succeeding article 
 of this convention, and as an equivalent therefor, the United States of 
 America hereby agree to admit all the articles named in the following 
 schedule, the same being the growth or produce of the Hawaiian Islands, 
 into all the ports of the United States of America free of duty: 
 
 Schedule. 
 
 Muscovado, brown, clayed, and all other unrefined srgars. 
 
 Sirups of sugar ; molasses. 
 
 Coffee; arrowrqot. 
 
 Live stock and animals of all kinds. 
 
 Cotton, unmanufactured. 
 
 Seeds, and vegetables not preserved 
 
 Undried fruits not preserved. 
 
10 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Poultry: eggs. 
 
 Plants, shrubs, and trees. 
 
 Pelts j wool, unmanufactured. 
 
 Eags. 
 
 Hides, furs, skins, undressed. 
 
 Butter ; tallow. 
 
 Article II. 
 
 For and in consideration of the rights and privileges gn nted by the 
 United States of America in the preceding article of this convention, 
 and as an equivalent therefor, His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian 
 Islands hereby agrees to admit all the articles named in the following, 
 schedule, the same being the growth or produce of the United States 
 of America, into all the ports of the Hawaiian Islands free of duty: 
 
 Schedule. 
 Flour of wheat. 
 Fish of all kinds. 
 Coal. 
 
 Timber and lumber of all kinds, round, hewed, and sawed, unmanu- 
 factured, in whole or in part. 
 Staves and heading. 
 Cotton, unmanufactured. 
 Seeds, and vegetables not preserved. 
 Undried fruits, not preserved. 
 Poultry; eggs. 
 Plants, shrubs, and trees. 
 
 Pelts; wool, unmanufactured. 
 
 Eags. 
 
 Hides, furs, skins, undressed. 
 
 Butter; tallow. 
 
 
 Article III. 
 
 The evidence that articles proposed to be admitted into the ports ot 
 the United States of America or the ports of the Hawaiian Islands 
 free of duty, under the first and second articles of this convention, are 
 the growth or the produce of the United States of America or of the 
 Hawaiian Islands shall be a certificate to that effect from the Ameri- 
 can or Hawaiian consul or consular agent of the port from which such 
 articles are exported, or, in case there shall be no such consul or con- 
 sular agent resident in such port, a certificate to that effect from the 
 collector of the port. 
 
 Article IV. 
 
 The present convention shall take effect as soon as the law required 
 to carry it into operation shall have been passed by the Congress of 
 the United States of America and the convention shall have been 
 approved by His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands in council. 
 The convention shall remain in force for seven years from the date at 
 which it may go into operation, and further, until the expiration of 
 twelve months after either of the high contracting 'parties shall give 
 notice to the other of its wish to terminate the same, each of the high 
 contracting parties being at liberty to give such notice to the other at 
 the end of the said term of seven years, or at any time afterwards. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 11 
 
 Article V. 
 
 The present convention shall be duly ratified, and the ratifications 
 
 lall be exchanged at Honolulu within eighteen months from tha date 
 
 Sreof, or earlier if possible. 
 
 In faith whereof the respective plenipotentiaries have signed this 
 
 mvention, and have hereunto .affixed their seals. 
 
 Done, in triplicate, in the English language, in the city of Wash- 
 
 gton, this twentieth day of July, anno Domini one thousand eight 
 
 mdred and fifty-five. 
 
 W. L. Marcy. [seal.1 
 W. L. Lee. [seal.] 
 
 [Confidential. Executive, No. 7. Thirty-fourth Congress, first session.] 
 
 'essage of the President of the United States, communicating a treaty between the United 
 /States and the King of the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 January 3, 1856, read first time, and, on motion by Mr. Mason, referred to the Com- 
 
 frttee on Foreign Relations. 
 
 January 10, 1856, ordered to be printed in confidence -for the use of the Senate. 
 
 the Senate of the United States: 
 
 1 transmit to the Senate for consideration, with a view to ratification, 
 treaty between the United States and His Majesty the King of the 
 
 Hawaiian Islands, signed in Washington, the twentieth day of July, 
 . D. 1855. 
 
 Franklin Pierce. 
 Washington, December 27 ', 1855. 
 
 I. Also the following report on the physical features, 
 
 FACTS OF LANDING, SUPPLIES, CLIMATE, DISEASES, ETC., OF THE 
 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, PREPARED BY CAPT. GEORGE P. SCRIVEN, 
 OF THE SIGNAL CORPS, ASSISTED BY LIEUT. J. Y. MASON BLUNT, 
 OF THE FIFTH CAVALRY, WITH THE ACCOMPANYING MAPS. 
 
 eport on the physical features, ports of landing^ supplies, climate, 
 
 diseases, etc. 
 
 [Compiled from the best available sources for the information of the Army.] 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Dcation, distances from the Pacific coast 12 
 
 ummunications with the United States 12 
 
 ames, areas 13 
 
 eneral physical characteristics 13 
 
 nls 11 
 
 limates 11 
 
 arthquakes - 15 
 
 opulation, characteristics, religious, education 15-17 
 
 aws, military forces, police 17 
 
 alienage, Government - - 17, 18 
 
 usiness, currency, finance, commerce 18, 19 
 
 coducts, resources, vegetation 19 
 
 ldustries 19 
 
 iseases (other than leprosy) 20 
 
 annerof life, clothing 20 
 
12 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Pa 
 Individual characteristics of islands: 
 
 Oahu 
 
 Coast 
 
 Interior 
 
 Cities, towns, and ports, Honolulu 
 
 Other than Honolulu 
 
 Hawaii 
 
 Coast 
 
 Interior 
 
 Cities, towns, and ports 
 
 Maui , 
 
 Coast .^. 
 
 Interior 
 
 Cities, towns, and ports 
 
 Kauai 
 
 Coast 
 
 Interior 
 
 Cities, towns, and ports 
 
 Molokai 
 
 Coast 
 
 Interior 
 
 Cities, towns, and ports 
 
 Lanai 
 
 Niihau 
 
 Cities, towns, and ports 
 
 Kahulaui T 
 
 Kaula 
 
 Lenua 
 
 Molokini 
 
 Communications 
 
 Kailroads 
 
 Roads 
 
 Telegraphs, telephones 
 
 Inter-island steamers and vessels 
 
 Leprosy 
 
 Report on the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 The Hawaiian Islands lie between parallels 18° 50 / and 23° 5' noi 
 latitude, and between meridians 154° 40' and 101° 50' west from Gre< 
 wich. A line drawn through the axis of the group would approxiimi 
 roughly the segment of a circle convex towards the northeast; t 
 chord connecting the most widely separated points would have a leng 
 of about 400 statute miles. 
 
 Honolulu, the capital and chief city, lies 2,080 miles from San Fr£i 
 cisco; approximately 3,800 miles from Auckland; 4,500 miles from Sy 
 ney; and 4,800 miles from Hongkong. 
 
 Mean time Honolulu noon is equivalent to lOh. 31m. 26s. Green wi j 
 mean time. 
 
 COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 San Francisco to Honolulu. — The Australia of the Oceanic Steam si 
 Company and the Zealandia (W. J. Irwin) leave San Francisco a i 
 return every other Tuesday. 
 
 The Oceanic Steamship Company's steamers Alameda, Maripoi 
 and the Union Steamship Company's steamer Monowai, leave San Fn j 
 cisco for New Zealand via Honolulu once a month. 
 
 Time. — San Francisco to Honolulu, seven days. 
 
 Sailing vessels, with good passenger accommodations, run regula: ! 
 from San Francisco to Honolulu. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 13 
 
 Sailing time.- San Francisco to Honolulu, ten to eighteen days. 
 
 Pacific mail steamers, San Francisco to China and Japan, stop at 
 Honolulu every other trip. 
 
 "A new company sends its first steamer this month (February, 1893), 
 from Tacoma and Seattle to Honolulu. Steamers of the Occidental 
 uul Oriental line to China and Japan [N. Y. Tribune, February 16] are 
 due to stop at Honolulu." 
 
 Steamers of the Oceanic and Pacific Mail companies are under the 
 United States flag. 
 
 POSITION, AREAS, AND GEOGRAPHICAL FEATURES. 
 
 The strategic value of the islands and their geographical position 
 are indicated on the accompanying chart (A). In general the islands 
 are mountainous, covered with verdure, and in parts, especially of 
 Hawaii, possessing very considerable areas of forest, whose vegetation 
 is that of the tropics. 
 
 The Hawaiian group is composed of eight inhabited, and of four 
 uninhabited islands. [Chart B.] The names and dimensions of the 
 inhabited islands are: 
 
 Name. 
 
 Length. 
 
 Breadth. 
 
 Area. 
 
 
 Miles. 
 90 
 46 
 48 
 25 
 40 
 17 
 20 
 11 
 
 Miles. 
 
 74 
 
 25 
 
 30 
 
 22 
 
 7 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 Square miles. 
 3 950 
 
 Oahu 
 
 530 
 
 IMaui 
 
 620 
 
 
 500 
 
 
 190 
 
 
 100 
 
 
 90 
 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 The first five of these islands contain the bulk of the population as 
 well as the chief industries. 
 
 Three of the four uninhabited islands of the group are Kaula, Lenua, 
 and Molokini. 
 
 The total area of the inhabited islands is about 6,040 square miles. 
 
 u All of these islands are volcanic. No other rocks than volcanic are 
 found upon any of them, excepting a few remnants of raised sea beaches 
 composed of consolidated coral sands. All tlie larger ones are very 
 mountainous. 
 
 "The culminating points of the island Hawaii are Mauna Kea, 13,900 
 feet, and Mauna Loa, 13,700 feet," the highest points of the group. 
 
 " In general the island group consists of the summits of a gigantic 
 submarine mountain chain, projecting its loftier peaks and domes above 
 the water." * 
 
 On the island of Hawaii the volcanic forces are still in operation ; on 
 the other islands they are extinct. 
 
 None of the mountains are of sufficient height to reach the line of 
 eternal snow. 
 
 * See Hawaiian volcanoes, Capt. C. E. Dutton, U. S. A. Capt. (now Major) Dutton 
 adds: "Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea, referred to their true bases at the bottom of the 
 Pacific, are therefore mountains not far from 30,000 feet in height. " Maj. Dutton is 
 frequently quoted in the following paragraphs relating to the physical character- 
 istics of tie islands. 
 
14 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 SOIL. 
 
 "Only a small proportion of the area of the islands is capable of sus- T 
 taining a dense population. The most habitable tracts are near the 
 seacoast, and only a part of even a small part of these are really fertile^ 
 
 "The interior portions are mountainous and craggy, with a thin soil, 
 admirable in a few localities for pasturage, but unlit for agriculture. 
 
 "Many parts of the shore belt are arid and almost barren. Other* 
 are covered with lavas too recent to have permitted the formation of 
 soil, and still others are trenched with ravines so deep and abrupt that 
 access is difficult. 
 
 " Deep rich soils at altitudes adapted to the growth of the sugar cane 
 probably ferin less than the fortieth part of the entire area. 
 
 "Shallower soils, however, are a little more extensive and yield other 
 crops of tropical staples in abundance." 
 
 CLIMATE. 
 
 . 
 
 The climate of the Hawaiian Islands is warm but salubrious, the te: 
 perature equable, and the sky usually clear. In the shade it is nevetj 
 hot and seldom chilly, and there is so little humidity in the air that it 
 is rarely sweltering, though during the months of January, February, 
 and March the wind blows strongly from the southwest, and the atmos- 
 phere is damp and unpleasant. After such seasons the arid westerly 
 slopes are clothed with verdure and the capacity of the pastures vastly 
 increased. ♦ 
 
 "Upon the islands themselves it may be said that there are almost as 
 many climates as there are square leagues, and the differences of cli- 
 matic conditions exhibited by localities separated only half a dozen 
 miles are extreme. 
 
 "As a general rule the windward sides are excessively rainy, the pre- 
 cipitation frequently exceeding 200 inches in a year. The leeward sides 
 are generally arid, but to this there are some striking exceptions ; when- 
 ever the land barrier is low enough to permit the trade winds to blow 
 over it the lee of the barrier is invariably dry and sometimes is as parched 
 and barren as the sage plains of the Eocky Mountains ; the winds throw 
 down their moisture copiously as they rise to the dividing crest and 
 descend hot and dry ; but when the barrier is lofty enough to effectually 
 oppose the drift of the air, the lee becomes subject to the simple alter- 
 nation of daily land and sea breeze. As the sea breeze comes in and 
 ascends the slope it sends down rain ; as the land breeze floats down 
 ward and outward it is dry and clear. 
 
 "The sea breeze sets in a little before noon and the land breeze goes 
 out a little before midnight. 
 
 "Belatively to human comfort, the climate is perfection. It is never 
 hot, and at moderate altitudes it is never cold. The heat of summer 
 is never sufficient to bring lassitude, and labor out of doors is far more 
 tolerable than in the summer of New England or Minnesota. 77 
 
 When the mountains are low, as in Oahu, the rains extend over them 
 and maintain copious streams for irrigation of the leeward lands where 
 little rain falls. Very much more rain falls on the windward north-, 
 east sides of the large islands. At Hilo in Hawaii as much as 20 feet 
 has been measured in one year. At Honolulu the mean annual rain- 
 fall for five years ending 1877 varied from 32-30 to 46-40 inches, giving 
 an average of 38 inches. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 15 
 
 Hurricanes and typhoons are said to be infrequent. There is 7 how- 
 ever, at Kawaihae, in the island of Hawaii, a wind called the mumuTca 
 which rushes violently down between the mountains, and is dangerous 
 to shipping. When hurricanes occur on the island of Maui, great 
 damage to the sugar crop ensues. 
 
 The temperature varies from 55° in winter to 70° in summer for the 
 early mornings, and attains an average maximum of 75° in the winter 
 and 85° in the summer for afternoon heats. 
 
 There is no rapid, sudden change; cold or hot waves are unknown. 
 
 During the heat of the day the sun-heated lava and rocks create a 
 strong draft, loaded with vapor from the ocean ; this vapor, at 2,000 
 feet elevation, forms a continuous cloud bank, covering the mountains. 
 
 Hail sometimes falls in the vicinity of Hawaii. 
 
 Table from Pacific Coast Commercial Record showing temperatures in Honolulu : 
 
 Maximum temperature for 1891 in Honolulu 89° 
 
 Minimum temperature for 1891 in Honolulu 54° 
 
 Maximum daily range of the year 22° 
 
 Average weekly maximum from July 1, to October 1 86° 
 
 Table from u Vistas of Hawaii" showing temperature for 1890 : 
 
 Date. 
 
 January 7... 
 February 4.. 
 
 March 4 
 
 April 1 
 
 May 6 
 
 June 3 
 
 July 1 
 
 August 5 
 
 September 2. 
 
 October 7 
 
 November 4. 
 December 2. 
 
 6 a. m. 
 
 ] p.m. 
 
 o 
 
 • 
 
 67 
 
 77 
 
 68 
 
 72 
 
 66 
 
 76 
 
 67 
 
 78 
 
 69 
 
 78 
 
 73 
 
 78 
 
 73 
 
 82 
 
 72 
 
 84 
 
 72 
 
 83 
 
 75 
 
 81 
 
 71 
 
 80 
 
 69 
 
 78 
 
 9 p. m. 
 
 From the above it is evident that the climate of the Hawaiian 
 Islands is in general that of a mild summer. The hottest months are 
 July and August, when the thermometer sometimes rises to 90°, but 
 this is considered unusual. Frost is unknown; rains are warm; and 
 the days and nights are of so nearly the same temperature that little 
 daily change of clothing is necessary. 
 
 EARTHQUAKES. 
 
 Earthquakes are of common occurrence in the islands, but they 
 usually have their center of disturbance in Hawaii. In the islands to 
 the northwestward the shocks are infrequent and feeble. The shocks 
 are seldom of a very alarming or destructive character, but small or 
 moderate tremors are frequent. 
 
 POPULATION. 
 
 The total population of the Hawaiian Islands in 1890* was 89,990, of 
 
 which 58,714 are males, 
 
 31,276 females. 
 
 Statesman's Year Book, 1893. 
 
16 
 
 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Latest official census of the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 [Taken December 28, 1890.] 
 
 BY DISTRICTS AND ISLANDS. 
 
 Hawaii: 
 
 Hilo 9,935 
 
 Pima , 834 
 
 Kau 2,577 
 
 North Kona 1, 753 
 
 South Kona 1, 812 
 
 North Kohala 4,303 
 
 South Kohala 538 
 
 Hamakua 5, 002 
 
 26, 754 
 Maui : 
 
 Lahaina 2, 113 
 
 Wailuku 6, 708 
 
 Hana 3,270 
 
 Makawoo 5, 266 
 
 Molokai . 
 
 17, 357 
 2,632 
 
 Lauai 
 
 174 
 
 Oahu: 
 
 Honolulu 
 
 22 907 
 
 Ewa 
 
 2 155 
 
 Waianae 
 
 903 
 
 Waialua 
 
 1,286 
 
 Koolauloa 
 
 Koolaupoko 
 
 Kauai : 
 
 Waimea 
 
 1,444 
 
 2,499 
 
 31, 194 
 
 2,523 
 
 Niihau 
 
 216 
 
 Koloa 
 
 1,755 
 
 Kawaihau 
 
 Hanalei 
 
 2,101 
 
 2, 472 
 
 Lihue 
 
 2,792 
 
 
 
 11, 859 
 
 BY NATIONALITY — 1890 AND 1884 COMPARED. 
 
 Natives 
 
 Half-castes 
 
 Chinese 
 
 Americans 
 
 Hawaiian-born, foreign par- 
 ents 
 
 Japanese 
 
 1890. 
 
 34, 436 
 6,186 
 
 15, 301 
 1,928 
 
 7,495 
 12,360 
 
 1884. 
 
 40, 014 
 4,218 
 
 17, 937 
 2,066 
 
 2,040 
 116 
 
 Norwegian 
 
 Britons 
 
 Portuguese 
 
 Germans 
 
 French 
 
 Other foreigners 
 Polynesian 
 
 1884. 
 
 227 
 
 392 
 
 1,344 
 
 1,282 
 
 8,602 
 
 9,377 
 
 1,034 
 
 1.61)0 
 
 70 
 
 192 
 
 419 
 
 416 
 
 588 
 
 956 
 
 Total population 1890 89,990 
 
 Total population 1884 , 80,578 
 
 Population by nationality and sex of the Hawaiian Islands, and also of the principal town- 
 ship districts. 
 
 [Compiled from tbe latest census, 1890.] 
 
 Nationalities. 
 
 Honolulu, 
 Oahu. 
 
 Wailuku, 
 Maui. 
 
 Lahaina, 
 Maui. 
 
 Hilo, 
 Hawaii. 
 
 Lihue, 
 Kauai. 
 
 Popula- 
 tion whole 
 islands. 
 
 Natives, males 
 
 females '- 
 
 Half-castes, males 
 
 females 
 
 Chinese, males 
 
 females 
 
 Hawaiian-born, foreign parents, males. . 
 females 
 
 Americans, males 
 
 females 
 
 British, males * 
 
 females 
 
 Germans, males 
 
 females 
 
 French, males 
 
 females 
 
 Portuguese, males 
 
 females 
 
 Japanese, males 
 
 females 
 
 Norwegians, males 
 
 females 
 
 Polynesians, males 
 
 females 
 
 All others, males 
 
 females 
 
 Total 
 
 4,494 
 
 4,068 
 
 1, 257 
 
 1,346 
 
 3,950 
 
 457 
 
 1,250 
 
 1, 236 
 
 767 
 
 431 
 
 529 
 
 267 
 
 261 
 
 105 
 
 25 
 
 23 
 
 933 
 
 799 
 
 277 
 
 111 
 
 55 
 
 21 
 
 151 
 
 22 
 
 1,260 
 
 1,178 
 
 267 
 
 248 
 
 1,202 
 
 33 
 
 254 
 
 215 
 
 65 
 
 23 
 
 53 
 
 5 
 
 29 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 402 
 
 326 
 
 842 
 
 183 
 
 31 
 
 11 
 
 22 
 
 14 
 
 36 
 
 32 
 
 687 
 
 599 
 
 199 
 
 101 
 
 89 
 
 5 
 
 41 
 
 39 
 
 15 
 
 11 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 29 
 
 24 
 
 249 
 
 40 
 
 1,076 
 
 900 
 
 175 
 
 189 
 
 1,264 
 
 19 
 
 537 
 
 513 
 90 
 27 
 68 i 
 16 I 
 27 
 
 7 
 4 . 
 
 2,703 
 708 
 
 22, 907 
 
 6,708 
 
 2,113 
 
 9 935 
 
 411 
 
 310 
 
 49 
 
 61 
 
 347 
 
 9 
 
 203 
 
 177 
 
 11 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 163 
 
 108 
 
 237 
 195 
 363 
 
 18, 364 
 
 16, 072 
 
 3, 085 
 
 3, 101 
 
 14, 552 
 
 779 
 
 3, 909 
 
 3,586 
 
 1,298 
 
 630 
 
 982 
 
 362 
 
 729 
 
 305 
 
 46 
 
 24 
 
 4,770 
 
 3, 832 
 
 10, 079 
 
 2,281 
 
 155 
 
 72 
 
 404 
 
 184 
 
 371 
 
 48 
 
 2, 792 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 17 
 
 CHARACTERISTICS, RELIGION, EDUCATION. 
 
 The natives are a good-tempered, light- hearted, pleasure-loving peo- 
 ple. It is probable that little difficulty is found in governing them as, 
 of themselves, they are not inclined to turbulence nor disposed to 
 revolt against any form of government. Like children, they are easily 
 led and controlled. Even when the Hawaiian Islands were discovered, 
 the people were by no means savages, but had an organized state of 
 society. After discovery, civilization made progress as rapidly, it is 
 said, with these people as with the Japanese; and in twenty -five years 
 after the landing of the missionaries (1820), the whole people had, in a 
 great measure become Americanized. But to day, except politically as 
 the one-time owners of the islands, the natives are but an unimportant 
 element of the people and their consent or opposition could have but 
 little influence upon the course of events. They are a peace-loving 
 race, and, in a military sense, are not worth consideration, but they are 
 brave individually and make, it is said, excellent seamen. Little resist- 
 ance could be anticipated from them even in defense of their country. 
 
 RELIGION. 
 
 All forms of religion are tolerated. According to the latest statis- 
 tics there are : 
 
 Protestants 1 29,685 
 
 Roman Catholics 20,072 
 
 Mormons 3, 576 
 
 Hebrews, less than 100 
 
 EDUCATION. 
 
 Education is general. 
 
 There are 178 schools, with 10,000 pupils, of whom 5,559 are natives 
 and 1,573 half-castes. In 1890-'92 $326,922 was allotted for public 
 instruction. (Sum allotted for public instruction, 1892->94, $210,600. 
 Statesman's Year Book, 1893.) 
 
 • LAWS. 
 
 The laws are modeled on those of the United States. There is a 
 supreme court of justice, and, in addition, circuit judges and justices 
 of the peace. 
 
 MILITARY FORCES AND POLICE. 
 
 The military forces authorized by law consist of the household 
 guards, fixed at 65 men. It is reported that all but 16 of these men 
 have been discharged, that number being retained as a guard for the 
 deposed queen (February, 1893). Volunteer military organizations 
 are prohibited by law. 
 
 There is also an organized police force. 
 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 The language is very largely made up of vowels, giving to the spoken 
 tongue a pleasant liquid sound somewhat difficult to acquire. The 
 consonants all have the English sound, the vowels that of the German 
 S. Rep. 227 2 
 
IS 
 
 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 vowels, except i, which is the same as the German ie. r j?here are no 
 silent letters in the written Hawaiian language. 
 English is very generally spoken throughout the group. 
 
 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 Under the great chief Kamehameha the islands of the Hawaiian 
 group became consolidated into a kingdom about the beginning of the 
 present century, and continued, with occasional interference from 
 European powers, as an independent nation under the rule of the 
 descen dents of the first great chief. 
 
 At the beginning of the present year the Government was a consti- 
 tutional monarchy, ruled by a queen aided by a cabinet consisting of 
 4 ministers, and by a legislature composed of 24 members of the house 
 of nobles and 24 representatives. These, with the ministers, made a 
 total of 52. Members of both houses were elected by a popular vote. 
 An educational qualification was necessary for all voters, and a prop- 
 erty qualification for electors for nobles. In January of this year the 
 revolution occurred which resulted in the present Provisional Govern- 
 ment. 
 
 BUSINESS. 
 
 Business is almost entirely carried on by foreigners, principally 
 Americans, British, Germans, and Chinamen. Many of the principal 
 offices are filled by foreigners or by native-born whites. 
 
 CURRENCY. 
 
 Gold and silver coins of all nations are current as legal tender at 
 real or nominal value. From 1884 only United States gold coins have 
 been legal tender for more than $10; no paper money exists excepting 
 in form of treasury certificates for coin deposited. 
 
 FINANCE.* 
 
 The budget is (was) voted for a biennial period. The following table 
 shows the revenue and expenditures in dollars for the last five financial 
 periods : ■ 
 
 
 1882- r 84. 
 
 1884-'86. 
 
 1886-'88. 
 
 1888-'90. 
 
 1890-'92. 
 
 
 $3, 092, 085 
 2,216,406 
 
 $3, 010, 655 
 2, 988, 722 
 
 $4,812,576 
 4,712,285 
 
 $3. 632, 197 
 3, 250, 510 
 
 $4, 408, 033 
 
 
 4, 095, 891 
 
 
 
 The revenue is largely derived from customs ($1,204,305, 1890->92) 
 and internal taxes ($963,495, 1890-'92), while the largest item of 
 expenditure was for the 'interior ($1,641,848, 1890->92). The debt, 
 March, 1892, was: 
 
 Bonded debt .' $ 2 ; ^U, 000 
 
 Dae depositors' postal-savings bank 903,162 
 
 Interest varies from 5 to 12 per cent. 
 
 * Statesman's Year Book, 1893. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 19 
 
 COMMERCE — EXPORTS AND IMPORTS. 
 
 Sugar and rice are the staple industries, while coffee, hides, bananas, 
 and wool are also exported. 
 The following table shows the commerce and shipping for five years: 
 
 Years. 
 
 Imports. 
 
 Native ex- 
 ports. 
 
 Customs 
 receipts. 
 
 Ships en- 
 tered . 
 
 Tonnage. 
 
 1887 
 
 $4, 944, 000 
 
 4, 541. 000 
 
 5, 439, 000 
 
 6, 962, 000 
 
 7, 439, 000 
 
 $9, 435, 000 
 11,631,000 
 14. 040, 000 
 13,143,000 
 10, 259. 000 
 
 $595, 000 
 
 ' 546,000 
 
 550, 000 
 
 696, 000 
 
 660, 000 
 
 254 
 
 210. 703 
 
 1888 
 
 246 | 221.148 
 
 1889 
 
 288 ! 223, 567 
 
 1890 r 
 
 295 ! 230,120 
 
 1891 
 
 310 
 
 
 
 
 The chief exports in 1891 were : 
 
 Sugar pounds.. 274,983,580 
 
 Rice - do.... 4,900,450 
 
 Bananas bunches . . 116, 660 
 
 Wool pounds . . 97, 119 
 
 The imports are mainly groceries, provisions, clothing, grain, timber, 
 machinery, hardware, and cotton goods. 
 Ninety-one per cent of the trade is with the United States.* 
 
 PRODUCTS, RESOURCES, VEGETATION. 
 
 Besides sugar and rice, the staple products, coffee, bananas, oranges, 
 and other fruits are largely grown. Food products are abundant, 
 especially of the kind suitable to a hot climate. 
 
 The native food consists largely of the taro plant, of which the best 
 varieties are grown in shallow ponds of fresh water. It is stated that 
 about 40 square feet of taro will yield enough to supply one man for 
 a year, this being his principal food. 'From this plant is made the^oi, 
 which is the ordinary food of the Kanaka. 
 
 The sweet potato grows even amongst the rocks and flourishes 
 abundantly in good soil, while the common potato sometimes grows 
 well, though is often injured by worms. 
 
 Wheat and corn are grown; the former wns once cultivated for 
 export. Flour is made, but it is said that the islands now receive all 
 their cereal products from California. 
 
 The quality of the coffee raised is said to be equal to the choicest. 
 
 The climate is also very favorable to the growth of the long staple 
 sea-island cotton; but as this variety must be picked by hand the high 
 price of labor in the islands renders its culture unprofitable. 
 
 Tropical fruits of nearly all kinds grow in the greatest abundance, 
 the orange, lemon, lime, mango, pineapple, chirimoya or custard apple, 
 the alligator pear, pomegranate, and guava, all of which are exotic. 
 
 The banana is indigenous, and is the most abundant of all fruits ; 
 besides it there are the ohia apple — a fruit peculiar to the Pacific 
 islands, soft, juicy, and mildy acid — many varieties of palms, the 
 choicest trees of India, the caoutchouc, the papaya, the traveler's tree 
 of Madagascar, and other foreign plants. 
 
 INDUSTRIES. 
 
 "The chief industry of the islands is the cultivation of sugar cane. 
 For this the soil (although the area is limited) seems better adapted 
 
 "Statesman's Year Book, 1893. 
 
20 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 than- any other in the world. The yield will average about 5,000 
 pounds of sugar to the acre, and choice fields sometimes yield twice' 
 that amount. Large amounts of American capital have heen invested 
 in the plantations and in the accessory commerce." 
 
 Large flocks of sheep and herds of cattle are found. These animals 
 are raised chiefly for their wool and hides. On the island of Lanai 
 great flocks of sheep pasture, while in Hawaii considerable numbers of 
 wild cattle are still found in the mountains;* wild goats and wild hogs 
 also exist in great numbers, and it is said that wild horses and asses 
 are also found. 
 
 DISEASES (OTHER THAN LEPROSY). 
 
 It is asserted that diseases, other than leprosy, are not as trouble- 
 some as in most places considered healthful. Malarial fevers are 
 thought to be infrequent, nevertheless in the monthly table (March, 
 1891) the greatest number of deaths for the year, 89, is recorded as due 
 to "fever." 
 
 Consumption (probably imported cases) comes next with 74; u old 
 age" next with 59. Amongst the other more important causes of death 
 are diarrhea, 29 ; dysentery, 15. From diseases of the liver but 2 died, 
 while 25 died of disease of the heart. 
 
 From this it would seem that the diseases common to the tropics — 
 fever and stomach troubles — are to be guarded against. Eheumatism 
 is prevalent in many of the damper localities; smallpox occasionally 
 appears; and measels has on one or two occasions carried oft' many of 
 the natives, owing to their manner of life, but this disease is now easily 
 controlled when it makes its appearance. Lung and chest troubles are 
 almost unknown to natives of the islands. In fact, the Hawaiian Islands 
 are regions of unusual healthfulness. 
 
 The general health of the natives is steadily improving; leprosy, 
 now largely under medical control, is gradually being stamped out. 
 {See Leprosy.) 
 
 MANNER OF LIFE, CLOTHING. 
 
 The whites live, of course, much as they live at home, and usually in 
 well- constructed nouses of European style. The natives live as a rule 
 in grass huts, upon native food, largely taro and fruit, and wear clothing 
 of light cotton stuff, a straw hat, but shoes rarely. 
 
 Woolens are not in general use, but very light flannels are recom- 
 mended for strangers at all seasons. 
 
 At night blankets are rarely needed, but a light blanket is otten com- 
 fortable. Houses have no fireplaces. 
 
 For troops clothing for all seasons should be light flannel drawers 
 and shirts, wide straw hats or helmets, and the light quality of outer 
 garments issued to troops on the southern stations. 
 
 Ample tentage should be provided for use in localities where heavy 
 and sudden rainfalls are frequent, and light blankets should be carried. 
 
 The ration should be suited to the requirements of a warm climate. 
 
 "Descended from the animals introduced by Vancouver in 1792. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 21 
 
 INDIVIDUAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE EIGHT INHABITED ISLANDS 
 OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP. 
 
 Island of Oahu (Map 0). 
 
 This island has the form of an irregular quadrangle; it lies 23 miles 
 northwest of the nearest island of the group, Molokai. Length about 
 4G, breadth about 25 miles. 
 
 Oahu, though not the largest, is the most important of the Hawaiian 
 group, as it contains Honolulu, the capital, chief seaport, and principal 
 city. 
 
 Coast. — The greater part of the island is surrounded by a coral reef 
 often half a mile wide. 
 
 The windward side of the island presents a gigantic cliff hardly acces- 
 sible, except at one point reached by a road cut with great labor from 
 the mountain side; but the leeward side descends from the mountain 
 to the sea in very moderate slopes deeply cut by ravines. 
 
 The northeastern coast of the island is generally a rugged plateau 
 descending by gentle slopes to the water. When viewed from the 
 ocean, this coast appears to be formed of detached hills rising steeply 
 and covered with woods. The intervening valleys are fertile and well 
 cultivated. From the southeast extremity of the island, called Makapuu 
 Point, to the Mokapu Peninsula, the coast is often marked by scattered 
 islets and rocks; and beyond, the peninsula is indented by a con- 
 siderable bay extending to Kaoio Point, thence to Kahuku, the northern 
 point of Oahu. Along this part of the coast is a narrow strip of land, 
 varying from a half to 2 miles in breadth, only a few feet above the 
 level of the sea. It is very fertile, and has a gradual ascent to the foot 
 of the mountains. 
 
 From Kahuku to the village of Waimea lies a level plain from 2 to 6 
 miles wide, and but slightly above the level of the sea. It is a good 
 pasture, and at many of its frequent holes and crevices may be seen 
 streams of clear and cool fresh water making their subterranean way 
 from the mountains to the outlets in the sea below low- water mark. 
 
 The southwest side of the island is composed chiefly of craggy moun- 
 tains, some descending abruptly to the sea, others terminating a small 
 distance from it; thence a low border of land extends to Ashore formed 
 by sandy beaches, bounded by rocks on which the surf beats heavily. 
 
 The southwest extremity is Laeloa, or Barber Point; thence the shore 
 continues low, flat, and covered with bushes to the entrance of Pearl 
 River, about 12 miles from Honolulu. 
 
 Some of the land in this vicinity is of extreme fertility. 
 
 Interior. — Two parallel ranges of hills traverse Oahu from southeast 
 to northwest, separated by a low plain. The highest point is Kauia, 
 4,0G0 feet, in the west range. The east range is much longer than the 
 other, and its ridge is very broken ; lateral spurs extend from many 
 ravines on the land side, but for 30 miles on the other side the range 
 presents to the sea a nearly vertical wall without a break. There are 
 few craters in the loftier heights; volcanic activity seems to have ceased; 
 but several groups of small cones with craters, some of lava, some of 
 tufa, exist. Valleys are numerous, with lateral ravines, in which water 
 courses and cascades are found. 
 
 A chain of mountains rises near the center of the east part of the 
 island to 3,175 feet, and descends near the middle into the Ewa Plain, 
 which divides this range from the distant and elevated mountains that 
 
22 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 rise in a line parallel with the southwest shore. The Ewa Divide lies 5 
 miles west of Honolulu. This Ewa Plain is nearly 20 miles in length 
 from Pearl Kiver to Waialua, and in some parts is 9 or 10 miles across; 
 its soil is fertile, and watered by a number of rivulets running along 
 deep water courses emptying into the sea. 
 
 Plain of Honolulu. — This plain is some 10 miles in length, and in 
 some parts 2 miles in width from the sea to the foot of the mountains. 
 
 The whole plain is covered with rich, alluvial soils, in places 2 or 3 
 feet deep. Under this lie volcanic ashes and cinders 14 to 16 feet deep, 
 resting on a stratum of solid nonvolcanic rock, a kind of sediment 
 deposited by the sea, in which branches of white coral, bones of fish 
 and animals, and several varieties of marine shells have been found. 
 A number of wells have been dug to a depth of 12 to 13 feet in the 
 substratum of rock, always reaching good clear water, which, though 
 free from salt or brackish taste, rises and falls with the tide. 
 
 Inland from Waikiki, near Honolulu, and reached by the Punahou 
 road, lies the Manoa Valley, whose upper portion divides into numerous 
 canyons. 
 
 There is a broad valley called Nuuanu, bounded by a mountain wall 
 20 miles in length, which rises from the green, rolling plain below. 
 
 Less than 5 miles from Honolulu, in a westerly direction, lies the 
 valley of Moanalua. Here are fine rice fields, cocoanut groves, and 
 fish ponds. 
 
 In the district of Waianae the bases of the mountain lie farther from" 
 the sea and a narrow valley, presenting a fertile and cultivated aspect, 
 seems to wind for some distance through hills. 
 
 In the Waialua bay district the soil is sandy and poor, but a short 
 distance iirshore an agreeable change takes place. 
 
 Honolulu. 
 
 Honolulu is the capital and principal port of the Hawaiian Islands, 
 and is situated on the south side of Oahu, on a narrow plain at the 
 foot of the eastern range of mountains. 
 
 The aspect of the country around Honolulu, as seen from the roads, 
 is barren; and the plain on which the town stands is destitute of ver- 
 dure. This plain extends east and west from the town, while behind it 
 the land rises gradually towards the Nuuanu Valley. Several crater- 
 shaped hills are in sight, one of which, named Punch Bowl Hill, 498 
 feet high, lies close to the northeast side of the town. 
 
 The central part of Honolulu consists of regularly laid out streets, 
 on either side of which stand houses and warehouses of European style, 
 frequently placed within spacious, inclosed gardens. The outer por- 
 tions of the town are chiefly composed of grass huts inhabited by 
 natives. Honolulu would, probably, burn easily to the ground. 
 
 Amongst the principal buildings are the spacious Government houses, 
 in which all the public offices are inclosed, the King's palace, a fort, 
 two hospitals, several churches and chapels belonging to the different 
 religious denominations, custom house, sailors' home, and several 
 schools. 
 
 Hospitals. — There is a quarantine hospital on the west side of the 
 harbor, and a good general hospital to which sailors and others are 
 admitted at $1.25 per diem. 
 
 Shops. — There are foundries, workshops, and shipyards, where con- 
 siderable repairs can be effected. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 23 
 
 Patent slip.— k patent slip has been constructed by the Government 
 on the east side of the harbor opposite, the outer light house. This slip 
 can take a vessel of 1,700 tons. 
 
 The harbor is formed by an opening in the coral reef, about 150 yards 
 wide at the entrance and 300 yards wide off the town, and rather more 
 than a mile in length. Though small it is capable of accommodating 
 a good number of vessels. Depili on bar is 30 feet. 
 
 Wharves. — The railway crosses the Hats on the north side of the har- 
 bor and terminates at two wharves, with 19 feet of water alongside 
 each of them. The west wharf is used by ships. 
 
 There is in the harbor altogether 1,900 feet of wharf frontage, with a 
 depth of 21J feet, and 700 feet with depths of from 17 to 19 feet, and 
 about 1,200 feet with less depth. 
 
 Tides. — The tidal streams are regular, running six hours each way. 
 .The flood is to the westward. Springs rise from 2 J to 3 feet. 
 
 Supplies. — Supplies of all kinds are plentiful. Beef, mutton, fowls, 
 eggs, vegetables, and fruit can be obtained at moderate prices. 
 
 Water can be procured from the shore in a tank. It is good, but very 
 expensive, even in the inner anchorage being $2.50 a ton. This for 
 ships. 
 
 Implements and building materials (with the exception of timber, 
 which is good and moderate in price) are excessively costly in Hono- 
 lulu. The demand for and sale of articles required for the equipment 
 of ships have greatly diminished. 
 
 Probably material for repair of arms, equipments, and munitions of 
 troops could be obtained with difficulty, or not at all. 
 
 Water and lighting. — Honolulu has an abundant supply of excellent 
 water — pure, free from limestone or alkali, soft, and adapted to all the 
 uses of the city. It is brought from reservoirs at the upper end of the 
 lovely Nuuanu Valley, and conveyed by pipes through the business 
 and principal residence districts. The city is lighted by electricity, 
 the power for the generation of which is derived from the reservoirs 
 referred to. Both the water and lighting systems are controlled by the 
 Government. 
 
 Coal. — Welsh or Australian coal of good quality can be obtained from 
 European firms. About 15,000 tons is the quantity generally kept in 
 stock. 
 
 Climate. — The climate of Honolulu is generally very pleasant and 
 healthful, especially when the northeast trade wind prevails, 
 southerly and southwesterly winds are called by the natives the 
 winds," because they are followed by small ailments, gastric maladies, 
 and intermittent fevers, as is the case with the sirocco in Europe. 
 
 The following table* gives meteorological observations taken at 
 Honolulu, 1876: 
 
 The 
 
 " sick 
 
 Months. 
 
 January . . 
 February . 
 
 March 
 
 April 
 
 May 
 
 June 
 
 July 
 
 August . . . 
 September 
 
 Mean thermometer. 
 
 Noon. 
 
 Midnight. 
 
 78 
 
 70 
 
 78 
 
 69 
 
 75 
 
 72 
 
 77 
 
 71 
 
 79 
 
 72 
 
 80 
 
 73 
 
 80 
 
 • . 75 
 
 811 
 
 75 
 
 81 
 
 75 
 
 Prevailing winds. 
 
 16 NE., force 8, maximum. 
 
 10 | NE., force 3, average. 
 15 S.. force 3, calm at night. 
 15 NE., force*, light at night. 
 
 11 I NE., force 4. 
 5 NE., force 3. 
 
 13 NE., calm at night. 
 15 NE. 
 5 NE., 21 days; SE., 9 days. 
 
 * Pacific islands. Sailing directions. Admiralty. 
 
24 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 The barometer generally falls below 30 during southerly winds. 
 
 Population. — Honolulu has a population of 23,000 or 24,000, of various 
 nationalities, consisting principally of whites, natives, Chinese, and 
 Portuguese. Of these the whites are the controlling element in com- 
 mercial, manufacturing, and general affairs, though there are several 
 business houses in the hands of the Chinese. The Portuguese are 
 chiefly engaged in manual labor. 
 
 The most intelligent class of Hawaiians are employed in government 
 or commercial positions; of the lower classes of the natives some are 
 laborers; others exist by fishing, farming, and various occupations. 
 
 Of the whites, Americans or those of American descent largely pre- 
 dominate in numbers and influence, though those of German and 
 British extraction are very prominent. 
 
 Horses, carriages, etc. — Hacks are very common in Honolulu. They 
 are stationed at the corners of all the main thoroughfares, and the fare 
 to any part of the city is 25 cents. The horses in use are said to be 
 superior to those of many large cities. There are four livery stables, 
 well equipped with saddle and carriage animals. 
 
 Hotels. — The Royal Hawaiian has accommodations for 150 guests, 
 electric lights, electric bells, water from artesian wells; Eagle hotel; 
 Arlington; Waikiki Villa, at Waikiki, 3 miles from Honolulu, connected 
 by tram cars from Honolulu. 
 
 Tram cars. — About 12 or 14 miles of tram-car lines exist. These cars 
 are drawn by mules or horses. The cars are of American make. 
 
 Telephones. — There is said to be an excellent system of telephonic 
 communication; two companies; rates low; 1,300 telephones in use. 
 
 Public buildings. — Iolani Palace, in King street, said to have cost 
 $500,000. 
 
 Aliiolani hall, the main Government building, in which the Legisla- 
 ture meets. 
 
 The Queen's hospital, intended for the relief of afflicted Hawaiians 
 of both sexes, gratis. 
 
 The opera house, seating capacity 1,000. 
 
 The Lunalilo home, a home for aged Hawaiians. 
 
 The insane asylum, from 50 to 75 inmates. 
 
 The Oahu jail. Prisoners are required to do road work and other 
 labor in and around Honolulu. 
 
 The fish market. 
 
 The Royal Mausoleum. 
 
 Honolulu Free Library, contains 10,000 volumes, on general subjects. 
 
 Young Men's Christian Association building. 
 
 Post office building. 
 
 Police station house for the reception of petty offenders. 
 
 Current publications. — Pacific Commercial Advertiser, frequency of 
 publication unknown. 
 
 The Hawaiian Gazette, a weekly publication. 
 
 The Kuokoa, a weekly publication. 
 
 The Bulletin, an evening daily. 
 
 Ka Leo, native, daily and weekly. 
 
 Holomua, native, weekly. 
 
 Elele, native, weekly. 
 
 Monthly publications. — The Friend, The Anglican Churchman, The 
 Planter's Monthly, The Paradise of the Pacific. 
 
 A Tourist's Guide is issued annually. 
 
 The Hawaiian Annual. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 25 
 
 The Hawaiian Gazette Publishing Company possesses a very com- 
 plete printing establishment. 
 
 Manufacturing. — Honolulu Iron Works, incorporated 1877. Number 
 of hands employed, usually about 200. This institution is said to be 
 equipped with excellent appliances in all its departments. 
 
 Honolulu Steam Bice Mills — Large quantities of rice milled for home 
 and foreign use. 
 
 Hawaiian Carriage Manufacturing Company. — Manufacture to order 
 and attend to all kinds of repairing; deal in and keep on hand wagon 
 makers' supplies. 
 
 Hopper's Planing Mill and Iron Works. — Extensive plant, said to 
 execute all kinds of work in wood and iron. 
 
 Enterprise Planing Mill. — Sash, doors, etc. 
 
 Lucas Bros. — Sash, doors, etc. 
 
 Hawaiian Gazette. — Bookbinding, etc. 
 
 Press Publishing Company. — Well equipped printing house. 
 
 Tahiti Lemonade Works. — For manufacture of all kinds of aerated 
 waters. 
 
 Another establishment of thcsame kind. 
 
 The usual number of blacksmith and wagqn shops, cooperages, etc. 
 
 Banking houses. — Bishop & Co.; Glaus Spreckles & Go., whose Cali- 
 fornia correspondent is the Anglo-California bank. 
 
 The mercantile houses are numerous. 
 
 CITIES OF OAHU (OTHER THAN HONOLULU). 
 
 Kanehoe, in the Kulau district, the principal place on its side of the 
 
 land, situated near Waialai harbor, just beneath the Pali, back of 
 Honolulu. No details of settlement. The climate here is cooler by a 
 few degrees than on the leeward side, and frequent showers keep up 
 the verdure. 
 
 Waiahia, a large village, lies at the northern end of the plain which 
 separates the two ranges of mountains. No details. 
 
 Waianae, nearly in the middle of the southwest coast of the island, 
 a village lying at the base of the mountains in a narrow valley, fertile 
 and cultivated. The shore here forms a small sandy bay, and on the 
 southern side, between two high rocky precipices, in a grove of cocoa- 
 nut trees, stands the village. 
 
 Pearl City, situated on the south side of the island, is a large, irregu- 
 larly-shaped lagoon or inlet, greatly cut up by projecting points and 
 islands. This is Puuloa River and Pearl Lochs, where the United 
 States Government has acquired certain rights.* On the west side of 
 the channel lies Puuloa village, in the neighborhood of which are large 
 salt works. Along the inshore side of the Pearl Lochs is a strip of 
 very fertile land of variable breadth, part of which is under cultivation j 
 behind the land rises gradually to the Ewa plain. 
 
 Pearl City is said ,to be one of the pleasantest spots on the island, 
 made accessible by the building of the Oahu Eailroad. It is situated 
 
 *In 1887 a treaty between Hawaii and the United States was made which agreed 
 that, on condition of the remission of duties on certain articles of Hawaiian produce, 
 the United States was ceded the exclusive right to establish and fortify a naval sta- 
 tion in the Hawaiian Islands. Pearl Harbor was designated as the station. 
 
 In 1889 an enlargement of the treaty provisions, so as to confer special advantages 
 upon both parties, was proposed by the United States. It was suggested that the 
 cession of a naval station be perpetual as well as exclusive. Another provision was 
 proposed, viz, to allow the United States to land troops in Hawaii whenever neces- 
 sary to preserve order. These provisions have not so far been taken advantage of by 
 the United States. 
 
26 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 in the midst of a highly productive and fertile district, 12 miles distant 
 from Honolulu, and is now a beautiful town, with an abundant supply 
 of pure artesian water, with wide streets, a substantial station, and 
 several modern residences already built, and with improvements going 
 on as rapidly as a large force of workmen can push them to completion. 
 
 The Oahu Land and Eailroad Company founded the town. 
 
 Water supply. — Pearl City is said to have facilities for supplying 
 10,000 inhabitants. There is now an artesian well which flows to a 
 height of 28 feet, and lias a capacity, when pumped, of 2,000,000 gallons 
 per day. The water from this well will be pumped into a reservoir 100 
 feet high, and be used to supply the peninsula. 
 
 There is another reservoir on the more elevated ground, 200 feet 
 above sea level, with a capacity of 1,500,000 gallons, which can be 
 increased to 16,000,000 as soon as necessary. This is supplied from 
 mountain streams. 
 
 Pearl City consists of 2,200 acres of land, which was owned in fee 
 simple by the Oahu Eailroad and Land Company, 18,000 acres adjoin- 
 ing which is held by the same company under a fifty-year lease, and is 
 being sublet for fruit-growing purposes'. Three companies have recently 
 been incorporated, two oft them with a capital of $30,000 each, and have 
 rented a choice portion of this land, which will be planted principally 
 in bananas and pineapples. 
 
 The 2,200 acres Which the town proper comprises, includes the whole 
 of the peninsula extending into the harbor, and the lots on the main- 
 land, the latter of which are on a gradual slope of land inclining toward 
 the mountains. 
 
 The site of Pearl City has long been a favorite spot where boating, 
 bathing, and fishing can be enjoyed under the most favorable circum- 
 stances. A good breeze is always blowing from the ocean. The tem- 
 perature of the water is perfect for bathing all the- year round.* 
 
 Diamond Hill. — About 3 J miles southeast of Honolulu; a signal 
 station for incoming vessels. 
 
 WaikiM. — A village lying about 1 mile northwest of Diamond Hill. 
 There is no anchorage in front of it. 
 
 Island of Hawaii. (Map D.) 
 
 In shape the island of Hawaii is a wide triangle, sides 85, 75, and 65 
 geographical miles. Almost the whole surface is a gentle slope from 
 one of the four volcanic mountains : Mauna Kea, on north, 13,805 feet, 
 the highest peak in the Pacific Ocean; Mauna Loa, on south, 13,600 
 feet; Mauna Hualalai, on west, 8,275 feet; and Mauna Kohala, on north- 
 west, 5,505 feet. The slopes on the west are so gentle that the base of 
 terminal cones may be reached on horseback. In the Mahukona dis- 
 trict the face of the country is regular, ascending gradually from coast 
 to summit of highland. 
 
 The plain lying between the mountains of Hawaii is many square 
 miles in extent. 
 
 Coast. — The south point of the island of Hawaii, called Ka Lae, is 
 very low, rising with a gentle slope to the hills behind. The southern 
 side of the island is much drier and the country more open and free 
 from forest than on the north, where, indeed, the forests are very dense. 
 
 From the south to Kumukahi, the east point of Hawaii, there are no 
 bays or good anchoi/ages.t The coast is exposed to wind and swell. 
 
 * Pacific Coast Commercial Record. t Ej lept the small bay at Kaalualu. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 27 
 
 From the east point almost to Hilo Bay the coast is precipitous, and 
 against it the sea continually beats with violence; thence for thirty 
 miles the shore is remarkable for the number of streams (85), running 
 at the bottom of ravines, 1,800 to 2,000 feet deep, which furrow the side 
 of Manna Kea and render travel along its coast very laborious. Ridges 
 between the ravines, terminating at the sea in precipices from 100 to 
 500 feet high, oblige the road to run inland. The northeastern coast is 
 very generally steep and rocky, though here and there are small bays or 
 breaks in the cliffs where the natives are able to land their canoes. 
 
 Upolu Point is the northern extremity of the island. Behind it lies 
 an extensive plain in good state of cultivation, rising gradually to the 
 foot of the mountains. 
 
 From the north point of the island the west coast is at first barren, 
 owing to want of rain; the face of the country is regular, ascending 
 gradually from the coast to the summit of highland in the interior. 
 From Kawaihe Bay to the village of Kailua there is no anchorage or 
 shelter. 
 
 Kealalcelcua Bay, where stands the monument to Capt. Cook, R. N., is 
 the best anchorage of the south coast; but south of it lies a rugged 
 lava covered shore, where large masses of rock, miles in extent, often 
 form perpendicular cliffs against which the sea beats with fury. 
 
 This formation extends half a mile into the interior, and as the dis- 
 tance from the sea increases the soil becomes richer and more productive. 
 The face of the country within this rocky barrier is rough and covered 
 with blocks of lava more or less decomposed, but at a distance of 2 
 miles from the coast begins to be well covered with woods of various 
 kinds, which are rendered almost impassable by an undergrowth of 
 vines and ferns. 
 
 The interior of the island of Hawaii is a strange blending of fertility 
 and desolation. In the valleys are often found regions of extraordinary 
 richness, that are reached only by crossing arid districts strewn with 
 rocks and bowlders, or overlaid by recent streams of lava still uncovered 
 by soil. 
 
 Barren wastes are succeeded by vegetation so dense as to be almost 
 impenetrable, or by pleasant grass lands lying near forests of the pecu- 
 liar koa tree, which is characteristic of this island. The trees in the 
 koa forests frequently grow close together from a soil carpeted with 
 long rich grass; they are large in size, of hard, dark wood, and were 
 formerly greatly used to make the canoes of the islanders. 
 
 The density of the forests is proportional to the amount of rainfall, 
 which, upon the windward side of Hawaii, is phenomenally great.* 
 
 On Hawaii is found a peculiar grass, said to have been brought to 
 the island by accident. In its green state it is hardly fit for pasture. 
 Cattle and horses eat it, but it apparently affords very little nourish- 
 ment, though more when cured. So dense and high is this grass that 
 it is difficult to ride through it. Another, and perhaps the best variety 
 of grass, comes from Mexico; it is called, locally, maniania grass, and 
 wherever it grows forms the richest and most velvety sward imagin- 
 able. It is highly nutritious and animals are very fond of it. 
 
 Such being the character of the interior of the island, roads are in 
 general bad, and communication difficult. 
 
 * Mnj. Dutton says that this may attain to more than 300 inches annually in the 
 nterior of Hawaii; 240 inches have heen measured at Hilo. 
 
28 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, HAWAII. 
 
 Hilo. — Hilo, or Byron Bay, on the northeast side of Hawaii, is the 
 only anchorage on the northeast coast; the bay is about 7£ miles wide 
 and 3 miles deep. It is fully exposed to the northeast, trade wind. 
 
 The scene which the island presents, as viewed from the anchorage 
 in Hilo Bay, is novel and beautiful; the shores are shielded with exten- 
 sive groves of cocoanut and bread fruit trees, interspersed with plan- 
 tations of sugar cane, through which numerous streams are seen hur- 
 rying to the ocean. To this belt succeeds a region some miles in width, 
 free from woods, but clothed in verdure, while beyond is a wider belt of 
 forest, whose trees, as they rise higher and higher from the sea, change 
 their character from the vegetation of the tropics to that of the polar 
 regions. Above all tower the snow-capped summits of the mountains.* 
 
 On the coast of the bay near Cocoanut Island lie the creek and vil- 
 lage of Whyeatea, where landing may be effected in all weathers. 
 There are two piers to the northward of the entrance of the creek, 
 alongside the northernmost of which ships drawing 15 feet of water can 
 lie. The shore then turns westward along a sandy beach for nearly 1 
 mile to the bottom of the bay, where the town of Hilo is situated. 
 
 Hilo is the principal town in Hawaii, and ranks next to Honolulu in 
 importance and population. The town may be easily recognized from 
 the seaward by the tall white square towers of the Eoman Catholic 
 church and the pointed white spire of the Protestant church. There are 
 also several other large buikliugs, both public and private, such as a 
 court-house, schools, governor's house, stores, etc. 
 
 There are several sugar plantations in the vicinity of Hilo on which 
 the town is mainly dependent for prosperity. 
 
 Besides sugar and molasses, Hilo exports hides, tallow, goatskins, 
 arrowroot, rice, and a small amount of coffee. 
 
 As before stated, the rainfall here is very great, and accounts for 
 the luxuriant verdure of the district. 
 
 The Hawaiian Government steam vessels communicate with Hilo from 
 Honolulu once a week, and schooners ply constantly between the two 
 ports. (See Communications and Appendix I.) 
 
 Supplies. — Supplies of nearly all descriptions can be obtained: Beef, 
 10 cents per pound; bread, about 9 cents, and vegetables at 6 cents. 
 
 A small pier has been built in front of the town, but in 1888 the sand 
 had washed up and closed it as a landing place. The only landing 
 place is at Whyeatea. 
 
 Close to the west of the town is Waterfall Creek, the mouth of 
 W T ailuku Kiver, and about 2 miles from the entrance is Cocoanut Point. 
 There is a good watering place up this creek which is generally easy of 
 access, except when the wind is blowing hard from seaward; on such 
 occasions the surf is high, and the rocky bar at the entrance becomes 
 dangerous for boats to pass. The water is excellent and abundant. 
 
 Hilo Bay is a safe anchorage, and next to Honolulu may be con- 
 sidered the best in the Hawaiian Islands. With a strong trade wind 
 there is a slight sea, unpleasant enough for boats but not sufficient to 
 endanger the safety of a ship. The westerly wind, which is felt most, 
 seldom blows strongly. 
 
 A well- sheltered anchorage can be picked up anywhere under the 
 lee of Blonde Beef in from 5 to 7 fathoms. A vessel drawing 15 feet or 
 
 * Pacific Islands, Vol. n, Hydro-graphic Office. Admiralty. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 29 
 
 less may anchor so as to be quite under the lee of Cocoanut Island and 
 Keo Kea Point. 
 
 MahuTcona. — A small village with anchorage off it about 6 miles south 
 of Upolii Point. The place is becoming important, through the energy 
 of a Mr. Wilder, who has made a most convenient landing place, and 
 constructed a railway 15 miles long to bring sugar from the Kohala 
 district round the north end of the island. 
 
 The cargo boats lay along the side of the pier and are laden and 
 cleared very quickly by means of a steam " crab "which works a truck 
 up and down the incline. 
 
 There is no water in the place. All the fresh water has to be brought 
 from Kohala by train. An attempt to obtain artesian water failed. 
 
 The anchorage is indifferent, and with winds to the westward of 
 north or south would be untenable. Freight is disembarked and ship- 
 ped at night, during the greater part of the year. 
 
 The soil along the shore is barren for 3 or 4 miles inland owing to 
 the want of rain. The face of the country is regular, ascending grad- 
 ally from the coast to the summit of the high land. 
 
 Kawaihae village is situated in a grove of cocoanut trees, just behind 
 a sandy point near the center of the bay of the same name. The vil- 
 lage consists (1891) of a general store, 2 or 3 houses, and several 
 huts along the shore. In front of the village is a pier for boats. 
 
 So much of the soil of this district as lies along the coast, though 
 rich, is badly watered; 7 or 8 miles inland from Kawaihae Bay it 
 becomes exceedingly rocky and barren. 
 
 The climate is upon the whole unpleasant, especially at Waimea, 
 about 9 miles eastward of Kawaihae, in consequence of the exceed- 
 ingly strong trade wind, which brings with it a mist toward sunset. 
 This wind rushes furiously down between the mountains which bound 
 the valley of Waimea and becomes very dangerous to the shipping in 
 the bay. It is called by the natives mumulm, and is foretold by an 
 illuminated streak seen far inland, believed to be caused by the reflec- 
 tion of the twilight on the mist that always accompanies the mumuku. 
 
 The principal exports of the district are hides, tallow, and beef. 
 
 On approaching the anchorage a good landmark is a conspicuous 
 mound situated a short distance south of the village. Another con- 
 spicuous landmark is a white tomb in the form of a pyramid. 
 
 There is a coral reef in front of the village, but a boat passage exists 
 around the north end and close to the shore, where landing is easy. 
 
 With strong westerly winds the anchorage would be very exposed 
 and unsafe. The sea breeze from the westward lasts all day, and the 
 northeast trade or land breeze sometimes blows strong all night. 
 
 Supplies. — Beef may be obtained here at 6 cents a pound ; potatoes are 
 abundant, and plenty of fish may be caught with the seine. 
 
 The watering place, which is in a small sandy bay, is only a pool of 
 rain water collected in a hole, and would require 500 feet of hose to 
 pump into a boat. In the summer the water becomes somewhat stag- 
 nant and unfit for drinking j in winter more rain falls, and it then 
 becomes a stream. 
 
 Settlement — Kailua Bay. — The bay affords a good anchorage at most 
 seasons of the year. (In 1841 the residence of the governor of Hawaii 
 Island was established here, and great advances were being made in the 
 civilized arts and industries.) There is a most convenient landing place 
 on a sandy beach on the west side of the bay, formed by the jutting out 
 of two points, between which is a small cove protected from the surf by 
 rocks. 
 
30 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Kain seldom falls here except in showers, and a rainy day once in the 
 year is looked upon as remarkable. This, together with the absence of 
 all dew, prevents the existence of much cultivation. There grows, 
 nevertheless, a coarse vegetation sufficient to pasture a few hundred 
 goats, and a mile back from the shore the surface is covered with herb- 
 age which maintains cattle, etc. ; 2 miles in the interior there is suffi- 
 cient moisture to keep up a constant verdure. 
 
 The temperature is mild and equable. During the winter the ther- 
 mometer ranges from 64° to 85°; summer, 68° to 86°. 
 
 The prevailing winds are the land and sea breezes, which are very 
 regular ; the most severe gales are those from the southwest, which last 
 from a few hours to two or three days, and render anchorage unsafe. 
 
 On approaching Kailua Bay, the town may be recognized by the 2 
 churches and the cocoanut groves on the shore to the westward. 
 
 There is a most convenient landing place, as noted above. 
 
 Kona. — Settlement near Kealakekua Bay, situated west side Hawaii; 
 best anchorage on that coast. Climate mild, 62° to 76° in winter, 70° 
 to 86° in summer. Strong winds are seldom felt. During day, cool 
 sea breeze; during night, land breeze. It was at Kealakekua Bay that 
 Capt. Cook was killed (1779). On west of Kanwalda Cove is a village 
 of same name, where the monument to Cook now stands. The shore 
 all around the bay is rocky, making landing dangerous when there is 
 a swell setting in, except at Kealakekua village. Here there is a fine 
 sandy beach, with burying place at one extremity and a small well of 
 fresh water at the other. The bay is easy of access ; but anchorage is 
 not good, owing to the great depth of water and foul bottom. Kan- 
 walda Cove, though exposed to winds south and southwest, may be con- 
 sidered safe anchorage, except in winter. 
 
 Kona is a village a few miles inland, and is considered one of the 
 most healthy spots in the whole group, and especially beneficial to peo- 
 ple suffering from weakness or disease of lungs or chest. It is said 
 that many visitors come here from California to pass the winter, and 
 there are one or two commodious boarding houses for their accommo- 
 dation. 
 
 From the landing place, about half a cable southwest of Cook's mon- 
 ument, there is a good road leading to Kona. 
 
 Supplies. — Beef, fowls, sweet potatoes, and plantains can be obtained 
 in Kealakekua; also water at Napupu, a village south of Kealakekua; 
 but the tank is falling to decay, and the water is brackish in all wells 
 in the vicinity of Kanwalda Cove. 
 
 Island of Maui. (Map E.) 
 
 The island of Maui lies northwest of Hawaii. The channel which 
 separates them has a width of 28 miles. 
 
 The island is 48 miles long in a west-by-north and east-by-south direc- 
 tion; it is divided into two oval-shaped peninsulas, connected by a low 
 isthmus 6 miles across, and only a few feet higher than the beach. 
 
 The whole island, which is volcanic, was probably produced by the 
 action of the two adjacent volcanoes. 
 
 Coast. — The southwest point of Maui, Cape Hanamanioa, is formed 
 by rugged, craggy rocks. From here along the coast 25 miles to 
 Alau islet the whole shore is rugged and offers no anchorage or 
 shelter. From seaward the land appears to ascend abruptly; it is 
 densely covered with trees and vegetation, while here and there a few 
 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 31 
 
 habitations appear. Alau islet, lying off the east coast of Maui, is very 
 small. Kauiki head, the eastern point of Maui, is an old crater which 
 is connected by a low spit to the mainland, and at a distance appears 
 like an island. 
 
 Near this, peninsula lies Hana harbor, from Avhich a coast that affords 
 no shelter extends for 31 miles. 
 
 The north coast of East Maui is a succession of deep ravines, which 
 
 gradually diminish in breadth as they ascend, and are finally lost in 
 
 ,the flanks of the mountains; traveling along the coast, in consequence, 
 
 becomes almost impossible. Cascades several hundred feet in height, 
 
 but having little volume of water, are seen falling into these ravines. 
 
 The east coast of West Maui is an abrupt precipice several hundred 
 feet in height, terminating at Kahakuloa Point, the northern extremity 
 of the island. The southern side of West Maui has a forbidding appear- 
 ance. Tue shores, however, are not so steep and rocky as elsewhere, 
 and have generally a sandy beach. 
 
 Off Makena, near the southwest extremity of the island, lies a small 
 baneu islet called Molokini, only visited by fishermen who dry their 
 nets on its barren surface. 
 
 Interior. — The eastern peninsula of Maui, the larger of the two, is 
 lofty; but though the mountains are often seen above the clouds, they 
 are never covered with snow. 
 
 East Maui rises in an unbroken mountain. 
 
 East Maui, although mountainous, has much cultivated land; and 
 the rich volcanic soil of the Kula district, on the southwest side of the 
 island, raises abundant crops of potatoes. Wheat and other grains 
 are also cultivated. 
 
 West Maui has many sharp peaks and ridges, which are divided by 
 deep valleys, descending towards the sea, and opening out into sloping 
 plains of considerable extent in the north and south sides. 
 
 The highest peak of West Maui is Mauna Ika, 6,130 feet. 
 
 The connecting isthmus Consists of sand, which is constantly shift- 
 ing and w thrown up in dunes; this region is naturally dry, but dur- 
 ing nine months of the year affords fine grazing, feeding large herds 
 of cattle that are mostly owned by foreigners. 
 
 The productions of Maui are those of the other islands, with the 
 addition of a few fruits, such as grapes, etc. 
 
 The highest point of Maui, named Kolakole, is 10,030 feet above the 
 sea. It is destitute of trees to the height of about 2,000 feet; then 
 succeeds a belt of forest to the height of about 6,500 feet, and again 
 the summit is bare. 
 
 The crater of Haleakala is a deep gorge, open at the north and east, 
 forming a kind of elbow. The inside is entirely bare of vegetation. 
 The natives have no tradition of an eruption. 
 
 Though arid and sandy in appearance, the soil of the isthmus con- 
 necting the two parts of the island is good, deep, and exceedingly fertile 
 where irrigation has been introduced. At Spreckelsville, in the north- 
 ern part of the peninsula, lie the largest sugar estates of the island. 
 
 CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, MAUI. 
 
 Hana Harbor. — The anchorage is well protected from the wind and 
 sea, and is very convenient. There is a town here. Details unknown. 
 
 Kahului Harbor. — Situated between the coral reefs on the northern 
 side of the low isthmus joining the two peninsulas. Channels about 
 3£ cables wide, 4 cables deep, fully exposed to the northward. 
 
32 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Kalmlui. — An important place for exporting the produce of the north- 
 ern part of Maui y there are railways connecting it with Wailu'ui to 
 the westward, and Spreckelsville and Haiku on the east. {Set Oom= 
 inunications.) 
 
 There was being built in 1881, out from the shore near the custom- 
 house, a jetty which it was proposed to extend as far as the edge of 
 the reef. 
 
 Anchorage may be obtained in from 2£ to 7 fathoms. 
 
 WailuJcu. — A flourishing village about 2 miles northwest of Kahu- 
 lui. Here there is a female seminary occupying an extensive range 
 of coral buildings, beautifully situated on an inclined plane, with high 
 precipices behind. It is considered one of the best organized establish- 
 ments in the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 Lahaina. — A town situated on the west side of West Maui, and at 
 one time a flourishing place much frequented by whaling vessels for 
 refitting and for obtaining supplies, but now only visited by vessels 
 loading with sugar, which is grown on the estates in the vicinity. 
 
 The town is built along the beach for a distance of three-fourths of 
 a mile. It is principally composed of grass houses situated as near 
 the beach as possible. It has one principal street, with a few others 
 at right angles to it. From seaward the town may be recognized by 
 some conspicuous buildings, especially Government House, which is 
 near the beach and has a tall flagstaff before it. The seminary of 
 Lahaiualuna is situated on the side of the mountain above the town. 
 
 Off the town there is an open roadstead which is completely shel- 
 tered from the trade wind by the high land of Maui, but the holding 
 ground is reported indifferent. 
 
 Supplies. — Supplies of all sorts can be obtained here — beef, vegeta- 
 bles, fruit, and water in abundance. 
 
 Landing. — The landing place is at a small pier, extending from the 
 light-house, and protected by a breakwater. 
 
 The tide is irregular, generally running northwest sixteen hours out 
 of the twenty-four. 
 
 Patoa. — A roadstead (so called by Vancouver) situated on the south- 
 ern side of West Maui. " The anchorage at Patoa is abreast of the 
 easternmost of these valleys, which appeared fruitful and well culti- 
 vated." 
 
 Kamalalaea Bay settlements. — The bay is on the west side of Maui, 
 lying between two peninsulas, the western side formed by rocky cliffs 
 and precipices. Nearly in the middle of this side is a village called 
 Mackerrey, off which is an anchorage in 7 fathoms. No details known. 
 
 Maalaea. — Near the head of Kamalalaea Bay, in the northeast cor- 
 ner, is the small village of Maalaea. Here there are some houses for 
 storing sugar. Besides sugar there is a great quantity of wheat, 
 maize, and potatoes grown in this district, and supplies of fresh pro- 
 visions are obtained in plenty from Wailuku, which is about 6 miles 
 distant. 
 
 The anchorage off this place is not good, as the trade wind blows 
 across the low isthmus in heavy gusts, and communication with the 
 shore by boats is sometimes interrupted. 
 
 There is a small pier here for loading schooners and boats can 
 always go alongside, the channel leading to the landing place being 
 #bout 20 yards wide, between two coral reefs. 
 
 Makena, or Malcees Landing. — A small indentation in the west coast 
 of East Maui, near the southwestern extremity of the island. It 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 33 
 
 derives the latter name from a planter whose estate is situated on the 
 side of Manna Haleakala, on a plateau 2,000 feet above the sea and 
 about 5 miles east of the landing place. Near the landing are a stone 
 church and several Rouses. The anchorage is exposed to the heavy 
 squalls which occasionally blow over the low isthmus in the center of 
 Maui, and landing is at times impracticable for ships' boats owing to 
 the heavy surf. The holding ground is not good. 
 
 Island of Kauai. (Map F.) 
 
 Kauai lies 64 miles west by north of Oalm, and is separated from it 
 by the Kaieie Walio channel. This island is of volcanic formation, 
 somewhat circular in shape, 25 miles long and 22 miles wide, and rises 
 in the center to a peak 5,000 feet in height. 
 
 Coast. — From the seaward the northeast and northwest sides appear 
 broken and rugged, but to the south the laud is more even; the hills 
 rise with a gentle slope from the shore, and at some distance back are 
 covered with woods. 
 
 The southern point of the island is a bold, barren, rocky headland, 
 falling perpendicularly into the sea. 
 
 Ninini Point, north point of Nawiliwili Harbor, is low, level, grassy 
 laud, sprinkled with volcanic bowlders extending from a range of low 
 hills that stretch along the coast at a short distance from the beach, 
 which extends northward to Wailua. 
 
 Along the coast from Wailua sugar cane appears to be cultivated in 
 large quantities, especially in the vicinity of Wailua and Kanala Point, 
 where there are several factories. 
 
 From this point to Hanalei Bay are several small villages scattered 
 along the coast near the mouths of mountain streams which are closed 
 by sand bars. The land near the sea is flat and very fertile, but soon 
 rises to the mountains behind. The rivers as well as the sea abound 
 in fish. 
 
 The northwest coast of Kauai, forming the district Na Pali, has a 
 very rugged appearance, rising to lofty abrupt cliffs that jut out into 
 a variety of steep rocky points destitute of both soil and verdure, but 
 terminating nearly in uniform even summits, on which, in the valleys 
 or chasms between them, are several patches of green. Here and 
 there a stream running from the lofty mountains behind finds its way 
 to the ocean. 
 
 Mana Point, the western extremity of Kauai, is along, low sand spit, 
 commencing at the foot of a high range of mountains, and from it a 
 sandy plain extends to the town of Waimea. This plain is from <* 
 quarter to a mile wide and 150 feet above the sea, whence it rises grad- 
 ually to the mountains. 
 
 It has a sunburnt appearance and is destitute of trees, except on the 
 low grounds where the cocoanut thrives. The sea here abounds in fish. 
 Between Waimea and Kaloa Bay, the south point of Kauai, extends a 
 series of sunburnt hills and barren plains, sloping gradually to the 
 shore from the mountains, and here and there intersected by ravines. 
 There is no cultivation, and the soil only produces a kind of coarse 
 grass quite unfit for pasture. 
 
 Interior. — The island of Kauai is considered one of the most pleasant 
 of the group. Portions of it appear better adapted to agriculture than 
 the other islands, and the coffee and sugar plantations on the weather 
 
 g f Bep, 227 ? 
 
34 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 side, which is well watered with streams and by frequent rains, ard 
 very productive j but the lee side is dry and adapted to cultivation^ 
 only in valleys. 
 
 CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, KAUAI. 
 
 Wawiliwili Bay village. — The harbor of Nawiliwili is a small cove on] 
 the southeast side of the island, at the head of a bay of this nainel 
 The greater part of the harbor is blocked by shoals and reefs. 
 
 At Nawiliwili Bay is a large village; the soil in the vicinity is richj 
 producing sugar cane, taro, beans, sweet potatoes, etc. 
 
 There is a small pier in the northwest corner of the harbor, wherec 
 landing may be easily effected; but the pier should be approached with 
 caution, as a reef extends from the shore to the southward of it fon 
 two cables in an easterly direction. 
 
 The local mail steamer runs to this point. (See Communications.) i 
 
 Wailua. — Formerly a place of some importance, 5 J miles from Kiirini 
 Point, situated on a small river of the same name, in a barren sandjl 
 spot, surrounded by an extremely fertile district. The river, in com moil 
 with the others along this coast, is closed at the mouth with sand barsj 
 but inside is deep and navigable by canoes for several miles. 
 
 Coast villages. — From Kanala Point, north and west, 14 miles to 
 Hanalei Bay, there are several small villages scattered along the coastj 
 near the mouth of mountain streams closed by sand bars. 
 
 Hanalei. — Situated near the bottom of a bay of this name. 
 
 Anchorage ground in the bay is spacious in tine weather, but there il 
 only room for about three vessels in bad weather under the lee of tha 
 reef near the eastern point of the bay. 
 
 A landing is generally effected inside the mouth of the river. 
 
 Supplies. — Supplies are plentiful — beef, vegetables, and fruits may bd 
 obtained in abundance. Water may be procured by sending boats inta 
 the river, which is easy of access iu fine weather, and a short distance! 
 from the mouth the water is perfectly fresh. The town is very picturj 
 esquely placed; the mountains rise to a height of from 3,000 to 4,000j 
 feet, and are clothed with verdure from base to summit, with numeroua 
 rills running down their precipitous sides. 
 
 In front of the town is a good beach where great quantities of fish 
 may be caught with a seine. 
 
 The district derives its name from the numerous rainbows formed byj 
 passing showers. The rains are so frequent as to clothe the country iil 
 perpetual green. 
 
 On the eastern side of the entrance is a conspicuous dark bluff-head^ 
 with two sandy beaches a short distance to the eastward. 
 
 A little way to the southward of this bluff is the mouth of a small 
 river, in front of which is a bar that may be crossed by boats at half 
 flood; inside, the bar carries a depth of from one to three quarter! 
 of a fathom and is navigable for several miles for boats drawing 3 
 feet. About 4 cables from the mouth of the river, on the northern 
 bank, is a large farm, called u Charlton farm," owned by the Englisfl 
 consul, who keeps a large number of cattle of good breed. 
 
 Waimea village. — Situated on Waimea Bay, southwest coast, placed! 
 at the mouth of river of the same name, which runs about 15 milel 
 inland. At one time a populous native town, but now (1891) only! 
 small village of little importance. It contains a church. 
 
 Boats may ascend the river for about three-quarters of a mile; thid 
 is the only water here that is not brackish. A little to the eastward 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 35 
 
 of the village a shoal projects. The trade winds, deflected by the 
 mountains, often raise a surf which renders landing at times very 
 unpleasant, sometimes impracticable. 
 
 Waimea Bay should be approached with caution, as reefs extend to 
 the southward. There is a railroad from Waimea to Kekaha. No 
 details known. 
 
 Kaloa Bay village. — About 1 mile west of the south point of Kauai 
 is a slight indentation of the coast, where there is a considerable vil- 
 lage called Kaloa, off which anchorage may be obtained but in a very 
 exposed position. 
 
 The country around the village of Kaloa is much broken by hills 
 and inactive craters; but the soil is good, though dry and very stony, 
 and is capable of cultivation in many places. There is a sugar planta- 
 tion here, and there are several large cattle ranches in the vicinity. 
 
 The village may be recognized by many high buildings and two 
 churches; it extends from the beach to a distance of 2 miles up the 
 slope of a hill. Between the village and Makanuena, the southern 
 extremity of the island, there is a low point running out into a rocky 
 ledge that somewhat protects the anchorage. 
 
 There is a good landing place at Kaloa, in a small cove protected by 
 a reef extending about 1 cable from shore; an artificial creek has been 
 made at the head of this cove, with sufficient space for one boat to enter. 
 
 Supplies. — Supplies of beef, vegetables, and fruit may be obtained in 
 abundance. 
 
 Island of Molokai. (Chart B.) 
 
 Molokai is situated north of Lanai, from which it is separated by 
 Pailolo Channel, 6J miles wide. 
 
 It is apparently formed by a chain of volcanic mountains about 40 
 miles long and 7 miles broad. The mountains are high and broken by 
 deep ravines and water courses ; the sides are clothed with verdure and 
 ornamented with shrubs and trees. , 
 
 Coast. — Lae o Ka Laau, the southwest extremity of Molokai, is a 
 low black point. On the south side of the island are several small 
 harbors, the best of which is Kaunakakai, midway between the two 
 extremes. 
 
 From this point to the southeast extremity of the island the distance 
 by the coast is about 21 miles, thence northward to Kalaua, the north- 
 east point, about 2 miles. 
 
 Some 16 miles from Kalaua, and on a peninsula projecting about 2 
 miles into the sea, is placed the leper settlement of the Hawaiian 
 Islands. 
 
 Interior. — One-third of the island of Molokai, towards the west end, 
 is a barren waste not susceptible of cultivation, except in the rainy sea- 
 son. It has in consequence but few inhabitants, who are engaged 
 mostly in fishing. 
 
 The eastern two-thirds is almost one entire mountain, rising gradu- 
 ally from the south until it attains an elevation of 2,500 feet, while on 
 the north it is almost perpendicular. On the south side there is a 
 narrow strip of land not exceeding a quarter of a mile in width, where 
 dwell the greater part of the population. The soil is very rich, but 
 owing to the want of moisture few plants will thrive even here. Resort 
 is therefore bad to the uplands, which are found to be susceptible of 
 the highest degree of cultivation. 
 
36 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, MOLOKAI. 
 
 Kaundkakai. — A town or village situated on the south side of Molokai, 
 midway between the extremes. There are outer and inner anchorages: 
 former not good, latter limited. 
 
 No supplies are to be obtained at Kaunakakai. No details of town 
 known. 
 
 Kalanao. — Situated near the center of the north coast of Molokai, at 
 the base of very precipitous mountains. The leper establishment was 
 erected here about 1865. The anchorage is to the southward of a low 
 point, extending from the foot of two remarkable, steep mountains. 
 It can not be considered safe, being exposed to a heavy swell ; landing 
 at Kalanao, always difficult, is at times dangerous. 
 
 Supplies. — No supplies can be obtained. 
 
 Island of Lanai, or Ranai. (Chart B.) 
 
 Lies 16 miles northwest of Kahulaui, and is separated from West 
 Maui by Auau Channel, 7J miles wide. Lanai is a dome-shaped island, 
 about 17 miles long and 9 miles broad. Large fissures are visible on its 
 sides. 
 
 The center of this island is much more elevated than Kahulaui, but 
 is neither so high nor so broken as any of the other islands. 
 
 Great part of it is barren, and the island in general suffers much 
 from the long droughts which prevail. The ravines and glens, not- 
 withstanding, are filled with thickets of small trees. 
 
 The island is volcanic; the soil shallow and by no means fertile. The 
 shores abound with shellfish. 
 
 Sheep in large numbers, it is said, are pastured here. 
 
 CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, LANAI. 
 
 No towns noted ; probably none exist. 
 
 Island of Niihau. (Chart B.) 
 
 The island lies 17 miles west-southwest of Kauai, from which it is 
 separated by Kumukahi Channel. It is about 20 miles long by 7 miles 
 broad. 
 
 This island is mostly lowland, except on the eastern side, where it 
 rises directly from the sea to a height of 1,500 feet, and is rocky and 
 unfit for cultivation. On the western side is a level plain from 2 to 4 
 miles wide, where the natives cultivate yams, fruits, sweet potatoes, etc. 
 The soil being dry, the yams grow to great size. The* natives are few 
 in number and very poor; they live almost entirely on the western side 
 of the island. 
 
 Of late years Niihau has been used as a sheep run, and in 1875 there 
 were said to be about 70,000 sheep on the island. 
 
 The eastern shore of Niihau is rocky and wholly destitute of shelter, 
 but on the western shore there are several open roadsteads. 
 
 CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, NIIHAU. 
 
 Tarn Bay. — An open roadstead about a mile and a half south of Kona 
 .{Point, where, in fine weather, anchorage may be obtained, There :~ 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 37 
 
 only one place in the bay where boats can effect a landing in safety 
 when the sea sets in, a common occurrence; this is on the western side 
 behind a small reef of rocks that lies a little way off the beach; even 
 here it is necessary to guard against sunken rocks. No inhabitants 
 noted. 
 
 Cook anchorage. — On the southwest of Niihau, about 4 miles south of 
 Kona Point; is exposed to the heavy northwesterly swell; the bottom 
 is composed of large rocks, with patches of sand. 
 
 Near the beach are a few huts, a church, and a derrick for loading 
 and unloading boats. 
 
 Landing. — The landing place is protected by some rocks forming a 
 breakwater in the northeast part of the bay, and is situated just inside 
 a lava patch which from seaward appears like a point. Landing can 
 be effected easily in moderate weather, but with a heavy swell it is 
 impracticable. 
 
 Supplies. — Whalers call here occasionally for fresh meat, but the 
 sheep being bred for wool only, very little meat can be procured ; and 
 only a limited quantity of vegetables and fruit. 
 
 Fresh water can only be procured during the rainy season, when the 
 water courses are full; at other times of the year there is no water but 
 what the natives have collected in wells in the rock for their own use; 
 these wells are chiefly near the south end of the island. 
 
 Caution. — As the rollers set in with but little warning at Cook anchor- 
 age, sailing vessels should proceed to sea on first indications of them. 
 These rollers generally last from three to four days. 
 
 Island of Kahulaui. (Chart B.) 
 
 Called also Tahurowa, separated from East Maui by Alalakeiki Chan- 
 nel, 6 miles wide, is about 11 miles in length and 8 miles wide. 
 
 It is low and almost destitute of every kind of shrub or verdure, 
 excepting a species of coarse grass. The rocks of which it is formed 
 are volcanic, but nothing is known of any active or extinct craters on 
 the island. 
 
 Atone time this island was used as a penal settlement; but it is 
 now chiefly used as a sheep run, the soil of decomposed lava being of 
 too poor a quality for cultivation. 
 
 CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, KAHULAUI. 
 
 No towns noted; probably none exist. 
 
 Island of Kaula. (Chart B.) 
 
 This island, called also Tahura, lies 17 miles southwest one-half west 
 from Niihau. It is a small, elevated, barreu rock, destitute of vegeta- 
 tion, and uninhabited. It is visited to collect the eggs of sea birds, 
 which abound. 
 
 Island of Lenua. (Chart B.) 
 
 Lenua, or Egg Island, lies off the north point of Niihau. It is a 
 small, rugged, barren rock, apparently destitute ot soil and without 
 sign of habitation. 
 
38 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Island of Molokinl (Chart E. ) 
 
 A small islet of the island of Maui, which see. 
 
 Communications of the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 railroads. 
 
 There are, according to the Statesman's Year Book for 1893, 56 miles 
 of railway in the islands of Hawaii, Maui, and Oahu. These roads 
 were built principally for the transportation of products from the interior 
 to the seaports. 
 
 RAILROADS OF OAHU. 
 
 Oahu Railroad. —This line extends from Honolulu, 19 miles, to Ewa 
 plantation ; passing around Pearl Lochs, with a branch along the pen- 
 insula to Pearl City, and a spur extending into a quarry at Palama. 
 Eoadbed good. It is proposed to run the railroad completely around 
 the island. 
 
 Depots. — There is an excellent depot at Honolulu; also turntable. 
 Stations, with suitable houses, at intervals along the line. A fine depot, 
 also turntable, exists at Pearl City. 
 
 Wharfage. — The company's wharf at Honolulu is 60 feet wide and 
 200 feet long and is ample for present needs. Products can be unloaded 
 directly from cars to vessels and vice versa. 
 
 Rolling stoclc, etc. — The rolling stock and equipments are of the most 
 approved and modern style. 
 
 At the port of Waianae, in northwest portion of Oahu, there are sev- 
 eral small railroads, in all about 4 or 5 miles, branching to plantations 
 in the interior and along the coast. About these there are, however, 
 no obtainable data. 
 
 RAILROADS OF HAWAII. 
 
 In Hawaii, from Mahukona to the Kohola district, some 15 miles of 
 railroad exist. 
 
 RAILROADS OF MAUI. 
 
 In the island Maui a little railway of very narrow gauge now con- 
 nects Wailuku and Kaluilui. The railway also extends 3 miles further 
 eastward to the sugar mills of the great plantation of Sprecklesville, in 
 all 13 miles. 
 
 (The distances between these places are given from the overland dis- 
 tance tables in the Hawaiian Annual for 1893.) 
 
 Data concerning gauge, quantity of rolling stock, etc., as well as reli- 
 able maps, are at present unobtainable. 
 
 RAILROADS OF KAUI. 
 
 On the island of Kani there is (according to the Hydrographic Office 
 chart of Waimea Bay) a railroad from Waimea village to Kekaha. No 
 details known. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 39 
 
 ROADS. 
 
 There are a few well- constructed roads on the Island of Oahu, leading 
 from Honolulu to places of interest to tourists ; but in general the roads 
 on the island are not good, being frequently heavy with sand and 
 muddy in wet districts. No positive information obtainable. 
 
 TELEGRAPHS. 
 
 There are telegraphs round the island of Oahu as well as in Hawaii 
 and Maui. Oahu and Hawaii are connected by telegraphic cable. 
 Total length of telegraphs, 250 miles. 
 
 TELEPHONES. 
 
 Telephones are in general use in Honolulu and probably elsewhere 
 on the islands. 
 
 POSTAL SERVICE. 
 
 For Hawaiian Islands postal service and post-offices. 
 
 INTER-ISLAND STEAMERS AND VESSELS. 
 
 There are 22 coasting steamers plying between the ports of the island, 
 of which 9 belong the Inter-Island Steam Navigation Company, 7 to 
 the Wilder Steamship Company, and the remainder to various private 
 owners. 
 
 There are also 25 sailing vessels belonging to various firms and owners. 
 
 There are, besides, 2 steam and 6 sailing merchantmen and traders 
 of Hawaiian register plying between the islands and foreign ports. 
 
 LEPROSY. 
 
 In his report to the Hawaiian legislative assembly of 1884, the presi- 
 dent of the board of health makes the assertion that " Hawaii has to 
 meet a calamity of widespread disease. * * At least 2 per cent 
 of her entire native population is attacked by a fearful and supposed 
 incurable malady [leprosy], of an exceptional character, that demands 
 separation and isolation." In the same report it is shown that the 
 appropriation of $90,000, for the segregation and care of lepers, voted 
 in 1882, for the biennial period closing March 31, 1884, had fallen short 
 of the demands upon the health authorities. The Hawaiian law has 
 provided for the strict segregation of lepers since 1865, and the district 
 of Kalawao on Molokai, a territory of about 5,000 acres, was selected 
 at that time for the leper settlement. 
 
 It is asserted that up to 1882 at least, the law requiring segregation 
 was not carried out with vigor, but it is shown that under the partial 
 enforcement of the law during sixteen years prior to June 1, 1882, 
 2,602 cases, an average of 162-62 cases per year, had been sent to the 
 
40 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 leper settlement. The biennial report of the president of the board of 
 health for 1890 states that "the work of collecting and segregating 
 lepers had been carried on with firmness and impartiality, and that the 
 number of lepers collected and sent to Molokai for the biennial period 
 closing March 31, 1890, was 798. Of these 2 were of British and 2 
 were of American birth." The report shows that $331,057.80 was 
 expended by the board of health during the biennial period, and it is 
 asserted u that the maintenance of the leper establishment is the almost 
 bottomless pit into which more than three-fourths of the money appro- 
 priated is cast. 7 ' 
 
 It is hopefully claimed, however, "that its requirements are on the 
 wane, and judging from the most reliable information obtainable there 
 are but very few undoubted cases of leprosy now at large in the country, 
 and they will come under the care of the board as rapidly as it is pos- 
 sible to get control of them." In proof of this it is stated that on the 
 31st of March, 1888, it was estimated that there were then at large 
 throughout the Kingdom 644 lepers, while at the date of the report 
 under consideration, March 31, 1890, "according to the best informa- 
 tion obtainable, there are * * * about 100 persons supposed to be 
 affected by the disease still at large who have not been before the 
 examining board." The reasons why these suspected lepers have not 
 been examined are stated to be that some very bad and unmistakable 
 cases are hiding in fastnesses of the mountains, while some mild cases 
 change their residence so often as to baffle the efforts of the officers of 
 the law for their arrest. 
 
 In regard to the contagious character of the disease and the precau- 
 tions necessary to be taken it is claimed by Surg. Tyron, U. S. 
 Navy,* that the spread of the disease in the Hawaiian Islands is due, 
 or was due at that time, 1883, to the general belief that "the disease 
 is only slightly contagious, and its treatment as such from the begin- 
 ning, allowing free individual intercourse, with weak enforcement of 
 the laws for its suppression." 
 
 That leprosy has not always been regarded by the authorities of the 
 Hawaiian Islands as eminently contagious is shown by the following 
 extracts from the report of the president of the board of health to the 
 legislative assembly of 1884. He says: "Such a characterization is 
 entirely uncalled for, is not warranted by experienced medical opinion, 
 and the violent and hasty segregation which it would inspire is a wrong 
 to a suffering community." "The confirmed leper should be separated 
 from the community, but there should be no alarm in consequence of 
 the temporary presence in the street of a leper, or on account of any 
 ordinary intercourse with a sufferer from the disease." 
 
 On the other hand the report of the board of health for 1890 declares 
 in the most emphatic manner that "complete, thorough, and absolute 
 segregation offers the only safeguard" against the ravages of leprosy. 
 The same report asserts that if, from the time when leprosy was first 
 recognized as an established fact in the islands, the policy of absolute 
 segregation had been firmly decided upon and unflinchingly pursued, 
 * # # Hawaii would be as free from leprosy to-day as any civilized 
 nation." The report concludes with the hopeful words: "It is safe to 
 say that if we do not relax our efforts we have seen the worst of lep- 
 rosy in this country." The average leper population of the leper set- 
 tlements in Molokai for the two years ending March 31, 1890, was 
 1,035. 
 
 * American Journal Medical Science, April, 1883. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 41 
 
 A. Lutz, M. D., a specialist employed by the Hawaiian Government 
 as "government physician for the study and treatment of leprosy," 
 reports, under date of April 1, 1890, as follows: "The infection from one 
 person to the other furnishes probably the largest number of patients; 
 heredity, if it really exists at all, is quite secondary, being perhaps only 
 simulated by family infection. The influence of vaccination appears 
 most doubtful." 
 
 From the Sanitary Instructions for Hawaiians, by the chairman of 
 the sanitary committee of the Hawaiian legislature, the following state- 
 ment of predisposing causes of leprosy and rules to be observed is 
 made up : 
 
 "Be careful that where the operation of vaccination is performed 
 pure vaccine is used." 
 
 "Avoid a leprous bedfellow as you would a pit of fire." 
 
 "Eat regularly and of the best obtainable food." 
 
 "Avoid dark, damp, badly- ventilated rooms." 
 
 " Never lie down to repose in damp or dirty clothing, and keep the 
 body clean." 
 
 "Nearly all the lepers come from among the poor, who have fared 
 badly and have lodged in damp and ill ventilated huts." 
 
 "Take care of the first symptoms of leprosy. The moment numb- 
 ness of feeling, or any marks or swellings that indicate leprosy are 
 observed, a physician should be consulted." 
 
 Venereal diseases favor the attack of leprosy. "If two men, one 
 perfectly well and clean in body and the other diseased with venereal 
 virus, were each brought into intimate contact with a leprous individ- 
 ual, the diseased man would be affected and become a leper far sooner 
 than the sound man." 
 
 Dr. Lutz, Hawaiian Government physician for the treatment and 
 study of leprosy, was encouraged to declare, under date of April, 1890, 
 that he believes "we shall * * * see cures, which may be attrib- 
 uted, not to extraordinary chance, but to our methods of treatment." It 
 appears, however, from later reports, that the study of leprosy by spe- 
 cialists employed by the Government was soon abandoned. Dr. Lutz 
 resigned September, 1890, without having effected a permanent 
 cure. 
 
 The president of the board of health reports to the legislative assem- 
 bly, session of 1892, on the subject of the study of leprosy by Govern- 
 ment specialists, as follows: "In deference to the oft-repeated requests, 
 * * * the board of health opened correspondence with the leprosy 
 commission of England and with Dr. E. Arning, of Hamburg, Ger- 
 many, with a view of * * * continuing the study and treatment 
 of leprosy." The substance of Dr. Arning's reply is: "That the scien- 
 tific work connected with the etiology and pathology of leprosy can, 
 with surer prospects of success, be carried on here in its European 
 centers, and this is actually being done; there are a number of bac- 
 teriologists * * * at work on this intricate question and slowly 
 unraveling knot on knot towards its solution." 
 
 The report of the board of health for 1892 states that on " December 
 31, 1890, there were 1,213 lepers in the custody of the board, that being 
 the highest number ever reached, and on March 31, 1892, there were 
 only 1,115, a decrease of 98 during the period." In regard to the segre- 
 gation of lepers the report affirms that at this date, % March 31, 1892, 
 " there are very few known lepers at large, with the exception of per- 
 haps 17 at Kalalau, Kaui, but there are about 60 suspects at liberty in 
 
42 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Honolulu, and some in the outer districts, and more or less of them 
 will, in time, become confirmed cases." 
 
 The same report shows that the cost of the " segregation, support, 
 and treatment of lepers " for the biennial period closing March 31, 1892, 
 was $224,331.88. 
 
 In regard to venereal diseases, so well known as prevalent in the 
 Hawaiian Islands, the statement is made in the Medical Record for 
 April, 1889, that the " effects of hereditary immunity * * * has 
 resulted in the production of a much milder form of the disease in the 
 course of three or four generations. At the present day syphilis in the 
 Sandwich Islands is comparatively a benign disease, and furnishes but 
 a small contingent to the sum of mortality." The writer, Dr. P. A. 
 Morrow, states that " not only has the disease moderated in severity, 
 mit, according to the testimony of numerous physicians, # * * it 
 has materially decreased in frequency." The writer also asserts the 
 "comparative rarity of hereditary transmission" of syphilis in the 
 islands, and explains it by the fact that the native Hawaiian s of to-day 
 are a sterile race. u In some of the districts the percentage of births 
 does not exceed 2 per 1,000 instead of 28 per 1,000, as it should be, to bal- 
 ance the mortality rate." 
 
 Note. — The maps and charts mentioned in this paper omitted. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 43 
 
 VII. Also the following- lecture, delivered at the tj. s. 
 
 NATIONAL MUSEUM, FEBRUARY 9, AND MARCH 15, 1881, BY CAPT. C. 
 E. DUTTON, OF THE U. S. ARMY, IN WASHINGTON, D. C. 
 
 [Ordnance notes— No. 343, Washington, April 23, 1884.] 
 
 THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS AND PEOPLE. 
 
 Lectures delivered at the TJ. S. National Museum February 9 and March 
 15 j 1884, under the auspices of the Smithsonian Institution and of the 
 Anthropological and Biological Societies of Washington. . 
 
 [By Capt. C. E. Dutton, Ordnance Department, U. S. A., on IT. S. Geological duty.] 
 
 Ladies and Gentleman : The Hawaiian Islands are the summits of 
 a gigantic submarine mountain range. If the waters of the Pacific were 
 removed from their vicinity we might behold a range of mountains as 
 loug as our Appalachian system, from Lake Champlain to Chattanooga, 
 and quite as wide, with summits five times as high as Mount Washing- 
 ton. The summits of Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea are nearly 14,000 feet 
 above the ocean, and their bases are from 15,000 to 18,000 feet beneath 
 it. Kef erred to the bottom of the ocean these mountains are higher 
 than the Himalayas. Standing upon the northeastern coast of Hawaii 
 the crest of Mauna Kea is less than 20 miles away, and is nearly 3 miles 
 above us. At a distance of 30 miles at sea the ocean floor is about 3 J 
 miles below us. I am not aware of any other place in the world where, 
 along a line less than 50 miles in length, may be found a difference in 
 altitude of more than 6 miles. 
 
 The Hawaiian group consists of four larger and four smaller islands. 
 The largest island is named Hawaii. It has a length of about 90 and a 
 width of 70 miles. Its area is nearly 4,000 square miles, being a little 
 less than two-thirds of the area of the entire group. It is not, however, 
 the most populous, for that distinction belongs to the islands of Oahu, 
 on which is situated the principal town and capital, Honolulu, which is 
 the center of trade and the seat of the Government. 
 
 Only a small portion of each island is capable of sustaining a dense 
 population. The interiors are mountainous and generally rough, craggy, 
 and cut with profound gorges of the wildest description. The habit- 
 able portions are near the seacoast, forming a ring around each island; 
 but only a part of each ring is habitable or cultivable. Some portions 
 are arid and barren; others are covered with recent floods of lava, and 
 still others are bounded by lofty rocky coasts, and trenched with ravines 
 so deep and abrupt that access is difficult. Generally speaking, the 
 proportion of habitable area is singularly small. But those portions 
 which are well favored are probably capable of sustaining as dense a 
 population as any tracts in the world. 
 
 The climate of these islands is the climate of Paradise. It is never 
 hot, and, except at considerable altitudes, it is never cold. Rarely has 
 the thermometer been known to reach 90° on the seacoast, or to fall 
 below 65°. The temperature in most localities may be averaged the 
 year round as varying between 75° and 85°. But while the tempera- 
 ture of any given locality is uniform, there is wonderful variety in the 
 climate as we pass from one place to another. Indeed, there are almost 
 as many climates as there are square leagues. As a rule the windward 
 or eastern sides are rainy and the leeward sides dry. On the eastern 
 coast of Hawaii the annual rainfall varies from 150 to 250 inches. On 
 the northwest coast of the same island it is probably less than the 
 
44 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 
 twentieth part of those amounts. The islands being situated within 
 the trade-wind belt, the wind blows constantly from the east and north j 
 east during the greater part of the year, and is only subject to brie: 
 interruptions during midwinter. Violent storms occur only in thr 
 winter time, and these, coming once or twice a year from the southwest 
 are known as konas, which means in the native language the south § 
 west. During a stay of six months on the islands I only heard a single 
 peal of thunder. 
 
 These islands are all of volcanic origin. They are composed 01 
 basaltic lavas, and no other rocks are found there excepting a few con: 
 solidated coral sands, which are remnants of old sea-beaches, upheaved 
 from 50 to 200 feet. In the two westerly islands the volcanic activity 
 has long been extinct. Most of the ancient craters have been obliter 
 ated, and the volcanic piles built up during the periods of activity have j 
 been greatly ravaged and wasted by subsequent erosion. Next to the< 
 plateaus and canyon country of the Eocky Mountain region, it would b* 
 difficult to find anywhere more impressive and suggestive examples oi> 
 the wasting and slow destruction of the land than those presented by 
 these islands. We find there grand illustrations of the two methods 
 by which the general process of erosion accomplishes its work. First 
 is the action of the rains, followed by the decomposition of the massive i 
 rocks and their conversion into soil, and also the action of running, 
 water and decay of the rock masses, resulting in the formation ol 
 ravines and mountain gorges of imposing grandeur ; secondly, we find' 
 the slow but incessant inroads made by the waves of the ocean upon I 
 seacoast, gradually wearing back the cliffs and slowly paring away the 
 rocky shore, until, after the lapse of thousands of years, the sea has 
 eaten its way several miles into the land. Thus we have on the one* 
 hand striking examples of one way in which mountains are built, and 
 we have on the other hand equally striking examples of the ways ini 
 which those mountains are destroyed. 
 
 Travelers in the lofty volcanic islands of the Pacific have frequently 
 noted with some surprise the singularly sharp, angular, abrupt features 
 of their mountain scenery. It is very impressive in the Fijis and 
 Samoa, in the Ladrone, Caroline, and Society groups. But none of 
 them rival in wildness and grandeur the still loftier islands of Hawaii. 
 Gorges little inferior to Yosemite in magnitude are rather numerous. 
 But in a certain sharpness of detail and animation in the sculpture they 
 are unique. The island of Kauai and the western portion of the island 
 of Maui consist of old volcanic piles as high as Mount Washington, and 
 much broader and longer. They are literally sawed to pieces by many 
 immense canyon-like gorges, which cut them to their foundations. Over 
 all is spread a mantle of tropical vegetation in comparison with which 
 the richest verdure of our temperate zone is but the garb of poverty. 
 Whoever reads Shakspeare's Tempest and visits the Bermudas will 
 be disenchanted from some of the most pleasing illusions of the play. 
 But, if Shakspeare could have known the eastern shores of Maui or 
 Hawaii and made them the scenes of his play, it would have had, if 
 possible, another claim to immortality. 
 
 This wealth of verdure and splendor of scenery usually occur upon 
 the windward sides of the islands, for upon those sides is found the 
 cause which produces them. This cause is the copious rainfall brought 
 by the perpetual trade winds. Nothing can be more pleasing to the 
 lover of beautiful scenery than a ride along the windward coasts of 
 Maui and Hawaii. The land terminates in cliffs, varying from 200 to 
 500 feet in height, plunging down almost vertically into the Pacific. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 45 
 
 The long heavy swell, driven for thousands of miles before the trade 
 wind, breaks with great force against these iron walls. The surface 
 jabove slopes upward towards the mountainous interior, at first with a 
 gentle acclivity, which becomes steeper inland, and at length precipi- 
 tous. This plat forniis gashed at short intervals by true canyons, which 
 ^iead far up the mountain slopes, and open seaward in the great ter- 
 minal wall. A mile or two inland from the brink of the cliff-bound 
 Shore is a forest so dense that it can be penetrated only by hewing a 
 ^ay through it or following a path already hewn. To describe the 
 glories of this tropical vegetation is impossible. Only those who have 
 beheld it can conceive of its splendor and luxurance. Yet there is one 
 unrivaled feature of the island vegetation which has no parallel else- 
 where than in the Pacific and Austral islands, and which may be men- 
 tioned. This is the ferns. There are more than 300 species of them in 
 the Hawaiian Islands, and the most conspicuous are tree ferns which 
 grow in amazing abundance and sumptuousness. They often cover 
 the sides of the ravines, forming a thicket which is quite impenetrable, 
 and become a mantle of green velvet so deep, rich, and exquisitely 
 patterned that it makes an imperial robe seem ridiculous. 
 
 But there are contrasts. There are portions of the islands where 
 the features have at first sight no more in common with those just 
 spoken of than if they belonged to another planet. The beautiful or 
 grand scenery is found in those parts where the volcanic activity has 
 long been dormant. The contrasted portions are those where the 
 volcanoes are still in action, or have recently put out their fires. 
 
 The southern half of the great island of Hawaii is covered with the 
 two grandest volcanoes in the world — Mauna Loa and Kilauea. The 
 great central pile is Mauna Loa, which is certainly the monarch of 
 modern volcanoes. Its name signifies the Great Mountain. No other 
 in the world approaches it in the vastness of its mass or in the magni- 
 tude of its eruptive activity. There are many volcanic peaks higher in 
 air, but these are planted upon elevated platforms of stratified rock, 
 where they appear as mere cones, of greater or less size. Eegarding 
 the platforms on which tjiey stand as their true bases, the cones them- 
 selves and the lavas which have emanated from them never approach 
 the magnitude of Mauna Loa. iEtna and all its adjuncts are immeas- 
 urably inferior ; while Shasta, Hood, and Eanier, if melted doAvn and 
 run together into one pile, would still fall much below the volume of 
 the island volcano. In the greatness of its eruptions, Mauna Loa is 
 also without a rival. Some of the volcanoes of Iceland have been 
 known to disgorge at a single outbreak volumes of lava quite equal to 
 them. But in that island such extravasations are infrequent, and a 
 century has now elapsed since any such have been emitted. The 
 eruptions of Mauna Loa are all of great volume and occur irregularly, 
 with an average interval of about eight years. Any one of its moderate 
 eruptions represents more lava than Vesuvius has outpoured since the 
 last days of Pompeii. The great flow of 1855 would nearly have built 
 Vesuvius, and those of 1859 and 1881 were not greatly inferior. 
 
 The Hawaiian volcanoes are in some respects abnormal. The most 
 distinctive of their characteristics is the quiet and undemonstrative 
 method of their eruptions, liarely are these portentous events attended 
 by any of that explosive action which is manifested by all other vol- 
 canoes. In only one or two instances within the historic period have 
 they been accompanied by earthquakes and subterraneous rumblings. 
 The vast jets of steam blown miles high, hurling cinders and lapillifar 
 ajid wide and filling the heavens with vapor, dust, and ashes ? hay§ ueyer 
 
46 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 been observed here. Some action of the sort is indeed represented 
 sometimes, but only in a feeble way. Ordinarily the lava spouts for til 
 in stupendous quantities, but as quietly as water from a fountain. Sq 
 mild are the eruptive forces that the observer may stand to the wind-! 
 ward of one of these fountains and so near it that the heat will makd 
 the face tingle, yet without danger. Usually the outbreak takes place 
 without warning, and even without the knowledge of people in th| 
 vicinity, who first become aware of it at nightfall, when the heaveni 
 are aglow with the reflected light and the fiery fountains are seen; 
 playing. As the news spreads hundreds of people flock to witness thj 
 sublime spectacle, and display as much eagerness to approach the 
 scene of an eruption as the people of other countries show to get awaj 
 from one. 
 
 All this is in contrast with the ordinary volcano. At the othen 
 extreme is such an eruption as that which happened last August, at 
 Krakatoa, in the Straits of Sunda. With the published details of thil 
 catastrophe you are all familiar. Appalling as it was, the eruption of 
 Sumbawa in 1815 must have been, if can rely upon the accounts of 
 it, even more energetic and destructive. The eruption of Ooseguinaj 
 in Nicaragua, in 1835, appears to have been of the same character, oi 
 upon a scale quite equal; while once or twice in a century Cotapaxi 
 shakes the chain of the Andes through half its length, fills the skj 
 with dust, and converts noonday into midnight for a hundred inilel 
 around. The eruptions of ^Etna have all been on a smaller scale, buj 
 still sufficient to fill all Sicily with terror. Vesuvius is usually regarded 
 as an obstreperous vent, but its performances are mere Fourth of Jul I 
 fireworks in comparison with these Day-of- Judgment proceedings al 
 Sumbawa, Krakatoa, and Cotapaxi. 
 
 The explosive agent in these terrible convulsions is steam. In theinj 
 original seat, miles deep in the earth, the lavas contain considerabS 
 quantities of water; but the condition of this water is such as we navel 
 at the surface of the earth, no experience with, except as we observe it 
 in volcanoes. It is water red hot, or even yellow hot, and under J 
 pressure hundreds of times greater than that of the steam in a loco] 
 motive boiler — a pressure probably comparable to that exerted by 
 gunpowder in a powerful cannon. Under the enormous pressure! 
 occurring at a depth of several miles within the earth, water is absorbed 
 by the lavas in much the same way as water itself absorbs ammonia 
 gas, or as wine absorbs carbonic acid. When the lavas rise to thd 
 surface where the pressure is removed their explosive energy becomes 
 terrible. The steam is given off as the uncorked bottle of wine gives 
 off its gas, only a thousand times more violently and energetically. Sal 
 densely charged with vapor of water are some lavas that when, as inj 
 the case of Krakatoa, a vent is found, the explosive energy becomes sol 
 great that the lava is blown into fine dust and dissipated in the surj 
 rounding atmosphere. Although this extreme of explosive activity is 
 far too common for the comfort and safety of the human race it is bjj 
 no means the most frequent. The more ordinary type of volcano is 
 one in which the explosiveness is not so intense as to blow the whold 
 of the ejected matter into impalpable dust, but blows it into pellet! 
 termed lapilli. These grains of lapilli are of all sizes, from that of a 
 kernel of wheat up to those of cannon balls, and sometimes weigh a 
 hundred tons or more. With a majority of volcanoes, whether activa 
 or extinct, the greater part of the material ejected is cast into the ail 
 in this fragmental form. Falling back around the orifice it builds up a 
 fairly regular cone, with a cup om the summit. This is termed a cindel 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 47 
 
 cone. Most ol the volcanic piles of the world are crowned with cinder 
 cones, the principal bulk of which consists of lapilli and scoriaceous 
 lumps, with some massive portions of flowing lava streams mixed in. 
 It is probable that quite half of the volcanic material now visible upon 
 the globe consists of accumulations of such fragmental matter. 
 
 To this general method of extravasation Mauna Loa and Kilaueaare 
 remarkable exceptions. They consist almost wholly of massive sheets 
 and floods of lava. On Mauna Loa there are but the most insignificant 
 traces of fragmental products, and on Kilauea there are only a dozen 
 or two of small cinder cones. The lavas of these great volcanoes flowed 
 quietly out in enormous deluges, running sometimes for months, or even 
 a whole year, with little or no explosive action throughout the entire 
 duration of the flows. 
 
 One consequence of this quiet method of eruption has been to give to 
 these colossal piles a wholly exceptional form among volcanoes. Instead 
 of a huge cone crowning the apex of Mauna Loa, its summit is nearly 
 a flat plain, 5J miles long and nearly 4 miles wide. Within this plain is 
 sunken a pit 3 miles long, 2 miles wide, and 1,000 feet in depth. In 
 the floor of this pit at certain times may be seen a lake of red-hot liquid 
 lava, varying in size from time to time, but occasionally as large as 30 
 or 40 acres. At intervals of fifteen or twenty minutes a column of 
 liquid lava of great brilliancy, as large and as high as the Washington 
 monument will be when it is completed, is shot upward and falls back 
 into the lava pool in a fiery spray. This grand display is sometimes 
 kept up for months, and is generally terminated by an eruption. 
 When an outbreak occurs it does not take place usually at the summit, 
 but a fissure suddenly opens in the side of the mountain, out of 
 which a sheet of lava spouts hundreds of feet into the air, and, 
 falling, collects into a river of fire half a mile in width, and rushes 
 at first with great velocity down the slope. After running some 
 miles it reaches more level ground, where it spreads out in great lakes 
 or fields. It also cools on the surface, which gradually freezes over. 
 But it is still hot within, and beneath its hardened covering the liquid 
 rivers are still running, and at the edges and along the front of the 
 great sheet the limpid lava constantly breaks forth, pushing out fiery 
 rivulets in advance and laterally. 
 
 These rivulets are shot out in quick succession here, there, and every- 
 where, gradually covering the ground by repeated offshoots. They 
 soon blacken and harden, but only to be covered by another and another 
 belch. The later progress of the stream is slow. When the lava first 
 leaves the vent it may run 10 or 15 miles an hour. But later on the 
 stream may advance less than 100 yards in a day. In November, 1880, 
 a great eruption broke forth near the summit of Mauna Loa, and the 
 ava poured out in heavy streams unceasingly for eleven months. There 
 were three great streams flowing in as many directions, and the largest 
 one extended from the vent a distance of nearly 50 miles. It reached 
 the outskirts of the beautiful little town of Hilo, whose inhabitants had 
 abandoned all hope that their village would escape, and had removed 
 their portable property. But the flow stopped just at the edge of the 
 village. 
 
 The massive and highly liquid character of the flows from Mauna 
 Loa is the cause which has given this mountain its peculiar form. It 
 is in contrast with all other volcanoes by virtue of its flat and gently 
 sloped profiles. It ia a gently rising dome whose steeper slopes are 
 only about 7 degrees, while its longer ones are only 4 degrees. Most 
 volcanoes have slopes ranging all the way from 15 to 30 and even 40 
 
48 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 degrees. The liquid lavas run off from the summit and upper dome and 
 distribute themselves at immense distances. But if fragmental prod- 
 ucts were ejected in any quantity they would pile up around the orifices 
 from which they were ejected and thus form steep conical hills. 
 
 The ascent of Mauna Loa is a feat wholly unworthy of the name of 
 mountaineering. It is necessary, however, to procure a guide who 
 knows the way, otherwise the journey is pretty sure to prove more 
 interesting than was expected. Many of the lava streams are masses 
 of clinkers of the most angular and cruel aspect imaginable; indeed, 
 the hummocks of an arctic ice field are good traveling in comparison, 
 and only a guide familiar with the mountain knows how to avoid them. 
 
 Just east of Mauna Loa, about 20 or 25 miles, is the far-famed vol- 
 cano Kilauea. This has been visited and described so often that little 
 needs to be said here. It contains a great pit similar to that on Mauna 
 Loa, and somewhat larger, though not so deep. 
 
 Within it are the • great lakes of fire always burning. The lake at 
 the summit of Mauna Loa is frozen over and silent, without a trace of 
 volcanic activity, for several years at a time, and is open only for sev- 
 eral months or sometimes a year or so before a great eruption. But at 
 Kilauea the lava lakes are always aflame, and have been so ever since 
 the earliest traditions of the natives. Forty years ago there was a pit 
 within a pit, and in the lowest deep was a lava pool half a mile or more 
 in diameter, always boiling, spouting, and flaming. At the present 
 time the inner pit is quite filled up with solid lava, and a large conical 
 pile of rocks is built up over the site of this former lake. Within this 
 pile of rocks, however, is the remnant of this lake, now about 10 acres 
 in area. Half a mile distant is a second lake which is easily visited, 
 and it is an exhilarating sight to stand at night upon the brink of it 
 and watch the boiling, surging, and swirling of 6 acres of melted lava. 
 At brief intervals the surface darkens over by the formation of a black 
 solid crust with streaks of fire around the edges. Suddenly a network 
 of cracks shoots through the entire crust, and the fragments turn down 
 edgewise and sink, leaving the pool one glowing expanse of exactly the 
 appearance of so much melted cast iron. The heat of fusion in this lake 
 is maintained, in spite of the enormous loss of heat by radiation, by the 
 constant ascent of large quantities of intensely hot vapors from the 
 depths of the earth. 
 
 An hour's lecture, ladies and gentlemen, leaves no time for rhetoric 
 and graceful transitions from one theme to another. Having shoveled 
 out to you, so to speak, some incoherent remarks concerning points of 
 special interest in the islands, I proceed at once to a subject which 
 will, I hope, prove more interesting, and that is the people who inhabit 
 them. 
 
 When we were boys and girls our general idea of the inhabitants of 
 the Pacific islands was that they were typical savages. What savages 
 were we knew pretty well, or thought we knew, for had we not all read 
 Robinson Crusoe? We thought of them as naked, black creatures, 
 whose principal occupation was blowing conch-shells, brandishing 
 thigh bones, and dancing a horrible cancan around a fire where a human 
 carcass was roasting. But we were mistaken. The Polynesians, as 
 a rule, were not savages, though many of the white people who first 
 visited them were so. 
 
 In the Pacific islands two very distinct races are found. Of one race 
 the Hawaiians or Tahitians may be regarded as the type. This race 
 peoples also the Society, Samoan, Navigators, and Friendly groups, 
 #n4 includes the Maoris of New Zealand All these islanders have tu§ 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 49 
 
 same physical features, similar social cults, and speak dialects of the 
 same language. The difference between the language of a Hawaiian and 
 of a Society islander is not greater than that between the German and 
 the Dutch. The difference between the language of a Hawaiian and a 
 Maori is less than between the Dutch and the English. This and the 
 community of physical type establish the identity of race sufficiently. 
 The western islands of the Pacific are occupied by a race which has 
 such apparent affinity with the inhabitants of Papua or New Guinea 
 as to raise a very strong presumption of their community, and the sup- 
 position is corroborated by many other circumstances. Of the two 
 races, the first mentioned is much superior physically, mentally, and 
 morally, and of all branches of that race the noblest is the Hawaiian. 
 
 Physically they are rather large, and have a light-brown color, straight 
 hair, and are handsomely formed, of good bearing, and well featured. 
 The women also are pleasing and comely. There is nothing about them 
 savoring of the squaw, hag, or wench, which is almost universal among 
 so many of the primitive dark-skinned races, and they are not without 
 beauty, even according to the taste of the white man, if he is willing to 
 admire a robust type of feminine grace as easily as he does the "pale, 
 pious, pulmonary" persuasion. Among the Hawaiians the old kings 
 and chiefs seemed to form a distinct caste and a breed greatly superior 
 to the common herd. They were very large, sometimes almost gigantic 
 in size, and of very impressive form and bearing. Their color was 
 lighter, and they were of more massive frames. 
 
 At the time of the discovery of these islands by Capt. Cook, in 1776, 
 these people were by no means savages. Their social system was as 
 much above savagery on the one hand as it was below civilization on 
 the other. A careful study of their habits and customs discloses the 
 interesting fact that their social organization bore a striking similitude 
 to that of Europe in the tenth and eleventh centuries. It was a feudal 
 system almost exactly. They had kings who were in all strictness heredi- 
 tary suzerains. Under them were chiefs who owed them fealty, and 
 who held lands and titles by a tenure which can hardly be distinguished 
 from enfeoffment, and which, at all events, was a truly feudal tenure; 
 for it carried with it the recognition of the principle that the allodium 
 was vested in the king alone, and the tenure was granted to the chief 
 as a vassal in consideration of military service. The common people 
 were mere villains, bound to the soil, though in some sort as tenants at 
 will. The islands were divided up into several kingdoms, over each of 
 which a king reigned, whose power was very absolute; in all things he 
 was lord paramount. The kingdom was subdivided into tracts, for 
 which the term now used in the islands is simply the word "lands." 
 These lands were lorded over by chiefs, of whom there were several 
 grades. They were subdivided again and again down to the smallest 
 holdings, of a fraction of an acre, tenanted by the lower classes, and 
 all were marked off' by metes and bounds. 
 
 The power of the King was absolute, and limited only by the endur- 
 ance of his subjects. Life and death, as well as property, were subject 
 to his will; and yet there was a division of power. To make the par- 
 allel with mediaeval Europe more complete, the power of the King was 
 rivaled, and in some cases even overborne, by the power of a priest- 
 hood ; and the priests enforced their sway with a spiritual weapon of 
 resistless potency. The weapons of Eome were many, chief among 
 which were excommunication, the inquisition, and the interdict. The 
 Hawaiian priest had a weapon more powerful than them all. it wa» 
 the tabu. This word has been adopted, metaphorically, into the Eng- 
 S. Kep. 227 4 
 
50 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 lish and many other languages, but few people comprehend its signiflj 
 cance in the places where it originated. The word means prohibited 
 or forbidden, and a great deal more besides. Almost anything might 
 be tabu. The penalty of violating a tabu was always death. The instti 
 tution derived its power from the fact that there was not a native in all 
 Polynesia who did not devoutly believe that even if the King or priesti 
 did not cause him to be killed for violating a tabu the gods certainlj 
 would. 
 
 In respect to the arts possessed by these people they were few ant! 
 simple. The islands contained no metals and very few substitutes fo| 
 them, except stone, and not the best kinds of stone for implements at 
 that. Considering the want of materials, however, their arts werd 
 hardly to be despised. They made many articles of wood with suil 
 prising neatness. Their only substitutes for cloth were a fabric made! 
 of a peculiar bark, macerated in water and pounded out as thin as 
 paper, and mats woven from the fibers of the pandanus with ho little 
 skill. Their houses were large, commodious structures made of grass! 
 often neatly woven, and attached to a framework of poles. They were 
 scrupulously neat within, and matting of pleasing aspect was useq 
 abundantly. They were wonderfully expert fishermen, and had device! 
 suited for capturing each kind of fish. More than that, they had fish 
 ponds and preserves for rearing select varieties. 
 
 Agriculture was practiced systematically. They constructed caualj 
 for irrigating, the remains of which are still visible in numerous places] 
 Their chief vegetable was the root of the taro plant, a species of arunj 
 to which the calla lilies belong. It may not be generally known thaf 
 this is probably the most prolific food plant in the world. Humboldl 
 gives that distinction to the banana, but the banana is nowhere in thd 
 comparison ; for a square yard and a half planted with taro will yield 
 food enough to support a man for a year. This plant is poisonous when 
 raw, but cooking completely destroys the poisonous quality and renders 
 it very wholesome. The Hawaiians first bake it and then pound iq 
 gradually adding water, which is kneaded in like oil in a mayonnaise! 
 and when fully prepared it is of a consistency very muchlikemayonnaiseJ 
 In that state it is termed poi; and to this day the natives regard it as 
 we do bread, and it serves still as their favorite food. Many of thj 
 white residents also have become exceedingly fond of it. 
 
 The primitive Hawaiians were very bold and skillful navigators! 
 There can be no question that they frequently visited in their littlj 
 canoes the Society Islands and Tahiti, south of the equator and 2,401 
 miles distant from Hawaii. How they could cross such vast wastes 01 
 ocean seems at first mysterious ; but they had a knowledge of astronom^ 
 such as we sometimes marvel at in the old Egyptians and Chaldeansi 
 They knew the planets, and had names for the brighter stars. Thej 
 also had a good calendar. Their year was three hundred and sixt^l 
 five days long, and began when the Pleiades rose at sunset. They had 
 twelve months, of which eleven had thirty days each, and the twelftM 
 thirty-five days. They had also a primitive arithmetic and a system of 
 numerals in which they could number up into the hundreds of thou] 
 sands. It was partly decimal and partly tesseral. 
 
 The religion of this people was in some respects analogous to that ol 
 the Greeks. Their gods were hero gods and of many grades. Indeed] 
 it is quite literal to say that the woods were full of them. Every 
 locality, every conspicuous rock or tree, had its tutelar, corresponding 
 perh ips to the Grecian fauns and dryads. They also had animal gods! 
 most notably the shark god, and the divinity of the volcano of Kilauei 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 51 
 
 was a female named Pele. The amount of myth and legendary lore in 
 which these divinities figured was something amazing. We have for 
 some years been finding out that our own Indians were rich in myths, 
 if nothing else. But the extent of such lore among the Hawaiians 
 quite surpasses any tiling known of other primitive peoples. Many of 
 them are highly poetical and ingenious. 
 
 The origin of the Polynesian race has always been a mystery. There 
 is very little light thrown upon it as yet by ethnologic research. The 
 view most favored is that they came from the East Indies at a remote 
 period. That the larger islands of the Pacific have been inhabited for 
 many centuries is an inference which finds considerable support. 
 Attempts have been made to ascertain whether the language has any 
 affinity to known languages of southeastern Asia, but the results are 
 little better than negative. Some coincidences have been found, or 
 supposed to have been found, but it does not seem that they are any 
 better or more significant than such as may be frequently discovered 
 between two languages which are surely known to have absolutely 
 nothing in common. Coincidences between legends and customs have 
 also been discovered. But ethnologists of the present day have come 
 to attach less importance to them, if possible, than to languages. 
 Thus the manners and customs, and also the legends, of the Maoris of 
 New Zealand have very little in common with those of the Hawaiians. 
 Yet the absolute identity of physical type and the virtual identity of 
 their languages are tantamount to proof of a common race. And primi- 
 tive peoples, world over, are constantly surprising us by furnishing 
 correspondences in legends and peculiar customs, when it is absolutely 
 certain that they are widely distinct. On the other hand, there is good 
 ground for believing that if the Polynesians did not come from some 
 known Asiatic or East Indian stock, they may at least have communi- 
 cated with them in one way or another. 
 
 When the islands were discovered by Capt. Cook pigs were very 
 abundant there, and the animal was an East Indian variety. The 
 peculiar tusks, the portentiously long snout like an icthyosaurus, and 
 ears set in the middle of its body 1 ; give us pretty reliable testimony as 
 to its origin. They also had dogs, and certainly no dog could have 
 come either from America or Australia. Finally, and even more con- 
 clusively, they had common hens and chickens, which are certainly of 
 Asiatic origin. What people brought these animals to the islands is a 
 question. I have already mentioned to you that the Hawaiians often 
 made voyages to Tahiti in their little canoes, a distance of 2,400 miles; 
 and their ancient poems and legends are full of vague accounts of voy- 
 ages to even greater distances. They knew of the Samoan and Tonga 
 islands, which are more than 3,000 miles away and farther westward. 
 Possibly also they knew of New Zealand, but the evidence of that is 
 not so clear. But I have never learned that anything. in their poetry 
 or traditions indicated a knowledge of either America or Asia. While, 
 therefore, it is not impossible that they may have had communication 
 with Asia, there is no other evidence of it than the fact that domestic 
 animals of Asiatic origin were found among them. 
 
 The transition of this people from barbarism to civilization has been 
 wonderfully rapid and complete. It is a very remarkable fact, too, 
 that it is the only dark-skinned race that has ever been brought into 
 full contact and relation with civilization without Avar and generations 
 of bloodshed, ending in subjugation. The reasons are many. Promi- 
 nent among them are the following: In the first place, there can be 
 little question that it is the finest and most intelligent race of dark- 
 
52 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 skinned people in the world. In the second place, it is due in a great 
 measure to the wisdom, tact, and good sense of the missionaries through 
 whom this civilizatioii was imparted. But it seems to me the third 
 reason is still more potent, and this was the great ability, wisdom, and 
 good sense of the kings of the line of the Kamehamehas and the abso- 
 lute power they originally held over their people. 
 
 Fortunately, also, at the time of the advent of the white men the con- \ 
 trol of the islands had already been consolidated into the hands of one 
 man, who was fully capable of wielding it. If the lot of the first 
 Kamehameha had been cast in Europe instead of the remotest islands 
 of the sea he would have been one of the most conspicuous figures of 
 history. Originally a little kinglet of a district at the north end of 
 Hawaii, he gradually conquered the whole of that island and finally 
 the whole group. No King in history ever knew better how to rule his 
 people. Brought into contact with civilization, he grasped its meaning 
 with a breadth of comprehension which is perhaps without example 
 among barbarians. He knew instinctively how resistless was its power 
 and how inexorably it crowds the weaker races to the wall. But he 
 had the wisdom not only to avert the destruction of his own power and 
 the obliteration of the nationality of his people, but actually to draw 
 strength from it and make it his servant instead of his master. The 
 greatest achievement of his life was the work of his declining years, and 
 it was an achievement of surpassing skill. He broke completely the 
 secular power of the priesthood. He had the sagacity to discover alone 
 and unaided the grandest truth in political science, and one which white 
 men never discovered until three or four centuries ago. That great 
 truth was that church and state had better let each other alone. We 
 need not wonder, however, that he discovered it, for the Kings of 
 Europe understood it well enough; indeed they were about the only 
 ones who did. The marvel was that this barbarian should have had 
 the courage and address to make the truth a practical reality and put 
 it into execution. It is one thing to perceive the foolishness of super- 
 .stition and quite another to break down a whole religion. W hen Kame- 
 hameha began his career the priesthood was far more powerful than he. 
 When he died they were as powerless in secular matters as the Pope 
 now is in Italy. The finishing stroke was given when his dead body, 
 as yet unburied, was awaiting the obsequies. His widow and son 
 deliberately broke many of the most sacred tabus, and enjoined the 
 same sacrilegious acts upon their households and followers. They were 
 promptly obeyed, and the example was followed by the whole nation. 
 Next the temples were despoiled, the images of the gods broken and 
 burned, and the priests themselves driven into the forests and jungles. 
 
 An act so sweeping and revolutionary as the trampling under foot of 
 the most binding superstition or religious conviction that ever held 
 sway over the human race would never have been ventured if the peo- 
 ple had not been gradually wrought up to it. In truth, Kamehameha 
 had first revolutionized the whole social and political condition of the 
 people, and had elevated them immensely against the influences of a 
 priestcraft which was all the time "striving to hold them down. When 
 the issue came the King triumphed and the priest was overthrown. It 
 was probably this change which prepared the Hawaiian people for 
 what followed. It established the kingly power independently of a 
 priesthood and left the people without a religion. 
 
 The year following this important event the missionaries landed 
 there for the first time. They soon secured the good will of the second 
 Kamehameha and found their work a comparatively easy one. To the 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 53 
 
 missionariis is due the credit of having bees the agents through whom 
 civilization was imparted to 'he islands. Those who are specially 
 devoted to the interests of foreign missions have been in the habit of 
 regarding the Hawaiian Islands as a signal instance of the triumph of 
 Protestant propagandism. On the whole, there is a large measure of 
 justice in this claim. But, on the other hand, a closer view will prob- 
 ably disclose to the impartial mind the fact that, while the amount of 
 Christian proselytism has been very considerable, the outside view of it 
 is somewhat overdrawn. 
 
 There are certainly many devout Christians among the Hawaiians, 
 but there are also many who cherish their old religion, and the greater 
 part of them are more or less tinctured with the ancient superstitions. 
 But whatever doubts may arise as to the complete success of the prop- 
 aganda, there can be none as to the success in imparting civilization. 
 Fortunately, they had to deal with and through a succession of kings 
 who were men of preeminent sense and of practical wisdom, and who 
 knew how to manage their subjects. They were kings in the best pos- 
 sible signification. Boyalty was inborn in them, and the loyalty of 
 their subjects was such that the loyalty of an Englishman is a feeble 
 sentiment in comparison. The Kamehamehas, from the II to the V, 
 inclusive, were quick to recognize the advantages of civilization, and 
 had wonderful tact in discriminating between good and bad advice. 
 The missionaries proved to be discreet and judicious advisers, and the 
 transition from barbarism to civilization was effected safely \ step by 
 step ; the Government was transformed into a constitutional monarchy, 
 the feudal tenure of lands was changed to fee simple. Statute laws 
 were enacted and codified, and suffrage was made as broad and liberal 
 as in America. Perhaps the most important step was compulsory 
 education, which is provided for by the State, and to day it is hard to 
 find a native who can not read, write, and cipher. 
 
 The economic condition of the Hawaiian is probably superior at the 
 present time to that of any other tropical people in the world; and, on 
 the whole, I think it quite safe to say that it is but very little sur- 
 passed, if at all v .by,that of the working classes of America. He has 
 even more to eat and better food, plenty of beef, pork, and fish, and 
 could have an abundance of flour if he desired it, but he prefers his 
 taro. He owns his property in fee; he makes laws and executes them ; 
 he reads and writes; he has but one wife; he tills the soil and tends 
 flocks; sometimes he accumulates wealth and sometimes he does not; 
 he makes his will in due form, dies, and receives a Christian burial; 
 in no land in the world is property more secure. Indeed, I have yet to 
 learn of any where it is equally secure from burglary, rapine, and thiev- 
 ery or those subtler devices by which the cunning get possession of the 
 property of the less astute without giving an equivalent for it. The 
 few relics of barbarism remaining are of the most harmless description, 
 and probably quite as good for him as anything he might adopt in 
 place of them. 
 
 Unfortunately, the population is rapidly decreasing. A century ago 
 a fair estimate would probable, have been over 150,000. To-day the 
 native population is 45,000 to 5b,000. The causes of this decrease are 
 many. It has usually been attributed to diseases brought by contact 
 with the whites. While it is indisputable that such diseases have in a 
 measure contributed to the result, I believe there is still another cause 
 at work tending to the same result, which is as follows: The Hawaiian 
 is the most amiable and social creature in the world. Life without 
 plenty of society is intolerable to him. He is also fond of display — of 
 
54 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 giving feasts, of treating, and extravagantly fond of dress, horses, and 
 sport. His instinct is to leave the country and crowd into the towns. 
 This is as common among the women as among the men. But to live in 
 town, or to indulge in dissipation, requires money, and therefore a fam- 
 ily is a burden, especially to women, who are so fond of gaiety. There 
 is, therefore, a deliberate and willful curtailment of the birth rate, and, 
 in my judgment, this has been not much less potent in reducing the 
 population than the abnormal increase in the death rate. 
 
 The Government of the islands is now a constitutional monarchy. The 
 King is the chief executive officer, and his powers, though in theory no 
 greater than those of the English sovereign, are in reality much more 
 extensive and effectual. The legislative branch consists of a repre- 
 sentative assembly, elected biennially by the people, and a house of 
 nobles limited by the constitution to 20 members. The nobles are 
 appointed for life by the King, but their titles are not hereditary. The 
 judiciary is organized upon a plan somewhat similar to that of New 
 York State, though considerably simpler. At the head of the judicial 
 branch is the chief justice or chancellor and two vice-chancellors, who 
 perform the functions of a supreme court and final court of appeals. 
 They have also original jurisdiction in a wide range of subjects, and 
 indeed in almost all important cases of whatsoever nature. Each of 
 these justices holds circuit courts in various parts of the Kingdom, at 
 which cases are tried both originally and on appeal. There are also 
 lower courts in which petty cases are tried, and in which more impor- 
 tant ones may originate. The higher judges are white men truly learned 
 in the law, and they have reflected honor upon their profession and 
 upon their adopted country. All of them are Americans, who received 
 their education and training in law in the United States. The primary 
 judges are in some cases whites, in others natives. The native judges 
 were formerly appointed by the chancellor, but are now appointed by 
 the Crown. There is generally much difficulty in finding men of native 
 birth who possess the requisite legal knowledge and experience. Their 
 intentions are always of the best, but their tendency is to construe law 
 in accordance with their own notions of abstract justice rather than 
 upon legal principles, and few of them are capable as yet of under- 
 standing the value and significance of precedents. But the higher 
 courts are always open to appeal. The administration of law is excel- 
 lent and will, on the whole, compare favorably with any country in the 
 world. The respect of the native for statute law is very great, and the 
 sheriff, policeman, or taxgatherer has no more difficulty in executing 
 his process than in England or Massachusetts ; indeed, he has, if any- 
 thing, less difficulty. 
 
 The statutory code is in general modeled after that of New York, 
 though it is apparent that in matters of detail many minor differences 
 were at the first and still are necessary. But the underlying princi- 
 ples were identical. The tenure of real estate, the laws relating to 
 liens and mortgages, to wills and inheritance of property, to bank- 
 ruptcy and debt,, to marriage and divorce, to partnership and corpora- 
 tions, are founded upon those of New York State. The system of 
 jurisprudence is also fundamentally the same. There are many differ- 
 ences of detail and these are sometimes wide, but never so wide as to 
 constitute differences of principle. The processes of the courts are 
 more frequently summary, and their action is much more speedy and 
 direct. Devices for protracting and complicating litigation have not 
 as yet been developed to any great extent. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 55 
 
 All laws are enacted -by the Legislature, which regulates taxation 
 and customs and appropriates specifically for all public expenditures. 
 In theory the powers of this body are very nearly the same in their 
 broader features as those of one of our State legislatures. The mem 
 bers of the lower house are elected biennially and are mostly natives. 
 In practice, however, there is a wide difference. In England and 
 America the representative body dominates everything and every- 
 body, especially the chief magistrate. In Hawaii the King dominates 
 the representative body. This arises from the fact that this people 
 has always been intensely loyal to the King for scores of generations, 
 and the habit of unquestioning submission to the royal will is far too 
 strongly settled and ingrained to be readily shaken off. The want of 
 experience in self-government on the part of the people, and the habit 
 of absolute command on the part of the kings, will suggest the expla- 
 nation of the great influence which the King holds over the Legislature. 
 
 At the present time the condition of the people of the islands is one 
 of great prosperity, and they are rapidly advancing in wealth and gen- 
 eral improvement. The reciprocity treaty now existing between the 
 islands and the United States has been mutually beneficial. Large 
 amounts of American capital have been invested there in sugar planta- 
 tions and in the commerce with the little Kingdom. The result has 
 been to give abundant employment to the entire population. Wages 
 are high, and all the produce of the islands brings good prices. Thus 
 the condition of the natives has been greatly improved. They are no 
 longer idlers, but the recipients of well-earned wages and incomes. 
 They are rapidly replacing their primitive grass nouses with neat 
 frame buildings, built in the regular California cottage style. They 
 have adopted civilized clothing, hats, boots, and shoes, and the women 
 "cultivate the fashions as eagerly as our own farmers' wives and daugh- 
 ters, and it is by no means uncommon to see them clothed in silks or 
 delicate woolen fabrics, or white lawns made in scrupulous regard to 
 the latest numbers of Harper's Bazaar. They wear them as easily and 
 naturally as the mulattoes or quadroons in our own country. The 
 women of rank are ladies who are competent to sustain with grace and 
 dignity all the appearances of cultivated society, though it would be 
 expecting too much to look for any high degrees of mental culture 
 according to the rigorous standard of the great white nations. Both 
 men and women, however, are quick to catch the externals of social 
 customs and refinement. The better culture, however, will come in 
 *time as wealth and the comforts and luxuries of civilized life increase 
 among them. 
 
 One of the most important agencies, and perhaps the most impor- 
 tant, has been the enforcement of education. Common schools are 
 sustained at public expense, and a college for the higher education has 
 been established. Unfortunately the natives have never been taught 
 to speak the English language, and this has been a serious obstacle in 
 the way of their intellectual advancement. It is far easier for a white 
 man to acquire the Hawaiian language than for the Hawaiian to 
 acquire English, and as a consequence few of the natives are able to 
 converse or read except in their own tongue. On the other han£, the 
 white residents can converse easily with the natives, and some of them 
 have obtained an excellent knowledge of the Hawaiian language, 
 while almost all the whites can at least use an intelligible jargon. The 
 defect is in some measure offset by the extensive use of books and 
 newspapers printed in the Hawaiian language, and by a postal system 
 which, under the circumstances, is a highly creditable one to the 
 
56 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 nation. By means of the newspapers the natives are kept fulb 
 informed about their own affairs, and receive considerable knowledge 
 of the great far-off world beyond the sea. That the papers and posts 
 system have been of great potency and utility to them is sufficiently 
 apparent. 
 
 Whoever wishes for a delightful and instructive journey will do wel 
 to visit these islands. They are only seven days' sail from San Fran 
 cisco in a first-class steamer, and across an ocean which is rareb 
 troubled with storms. He will find scenery as beautiful as any in tin- 
 world and as novel as it is beautiful. He will find charming sociel 
 among his own people residing there, and unbounded hospitality, 
 he is philosophically disposed he will find many instructive subjects 
 for his contemplation. If, without forgetting for a moment the splendor 
 of the civilization in which he has been reared, he can rise above its 
 prejudices, and if he is able to study men and human society from a 
 relative rather than an arbitrary standpoint, and judge them according 
 to the fundamental principles of human nature, he will find his own 
 humanities greatly enlarged and he will be much instructed and bene- 
 fited. 
 
 VIII. Also the following paper prepared by hon. sanford b. 
 
 DOLE AND READ BEFORE THE HAWAIIAN HISTORICAL SOCIETY 
 DECEMBER 5, 1892. 
 
 [Papers of the Hawaiian Historical Society No. 3.] 
 
 Evolution of Hawaiian Land Tenures. 
 
 [Read before tbe Hawaiian Historical Society, December 5, 1892, by the Hon. Sanford B. Dole.] 
 
 When the Hawaiian pilgrim fathers first landed on the lonely coast 
 of Hawaii from their long and exhausting ocean voyage in their canoes 
 decked with mats and rigged with mat sails, it was for them a new 
 departure in government and social and indus trial economy. Their past, 
 with its myths of origin, its legends of struggling and wandering, its 
 faiths and customs, and rites and ceremonies, its lessons of victory and 
 defeat, its successes over nature, was still their present authority and 
 paramount influence, as they feebly began a new sosial enterprise upon 
 the desolate yet grand and beautiful shores of their new inheritance. 
 
 Their past still held them through its venerable sanctions, and yet 
 they were free in the freedom of a new and unoccupied land to add to 
 its accumulations and to improve on its lessons. 
 
 We may imagine that the remnant of the freight of their storm-worn 
 canoes included a few household idols, a live pig or two, some emaciated 
 chickens, a surviving bread-fruit plant, fcow, and other seeds. 
 
 There were women as well as men in the company; the little children 
 had succumbed to the hardships of the voyage which was undertaken 
 to escape the indignities and confiscations incident to the status of a 
 defeated party in tribal warfare. 
 
 These people, lean and half- famished, gladly and with fresh courage 
 took possession of their new world. As soon as they recovered their 
 strength they built a heiau* and sacrificed to their gods. 
 
 After a little exploration they settled in a deep valley sheltered by 
 steep cliifs and watered by an abundant stream of clear water, abound- 
 ing in fish and shrimps. At the mouth of the gorge was the sea, where 
 
 * Heiau — temple. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 57 
 
 there were shellfish, crabs, and a variety of fish. Fruits of various 
 kinds nourished on the hillsides, some of which they were acquainted 
 with, while others were new to them. They found varieties of the 
 Jccupa* plant, and understanding the process of making its bark into 
 cloth, they restored their wardrobes which had for the most part dis- 
 appeared in the vicissitudes of the voyage. They also discovered the 
 taro] growing wild in mountain streams, which they hailed as an old 
 friend, feeling that now their satisfaction with their new home was 
 complete. The cultivation of this was begun at once as a field or dry- 
 land crop, as had been the practice in the home land, but as time went 
 on and some crops failed for want of rain, irrigation was used, until 
 at length, it may have been generations after, the present method of 
 cultivating the crop in permanent patches of standing water became 
 established. This result was greatly favored by the abundance of 
 running water, which w r as a feature of the country. 
 
 Children were born and grew up and intermarried, and the colony 
 grew and prospered. Exploring parties went out from time to time, and 
 other watered valleys were found, and bays and reefs rich in fishing 
 resources. As the community began to crowd the limited area of the 
 valley which was their first resting place, one and another of these newly 
 discovered and favored localities was settled, generally by a family con- 
 sisting of the parents and grown-up boys and girls. And now and then 
 new companies of exiles from the southern islands found their weary 
 way over the ocean, bringing, perhaps, later customs and adding new 
 gods to the Hawaiian pantheon. 
 
 So Haw r aii was gradually populated, and when its best localities were 
 occupied, Maui began to be colonized, and then its adjacent islands, 
 until the whole group was stocked with people. 
 
 There may have been a few chiefs in the pioneer company who largely 
 directed the affairs of the colony, and whose descendants furnished 
 chiefs for the growing demands of the branch colonies. Among the new 
 arrivals also from the outside world were occasional chiefs, who were 
 hospitably welcomed and accredited as such, and accorded correspond- 
 ing position and influence. 
 
 It is also probable that in the very early period when chiefs were 
 scarce the head men of some of the settlements which had branched 
 off from the parent colony acquired the rank of chiefs, from the impor- 
 tance of their positions and the influence which their authority over 
 the lands of their respective settlements naturally gave them. Such 
 acquired rank descended to their children, in some cases doubtless 
 with an increase of dignity due to marriages with women of chief rank; 
 and so some new families of chiefs, originating from the common peo- 
 ple or malmainanas,% were established. 
 
 This early period of Hawaiian history for a number of generations 
 was a time of industrial enterprise and peaceful and prosperous growth. 
 There was no occasion for fighting, for there was land and water enough 
 for all and every one was busily employed. It w r as the golden age of 
 Hawaii. There were taboos^ indeed, but only religious ones. No chief 
 was powerful enough yet to proclaim taboos for political purposes, nor 
 had the necessities for political taboos yet arisen. The arts prospered ; 
 the Hawaiian canoe developed; the manufacture of kapa flourished 
 and made progress in the direction of variety of fabric and its esthetic 
 finish and decoration ; royal garments of birds' feathers were manufac- 
 
 *Kapa — native cloth. t Malmainanas — common people, 
 
 t Taro— arum esculentum. § Taboo— -repressive enactment. 
 
58 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 tured; implements of stone and of wood for mechanical and industrial 
 work were invented and improved upon ; and great engineering enter- 
 prises were taken, such as the irrigating systems of Wakiawa, Kapaa, 
 and Kilauea on the island of Kauai, and great seawalls inclosing bjys 
 and reefs for fish-ponds, such as the one at Huleia, on Kauai, and at 
 many other places all over the islands. The antiquity of some of these 
 is so great that even tradition fails to account for their origin, as in the 
 case of the parallel irrigating ditches at Kilauea, on Kauai, the dig- 
 ging of which is attributed by the Hawaiian s to the fabled moo, or 
 dragon, and the deep water fish-pond wall at the Huleia Eiver, on 
 Kauai, which is supposed to have been built by the Menehunes — the 
 fabled race of dwarfs, distinguished for cunning industry and mechanical 
 and engineering skill and intelligence. In reality they were the pio- 
 neers of the Hawaiian race, who took complete industrial and peaceful 
 possession of the country, and this early period is distinctly the age of 
 the Menehunes, or skillful workers. 
 
 Principles of land tenure developed slowly through this period, proba- 
 bly from some form of the patriarchal system into a system of tribal 
 or communal ownership. There was laud enough for everyone, and 
 holdings at first were based upon possession and use. 
 
 As in the irrigating customs of the Hawaiians, where there was an 
 abundance of water, every taro grower used it freely and at all times 
 according to his own convenience, and there were no regulations, but 
 in those localities where the watersupply was limited strict rules for 
 its distribution grew up ; so that when the land was not all occupied 
 there was freedom in its use, it being easier to locate new holdings than 
 to quarrel about old ones. 
 
 But as land irrigation developed, requiring permanent and costly 
 improvements in the way of irrigating ditches and the building of ter- 
 races on the valley slopes for the foundation of taro patches, such 
 improved localities acquired a special value, and the more real sense of 
 ownership in land, which is based upon an investment of labor in the 
 soil beyond the amount required for the cultivation of a crop, began. 
 A quality of this ownership was necessarily permanence, because of 
 the permanence of the improvements which created it. 
 
 Another element of tenure arose as the population increased, and the 
 best lands became occupied; the increasing demand gave them a mar- 
 ket value, so to speak, which gave rise to disputes over boundaries. 
 Although such feuds, sometimes attended with personal violence, 
 favored the development of the later feudalism of the Hawaiians, yet 
 the early period, containing many of the features of tribal government 
 and land tenure common to the Samoans, Fijians, and Maories of New 
 Zealand, probably lasted for a long time, with a gradual development of 
 the principle of ownership in land and descent from parent to child, 
 subject to tribal control, until it was perhaps radically and violently 
 intemrpted by the turbulent times beginning in the thirteenth century, 
 and lasting until the conquest of the group by Kamehameha I. This was 
 a period of internecine warfare, promoted by the ambition of chiefs for 
 political power and personal aggrandizement, and was most favorable 
 to the growth of feudalism, which rapidly took the place of the previous 
 political status. As was inevitable under the new conditions, the 
 importance and influence of the chiefs was greatly increased, to the 
 immediate prejudice of the rights and privileges of the people, who 
 were oppressively taxed in support of the wars brought on by the whim 
 of their respective rulers, or to defend them from the attacks of ambi- 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 59 
 
 tious rivals. The growing necessity for protection of life and p /operty 
 caused everyone to attach himself closely to some chief, who afforded 
 such protection in consideration of service and a portion of the pro- 
 duce of the soil. Then the chiefs, as their power increased, began to 
 levy contributions of supplies arbitrarily, until it came to pass that the 
 chief was the owner of the whole of the products of the soil and of the 
 entire services of the people, and so it was a natural consequence that 
 he became finally the owner also of the soil itself. These results, which 
 were hastened by the constant wars of this period, were yet of slow 
 growth. The small valley and district sovereignties one by one disap- 
 peared in the clutch of rising warrior chiefs, who thus added to their 
 dominions and power. As such principalities became formidable, it 
 became necessary for the remaining smaller chiefdoms to ally them- 
 selves to some one of them. And so this process went on until each 
 island was at length under the control of its high chief, and then 
 finally the whole group passed under the sovereignty of Kamehameha 
 I., and the feudal programme was complete. 
 
 During this period the control of land became very firmly established 
 in the ruling chiefs, who reserved what portions they pleased for their 
 own use and divided the rest among the leading chiefs subject to 
 them. The position of the latter was analogous $o that of the barons 
 of European feudalism; they furnished supplies to their sovereign, and 
 in case of war were expected to take the field with what fighting men 
 their estates could furnish. These barons held almost despotic sway 
 over their special domains, apportioning the land among their followers 
 according to the whim of the moment or the demands of policy, or 
 farming it out under their special agents, the Jconohilcis* whose oppress- 
 ive severity in dealing with the actual cultivators of the soil was 
 notorious. " Thus the occupancy of land had now become entirely sub- 
 ject to the will of the ruling chief, who not only had the power to give 
 but also to take away at his royal pleasure. This despotic control 
 over land developed in the direction of greater severity rather than 
 toward any recognition of the subjects' rights, and it finally became an 
 established custom for a chief who succeeded to the sovereign power, 
 even peacefully by inheritance, to redistribute the lands of the realm. 
 
 It is evident that this status was, for the time being, disastrous and 
 destructive to all popular rights in land that may have previously 
 existed. If there was formerly anything like succession in tenure from 
 father to son and tribal ownership, such holdings were now utterly 
 destroyed, and the cultivators of the soil were without rights of culti- 
 vation or even of habitation. "The count; was full of people who 
 were hemo, i. e. dispossessed of their lands at the caprice of a chief. 
 Three words from a new to a former Jconohiki* — c JJa hemo oe J ] — would 
 dispossess a thousand unoffending people and send them houseless and 
 homeless to find their makamalcas% in other valleys." (Alexander's 
 reply to Bishop "Staley.) 
 
 The redistribution of lands upon the accession of a ruling chief was 
 
 naturally carried out with great severity when his accession was the 
 
 result of civil war between rival factions or the triumph of an invading 
 
 army. In the case of a peaceful accession of a young chief to sover- 
 
 I eign power, the redistribution was mainly to his personal friends and 
 
 I companions, and was less complete than in the case of a revolution of 
 
 ! force. Yery influential men of the previous reign would not be dis- 
 
 *Konohiki — land agent of chief. \Ua hemooe — you are removed. 
 
 t Makamaka — friend. 
 
60 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 turbed, both because it would be dangerous and impolitic to do sojl 
 and because their assistance was desired. A curious survival of thin 
 feudal custom of redistribution of power and land upon the accession 
 of a new ruler is recognizable in the equally reprehensible sentimenfl 
 of modern politics expressed in the well-known words, " to the victor J 
 belong the spoils." 
 
 When Kamehameha I conquered the group, excepting the island of 
 Kauai, which was accomplished only after the most desperate fighting! 
 his success carried with it the fullest and severest application of this 
 custom, and it meant to his defeated enemies loss of all political powen 
 and of the lands which were the basis of such power. The island of 
 Kauai, through the treaty of annexation between the King of that 
 island, Kaumualii, and Kamehameha, might have escaped such misl 
 fortunes but for the rebellion of Humehume, the son of KaumnaliiJ 
 some years later, which, being suppressed, subjected the insurgent 
 chiefs to the rigorous rule of confiscation of their lands and the annihi-1 
 lation of their political influence. 
 
 Thus Kamehameha became at last, through these feudal customs and 
 by virtue of his conquest, the fountain head of land tenures for the 
 whole group. The principles adopted by the land commission in 1847 
 opens with the following statement: 
 
 "When the islands were conquered by Kamehameha I he followed; 
 the example of his predecessors and divided the lands among his prinl 
 cipal warrior chiefs, retaining, however, a portion in his hands to be cul-l 
 tivated or managed by his own immediate servants or attendants J 
 Each principal chief divided his lands anew, and gave them out to an] 
 inferior order of chiefs or persons of rank, by whom they were subdi-t! 
 vided again and again, passing through the hands of four, five, or sin 
 persons, from the King down to the lowest class of tenants. All these 
 persons were considered to have rights in the lands or the productions 
 of them. The proportions of these rights were not very clearly defined, 
 but were, nevertheless, universally acknowledged." 
 
 During Kamehamena's long and vigorous reign affairs became set- 
 tled to an extent to which the country had been unaccustomed. Long 
 and undisturbed possession of their lands by chiefs was a preparation 
 for the development of a sentiment favorable to permanent individual 
 rights in land. Such a sentiment had become well defined in the mind 
 of Kamehameha before his death, and may be regarded as the seed 
 germ of the system of land tenures which afterwards developed. 
 
 Many of those who have been interested in this subject have been~ 
 accustomed to regard the idea of private rights in land in these islands 
 as one of foreign introduction during the reign of Kamehameha III, at 
 which time the remarkable change from feudal to private real estate 
 control took place. But the landed reforms of that reign were the 
 results of causes which had been long and powerfully at work. The 
 century plant had slowly grown, but when its full time came it swiftly 
 and abundantly blossomed. 
 
 At the meeting of chiefs at Honolulu, upon the arrival of the frigate 
 Blonde, in 1825, with the remains of Kamehameha II and his wife, to 
 consider the question of the succession to the throne and other mat- 
 ters, as reported in the Yoyage of the Blonde, page 152 and following, 
 Kalaimoku, the regent, in his address to the council, referred to the 
 inconveniences arising from the reversion of lands to the King on the 
 death of their occupants — a custom partially revived under Kame- 
 hameha II, but which it had been the object of Kamehameha I to 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 61 
 
 (exchange for that of hereditary succession. This project of their great 
 King he proposed to adopt as the law, excepting in such cases as when 
 a chief or landholder should infringe the laws, then his lands should 
 [be forfeited and himself tabooed. Several chiefs at once exclaimed: 
 "All the laws of the great Kamehameha were good; let us have the 
 same!" 
 
 Lord Byron, captain of the Blonde, presented the council some writ- 
 ten suggestions iu regard to the administration of affairs which are 
 contained the following article: "That the lands which are now held 
 by the chiefs shall not be taken from them, but shall descend to their 
 legitimate children, except in cases of rebellion, and then all their prop- 
 erty shall be forfeited to the King." The account proceeds as follows 
 (page 157): "These hints, it will be at once perceived, are little more 
 than a recommendation quietly to pursue the old habits and regulations 
 of the islands. Kamehameha I had begun to establish the hereditary 
 transmission of estates, and Lord Byron's notice only adds the sanction 
 of the British name to it." 
 
 This principle, adopted previous to the reign of Kamehameha III, 
 greatly influenced the progress of events. 
 
 When, after the death of Kamehameha I, his son, Liholiho, came to 
 the throne as Kamehameha II, the administration of the Government 
 was shared with him by Kaahumanu, the Kuhina Wwi* one of Kameha- 
 meha' s widows, and a woman of great force of character. It was the 
 desire of Kamehameha II to make a redistribution of the lands of the 
 realm according to custom, but Kaahumanu was opposed to it, and her 
 influence, together with the united strength of the landed interests 
 which had become firmly established in the chiefs during the long reign 
 of Kamehameha I, was too strong for him, and beyond a few assign- 
 ments among his intimate friends, he relinquished his purpose. The 
 distribution of lands therefore by Kamehameha I remained for the most 
 part as a permanent settlement of the landed interests of the Kingdom, 
 to be afterwards modified in favor of the common people and the Gov- 
 ernment, but never ignored. 
 
 During the period from the distribution of lands by Kamehameha I, 
 about 1795, till the year 1839, the sovereign held a feudal authority 
 over the whole landed estate of the Kingdom, which included the right, 
 as above set forth, summarily to cancel the rights in land of any chief 
 or commoner. There was a growing tendency, however, during this 
 period toward the provision in favor of the descent of lauds from 
 parent to child adopted by the chiefs upon the return of the Blonde, 
 and the feudal right of the sovereign over the land of the subject was 
 more rarely exercised as time went on. Increasing security in tenure 
 led to increasing activity in land transactions. Chiefs transferred lands 
 to others, and they became a marketable commodity. There was buying 
 and selling — some speculating. The sovereign gave away and sold 
 lands here and there. Foreigners became landholders. Still there 
 was no permanence in the tenure, the enactment by the chiefs at the 
 time of the Blonde being in the nature rather of an expression of an 
 opinion than a binding law. The Kingdom then was under the regency 
 of Kaahumanu and Kalanimoku, and Kamehameha III, being still a 
 minor, was not a party to this provision and it was not regarded as 
 binding upon him. 
 
 The status of land matters at this time was similar to that which 
 existed in England after the Norman conquest, but here the progress 
 of events, owing undoubtedly to the influence of a foreign civilization, 
 
 * Kuhina Nui— -a premier or minister having a veto on the King's acts. 
 
62 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 was far more rapid than there. The possession of land by foreigners 
 with strong governments back of them, represented here by men oi 
 war and zealous consuls, had a stimulating effect upon this movement! 
 It was a transition period ; the strength of the feudal despotism was 
 fast waning and there was as yet nothing of a positive nature to take its] 
 place. This uncertainty in regard to land tenure was a serious obstacle tol 
 material progress. The large 1 audholders — the chiefs an d some to whonj 
 they had given or sold lands — felt a degree of security in their holdings 
 through the growing sentiment toward permanent occupation and 
 hereditary succession; but this was insufficient to place land matter* 
 upon a satisfactory footing and to justify extensive outlays in permal 
 n§nt improvements. But that class of occupiers of land known as ten J 
 ants, which class included a large proportion of the common people, 
 was still in a condition which had scarcely felt the favorable influences 
 which had begun to improve the status of the chiefs. They were hardly 
 recognized has having civil rights, although they enjoyed freedom of 
 movement and were not attached to any particular lands as belongings 
 of the soil. If a man wanted a piece of land to live on and to cultivate 
 he had to pay for it by a heavy rent in the shape of regular weekly, 
 labor for his landlord, with the additional liability of being called upon 
 to assist in work of a public character, such as building a heiau on 
 making a road or fish-pond sea wall. With all this the tenant was liable^ 
 to be ejected from his holding without notice or chance of redress! 
 That this defenseless condition of the common people was rigorously! 
 taken advantage of by the landholding chiefs and their JconohiJcis, wel 
 have the evidence of those living in this period, including some of the! 
 early missionaries, that it was a feature of the times that large nunvj 
 bers of homeless natives were wandering about the country. Thisj 
 want of security in the profits of land cultivation led many to attach i 
 themselves to the persons of the chiefs as hangers-on, whereby they 
 might be at least fed in return for the desultory services which they| 
 were called upon to perform in that capacity. This practice of hang- j 
 ing-on or of following a chief for the sake of food was a feature of the! 
 perfected feudalism, when insecurity of land tenure was at its height,* 
 and the word defining it — lioopilimeaai* — probably originated at that 
 period. 
 
 In 1833, Kamehameha III, then 20 years old, assumed the throne, I 
 and soon became deeply interested in public affairs. In many waysj 
 the unsatisfactory status of land matters was pressed upon his atten- 
 tion. The growing sentiment toward permanence in tenure powerfully 
 influenced the situation. The defenseless and wretched condition of 
 the common people in regard to their holdings appealed to his human- " 
 ity and to his sense of responsibility as their ruler. The inconsistency 
 of his sovereign control of all the lands of the Kingdom with any prog- 
 ress based upon the incoming tide of civilization became more and 
 more evident every day. The increasing demand among foreigners : i 
 for the right to buy and hold land was an element of importance at j 
 this national crisis and doubtless had much to do in hastening the 
 course of events. The King not only consulted the great chiefs of thei 
 realm, who certainly were in favor of permanence in tenure for them- 1 
 selves, but he also conferred with foreigners on the subject. In 1836 
 Commodore Kennedy and Capt. Hollins visited Honolulu in the 
 U. S. ships Peacock and Enterprise, and during their stay held 
 conferences with the chiefs, in which the question of land tenure j 
 was discussed. In 1837, Capt. Bruce of the British frigate Imogene 
 
 * Hoopilimeaai — adhering for food. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 63 
 
 had several meetings with the chiefs in regard to matter j of govern- 
 ment, when, in all probability, land matters were considered. The 
 influence of Mr. Richards, for a long time the confidential adviser of 
 the chiefs was undoubtedly very gre^t with the King in leading his 
 mind to the definite conclusion which he reached in 1839, in which 
 year, on the 7th day of June, he proclaimed a bill of rights which 
 has made his name illustrious, and the day on which it was 
 announced worthy of being forever commemorated by the Hawaiian 
 people. This document, though showing in its phrases the influ- 
 ence of Anglo-Saxon principles of liberty, of Robert Burns and the 
 American Declaration of Independence, is especially interesting and 
 impressive as the Hawaiian Magna Charta, not wrung from an unwil- 
 ling sovereign by force of arms, but the free surrender of despotic 
 power by a wise and generous ruler, impressed and influenced by the 
 logic of events, by the needs of his people, and by the principles of the 
 new civilization that was dawning on his land. 
 
 The following is the translation of this enlightened and munificent 
 royal grant: 
 
 "God hath made of one blood all nations of men to dwell on the 
 earth in unity and blessedness. God hath also bestowed certain 
 rights alike on all men and all chiefs and all people of all lands. 
 
 " These are some of the rights which He has given alike to every man 
 and every chief of correct deportment; life, limb, liberty, freedom from 
 oppression, the earnings of his hands and the productions of his mind — 
 not, however, to those who act in violation of the laws. 
 
 "God has also established government and rule for the purpose of 
 peace; but in making laws for the nation it is by no means proper to 
 enact laws for the protection of the rulers only, without also providing 
 protection for their subjects; neither is it proper to enact laws to enrich 
 the chiefs only, without regard to enriching their subjects also, and 
 hereafter there shall by no means be any laws enacted which are at 
 variance with what is above expressed, neither shall any tax be assessed, 
 nor any service or labor required of any man in a manner which is at 
 variance with the above sentiments. 
 
 "The above sentiments are hereby proclaimed for the purpose of pro- 
 tecting alike both the people and the chiefs of all these islands while 
 they maintain a correct deportment; that no chief may be able to 
 caress any subject, but that chiefs and people may enjoy the same 
 protection under one and the same law. 
 
 "Protection is hereby secured to the persons of all the people, together 
 with their lands, their building lots, and all their property, while 
 they conform to the laws of the kingdom, and nothing whatever shall 
 be taken from any individual except by express provision of the laws. 
 Whatever chief shall act perseveringly in violation of this declaration 
 shall no longer remain a chief of the Hawaiian Islands, and the same 
 shall be true of the governors, officers, and all land agents. But if 
 anyone who is deposed should change his course and regulate his con- 
 duct by law, it shall then be in the power of the chiefs to reinstate him 
 in the place he occupied previous to his being deposed." 
 
 It will be seen that this bill of rights left much to be done in defin- 
 ing the rights in land granted by it. It appears by the constitution 
 enacted by the King,* the Imhina nui, or premier, and the chiefs, the fol- 
 lowing year, that the feudal right of controlling transfers of land was 
 still retained in the Sovereign, in the following words: "Kamehameha 
 I. was the founder of the kingdom, and to him belonged all the land 
 from one end of the islands to the other, though it was not his own 
 private property. It belonged to the chiefs and people in common, 
 
64 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 of wlioin Kamehameha I. was the head and had the management of the 
 landed property. Wherefore there was not formerly and is not now, 
 any person who could or can convey away the smallest portion of land 
 without the consent of the one who had or has the direction of the 
 kingdom." 
 
 The bill of rights promoted activity in land matters, and for the next 
 few years difficulties arising from land disputes pressed upon the King, 
 producing great confusion and even endangering the autonomy of the 
 kingdom. In 1841, Ladd & Co., the pioneers in sugar cultivation in 
 this country, obtained from the King a franchise which gave them the 
 privilege of leasing any unoccupied lands for one hundred years at a 
 low rental. This franchise was afterwards transferred to a Belgian col- 
 onization company of which Ladd & Co. were partners, under circum- 
 stances that made a good deal of trouble for the Hawaiian Government 
 before the m atter finally disappeared from Hawaiian politics. The intim- 
 idation of the King by Lord Paulet, captain of the British frigate 
 Carysfort, under which the provisional cession of the country to Eng- 
 land was made in 1843, was based largely upon a land claim of Mr. 
 Charlton, an Englishman, which was regarded by the King as illegal, 
 but which he finally indorsed under Paulet- s threat of bombarding Hon- 
 olulu. These troubles naturally developed among the Hawaiians an 
 opposition against the policy of allowing foreigners to acquire land 
 which, in 1845, reached the definite stage of political agitation and peti- 
 tions to the Government. 
 
 During these years of undefined rights, the common people were pro- 
 tected in their holdings by law to a certain extent, but their tenure 
 was based mainly upon their industrious cultivation of their lands, 
 except as to house lots and the payment of rent in labor. 
 
 The question of the proportionate interests of the King, the chiefs, 
 and the common people in the lands of the kingdom was one of great 
 difficulty. As we have seen, the constitution of 1840 distinctly recog- 
 nized such a community of interest, but Hawaiian precedents threw no 
 light upon the problem of division. It had been a new departure to 
 admit that the people had any inherent right in the soil, and now to 
 carry out that principle required the adoption of methods entirely for- 
 eign to the traditions of Hawaiian feudalism. 
 
 In this transition time the necessity of an organized government sep- 
 arate from the person of the King, became apparent even to the chiefs, 
 and this was carried out by three comprehensive acts in 1845, 1846, and 
 1847. The first, "to organize the executive ministry of the Hawaiian 
 Islands;" the second, "to organize the executive departments of the 
 Hawaiian Islands;" and the third, "to organize the judiciary depart- 
 ment of the Hawaiian Islands." 
 
 As soon as the existence of a responsible government, detached from 
 the person of the King, became an accepted feature of the political sys- 
 tem, it was felt that in some way or other the Government ought to have 
 public lands and become the source of land titles. At its inception the 
 Government, as a distinct organization, was possessed of no landed 
 property ; it may be said to have had a right to that portion of the King's 
 interest in the landed property of the Kingdom which he held in his 
 official capacity, in distinction from that which belonged to him in his 
 private capacity; but this was a mere theoretic right, dimly recognized 
 at first, and only after innumerable difficulties and fruitless expedients 
 was it finally developed and carried out in the great mahele or division 
 of lands between King, chiefs, and people in 1848. Elaborate laws were 
 made for the purchase of land by the Government from private land- 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 65 
 
 holders which do not appear to have added materially to the public 
 domain. 
 
 The act to organize the executive department contained a statute 
 establishing a board of royal commissioners to quiet land titles. This 
 statute was passed December 10, 1845. It was a tentative scheme to 
 solve the land problem, and though not in itself sufficiently comprehen- 
 sive for the situation, it was in the right direction, and led, through the 
 announcement of principles of land tenure by the commission, which 
 were adopted by the Legislature, to a better understanding of the sub- 
 ject, and finally, in the latter part of 1847, to the enactment by the King 
 and privy council of rules for the division of the lands of the King- 
 dom, which, with the statute creating the land commission and the 
 principles adopted by them, formed a complete and adequate provision 
 for the adjustment of all recognized interests in land on the basis of the 
 new departure in the principles of tenure. 
 
 At the time of the creation of the board of commissioners to quiet 
 land titles and up to the enactment of rules by the privy council for 
 land division, the nation was still feeling its way through the maze of 
 the difficult questions which were pressing upon it in this great reform 
 in land matters. Each step which it made threw light upon the path 
 for the next one. The rapidity with which this reform was accom- 
 plished must be attributed not only to the wisdom and fidelity of the 
 advisers of the nation, but largely to the earnestness and patriotism of 
 the King and chiefs, who cheerfully made great sacrifices of authority 
 and interest for the sake of a satisfactory solution of these questions. 
 
 The commissioners to quiet land titles were authorized to consider 
 claims to land from private individuals, acquired previous to the pas- 
 sage of the act creating the commission. This included natives who 
 were in the occupancy of holdings under the conditions of use or pay- 
 ment of rent in labor, and also both natives and foreigners who had 
 received lands from the King or chiefs in the way of grants. The 
 awards of the board were binding upon the Government if not appealed 
 from, and entitled the claimant to a lease or a royal patent, according 
 to the terms of the award, the royal patent being based upon the pay- 
 ment of a commutation of one-fourth or one-third of the unimproved 
 value of the land, which commutation was understood to purchase the 
 interest of the Government in the soil. 
 
 The principles adopted by the land commission use the words King 
 and Government interchangeably, and failed to reach any adjudication 
 of the separate rights of the King in distinction from those of the Gov- 
 ernment in the public domain, or, in other words, they failed to define 
 the King's public or official interests in distinction from his private rights, 
 although they fully recognized the distinction. There was, however, an 
 implied apportionment of these two interests through the proceedings 
 by which an occupying claimant obtained an allodial title. The com- 
 mission decided that their authority coming from the King to award lands 
 represented only his private interests in the lands claimed. Therefore, 
 as the further payment of the claimant as a condition of his receiving 
 a title in fee simple from the Government was one-third of the original 
 value of the land, it follows that the King's private interest was an undi- 
 vided two-thirds, leaving an undivided one-third belonging to the Gov- 
 ernment as such. 
 
 The commission also decided that there were but three classes of 
 vested or original rights in land, which were in the King or Govern- 
 ment, the chiefs, and the people, and these three classes of interests 
 were about equal in extent. 
 
 The land commission began to work February 11 ; 1846, and made 
 S, Sep. 227 5 
 
66 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 great progress iD adjudicating the claims of the common people, but 
 its powers were not adequate to dispose of the still unsettled questions 
 between the King, the chiefs, and the Government, though it must be 
 admitted that it made progress in that direction. Neither was the 
 chiefs ready to submit their claims to its decision. 
 
 After earnest efforts between the King and chiefs to reach a settle- 
 ment of these questions, the rules already referred to were unanimously 
 adopted by the King and chiefs in privy council December 18, 1847. 
 These rules, which were drawn up by Judge Lee, embodied the follow- 
 ing points: The King should retain his private lands as his individual 
 property, to descend to his heirs and successors; the remainder of the 
 landed property to be divided equally between the Government, the 
 chiefs, and the common people. 
 
 As the land was all held at this time by the King, the chiefs, and 
 their tenants, this division involved the surrender by the chiefs of a 
 third of their lands to the Government, or a payment in lieu thereof in 
 money, as had already been required of the tenant landholders. A 
 committee, of which Dr. Judd was chairman, was appointed to carry out 
 the division authorized by the privy council, and the work was com- 
 pleted in forty days. The division between the King and the chiefs 
 was effected through partition deeds signed by both parties. The chiefs 
 then went before the land commission and received awards for the 
 lands thus partitioned off to them, and afterwards many of them com- 
 muted for the remaining one-third interest of the Government by a 
 surrender of a portion. 
 
 After the division between the King and the chiefs was finished he 
 again divided the lands which had been surrendered to him between 
 himself and the Government, the former being known thereafter as 
 Grown lands and the latter as Government lands. 
 
 This division, with the remaining work of the land commission, 
 completed the great land reform, the first signal of which was 
 announced by Kamehameha III, in his declaration of rights, June 7, 
 1839. A brief ten years had been sufficient for the Hawaiian nation 
 to break down the hoary traditions and venerable customs of the past, 
 and to climb the difficult path from a selfish feudalism to equal rights, 
 from royal control of all the public domain to peasant proprietorship 
 and fee-simple titles for poor and for rich. It came quickly and without 
 bloodshed because the nation was ready for it. Foreign intercourse, 
 hostile and friendly, and the spirit of a Ghristian civilization had an 
 educating influence upon the eager nation, united by the genius of 
 Kamehameha I, with its brave and intelligent warrior chiefs resting 
 from the conquest of arms, their exuberant energies free for the con- 
 quest of new ideas; with rare wisdom, judgment, and patriotism they 
 proved equal to the demands of the time upon them. 
 
 IX. Also the following extract from the report of hon. 
 
 JOHN QUINCY ADAMS, CHAIRMAN OF THE COMMITTEE ON FOREIGN 
 AFFAIRS OF THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES. 
 
 "It is a subject of cheering contemplation to the friends of human 
 improvement and virtue, that by the mild and gentle influence of 
 Ghristian charity, dispensed by humble missionaries of the gospel, 
 unarmed with secular power 7 within the last quarter of a century, the 
 people of this group of islands have been converted from the lowest 
 debasement of idolatry to the blessings of the Ghristian gospel; united 
 under one balanced government; rallied to the fold of civilization by 
 a written language and constitution, providing security for the rights 
 of persons, property, and mind, and invested with all the elements of 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 67 
 
 right and power which can entitle them to be acknowledged by their 
 brethren of the human race as a separate and independent community. 
 To the consummation of their acknowledgment the people of the North 
 American Union are urged by an interest of their own, deeper than 
 that of any other portion of the inhabitants of the earth — by a virtual 
 right of conquest, not over the freedom of their brother man by the 
 brutal arm of physical power, but over the mind and heart by the celes- 
 tial panoply of the gospel of peace and love." 
 
 X. Also the following Hawaiian treaty and review of its 
 commercial results. 
 
 The Hawaiian Treaty. 
 a review of its commercial results. 
 
 The Hawaiian treaty was negotiated for the purpose of securing 
 political control of those islands, making them industrially and com^ 
 mercially a part of the United States and preventing any other great 
 power from acquiring a foothold there, which might be adverse to the 
 welfare and safety of our Pacific coast in time of war. They are situated 
 midway on the direct way from Panama to Hongkong and directly on 
 the shortest line from the Columbia Eiver or Puget Sound to Australia. 
 Here the two great lines of future commerce of the Pacific Ocean inter- 
 sect, and vessels must stop there for refreshment and refuge. 
 
 The islands prior to the treaty were declining in population, and 
 owing to the decay of the whale fishery, were declining in wealth. 
 Their soil is, perhaps, the most productive for sugar raising of any 
 known in the world. But the high tariff on sugar and the exceedingly 
 low wages which must be paid in tropical countries for raising sugar to 
 supply the United States rendered the industry difficult. In 1875 a 
 movement arose in the islands for the importation of Hindoo coolies to 
 supply the requisite cheap labor, and the consent of England was 
 promised. The growth of the Australian colonies had gradually devel- 
 oped an improving market for Hawaiian sugar, and, after a trial of it 
 by some of the Hawaiian planters, it was found that better prices 
 could be obtained in the free-trade port of Sydney than in San Fran- 
 cisco, and return cargoes could be bought there much more cheaply. 
 Preparations were making for sending there the entire crops of 1876- 
 ? 77. These matters came to the knowledge of the State Department. 
 The Hawaii ans had been pressing for many years for a commercial 
 treaty with the United States, but without success. It was now felt in 
 the State Department that the question was assuming graver impor- 
 tance, and, as political supremacy in the islands must inevitably follow 
 the commerce, it was recognized that this country must make favorable 
 concessions to them, or else let them follow the inevitable tendency 
 and drift slowly into the status of an English colony. The result was 
 the negotiation of the existing treaty and its ratification by the con- 
 sent of the Senate. The effect of the treaty was as follows : 
 
 It was anticipated that the remission of duties would make the profits 
 of sugar culture very great. But a sugar plantation requires for the 
 most economical work a large amount of capital, $500,000 being very 
 moderate for a single plantation, and $250,000 being about as small as 
 is prudent. The islanders had no capital of any consequence and were 
 obliged to borrow it from the United States (i. e., from or through the 
 mercantile houses of San Francisco who import their sugar and act as 
 agents to the planters for selling it to the refineries). The opening of 
 plantations proceeded rapidly until the output of sugar has now nearly 
 
68 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 reached the full capacity of the soil, and is seven or eight times greater 
 than in 1874-75. Our exports to the islands have increased in very 
 nearly the same ratio, being five or six times greater than in 1874- ? 75, 
 or, if measured in quantity rather than by price, are about seven times 
 as great. A new merchant marine has been created, consisting of 
 vessels built expressly for the service, costing over $3,500,000. Of this 
 total tonnage over 90 per cent is American built, and the rest was 
 bought. These mercantile houses, with their shipping, transact the 
 entire commerce both ways, and transport annually about $12,000,000 
 worth of merchandise at very high rates of freight, commission, and 
 exchange. 
 
 In general, the effect of the treaty has been to make the islands a 
 field for very profitable investment of American capital. It has created 
 a demand which would not have existed otherwise for American prod- 
 uce to an amount which may seem small ($23,000,000 in nine years) 
 when viewed in comparison with our total export, but which, when 
 viewed in connection with the fact that the population which has 
 made that demand is less than 80,000, is remarkably large. During 
 the last four years it has averaged about $40 per capita per annum, 
 and, if the transportation charges be added as they properly should 
 be, it will amount to over $50 per capita per annum. This is four or 
 1i\e times as much per capita as England or Canada buys of us. The 
 general-results of the trade may be seen in the following tables: 
 
 Values delivered by the United States to the Hawaiian Islands for nine years — 1876 
 
 to 1885. 
 
 Invoice value of United States exports to Hawaii $23, 686, 328 
 
 Bills of exchange to pay for all Hawaiian imports from third countries. 9, 868, 674 
 
 Difference between coin exported to and received from Hawaii 2, 222, 181 
 
 Outstanding liabilities of United States to Hawaii not known 
 
 Total values paid by United States 35,777, 183 
 
 To balance the account : 
 
 Profits already realized on merchandise account * $18, 414, 766 
 
 Cash debts payable to United States at maturity out of future shipments . 6, 500, 000 
 Increased values of productive properties in the islands owned by Amer- 
 icans 11,680,164 
 
 72, 372, 113 
 
 Values received and receivable by the United States from the Hawaiian Islands for nine 
 
 years— 1867 to 1885. 
 
 Invoice value of Hawaiian exports to the United States. . . $51, 294, 764 
 Add freight and insurance to obtain value in United States 
 ports 2,897,185 
 
 Value of merchandise received $54, 191, 949 
 
 Liabilities of the islands to the United States for advances on 
 
 crops 3,000,000 
 
 Bonded debts payable in United States and secured on 
 
 island property 2, 500, 000 
 
 Hawaiian Government bonds paid for % in silver, coined on 
 
 Hawaiian Government account '. 1, 000, 000 
 
 Total liabilities to United States 5,500,000 
 
 Increased value of plantation properties owned by United 
 
 States citizens, as assessed in 1883 10, 180, 164 
 
 Value of other productive properties 1, 500, 000 
 
 11,680,164 
 
 Total values received and receivable , , 72,372,113 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 63 
 
 General distribution of profits. 
 
 To American shipping: 
 
 Freights and insurance on imports from the islands... \ $2, 897, 185 
 
 Freights and insurance on exports 5, 127, 964 
 
 Passenger receipts • 1, 325, 000 
 
 $9,350,149 
 
 Commission on purchases for export to the islands 592, 158 
 
 Commission on sales of islands' produce 2, 209, 463 
 
 2, 801, 621 
 
 Premium on exchange 812, 839 
 
 Interest on loans and advances 2, 160, 000 
 
 Dividends and miscellaneous profits 3, 290, 157 
 
 Total profits already realized 18, 414, 766 
 
 Debts receivable held chiefly by the San Francisco banks 6, 500, 000 
 
 Increased values of productive properties owned by Americans 11, 735, 464 
 
 Total gross profits 36,650,230 
 
 1. In the foregoing table, beginning with values delivered, the first 
 item is the invoice value of our exports to the islands, as shown in the 
 Treasury statistics for the nine years. It is the home value, and, since 
 we are comparing San Francisco values with San Francisco values, 
 freights are not added. 
 
 2. The second item represents what we have paid in the form of bills 
 of exchange to settle the balance of trade against us. Since the 
 Hawaiians export almost nothing to third countries, but do import con- 
 siderable from them, it follows that they must draw upon shipments to 
 the United States to pay for all they import from third countries. 
 They have no other source of credit to draw upon. Hence turning to 
 Hawaiian official statistics we find their total imports in nine years to 
 have been $9,181,522. The freight and insurance must be added, and, 
 as these are known to be about 10 per cent of the value, we get 
 $10,099,674. Deducting $231,000, which is their total export to tkird 
 countries in nine years, and which liquidated just so much of their 
 indebtedness to third countries, we have $9,868,674 on merchandise 
 accounts, which we must pay in bills of exchange drawn in San Fran- 
 cisco against Hawaiian account and in favor of third countries^ 
 
 3. In further settlement of the balance of trade are coin remittances. 
 In nine years the excess of coin shipped to Hawaii over coin received 
 from Hawaii amounts to $2,222,181. Of this $1,000,000 was a silver 
 coinage for the Hawaiian Government struck at the San Francisco mint, 
 for which that Government gave its bonds for $1,000,000, which are now 
 held in this country. 
 
 If we have given Hawaii any other consideration it must be in the 
 form of obligations of some sort which do not appear in statistics. None 
 such are known, and in a small community like the islands, where 
 everybody's business is known to everybody else, it is hardly possible 
 that if any appreciable amount of them existed it would not be known. 
 As the Hawaiians are deeply in debt to the United States it is not 
 likely that any such obligations of importance exist. This side of the 
 exhibit is therefore as complete as present knowledge can make it. 
 On the other side of the account we have: 
 
 (1) Value of Hawaiian exports to the United States, $51,294,764. 
 This is the invoice value at Honolulu. As we are comparing San Fran- 
 cisco values with San Francisco values it is necessary to add freights 
 and insurance. (The American consul at Honohdu requires invoices to 
 state the values delivered, less cost of transportation.) This require- 
 ment, being a matter of indifference to shippers, is complied with. If 
 
70 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 the merchandise had to pay an ad valorem duty they would put the 
 invoice value as low as possible in accordance with the actual export 
 costs. 
 
 (2) Liabilities of the islands to the United States. — The sugar crop 
 is an enormously expensive one to raise. It requires fifteen to sixteen 
 months to mature, and employs hundreds of laborers to each planta- 
 tion and sugar mill. The planter must, therefore, borrow large amounts 
 of money to mature it, giving a lien upon the crop .as a security to his 
 factor. The factor in turn borrows the necessary amounts from the 
 San Francisco banks. On an average this lien amounts to nearly or 
 quite half the market value of the crop. I have estimated it for safety 
 at about one-third that value, or $3,000,000. 
 
 (3) Many plantations have also mortgaged debts held in San Fran- 
 cisco. The amount of these is not fully known ; but I am sure of at 
 least $2,500,000, and believe the real amount to be much more than 
 that. 
 
 (4) The value of the plantation properties held by Americans was 
 assessed by the Hawaiian Government in 1883 at $10,180,164. This 
 was assumed to be about two-thirds the real value. This value has 
 been created almost wholly since 1876 out of the ground, buildings, and 
 machinery.* 
 
 (5) Other productive properties held by Americans are the inter- 
 island mercantile marine, two railroads and equipment, a marine rail- 
 way, warehouses, etc., all of them the creation of the treaty. The esti- 
 mate of $1,500,000 is a very low one. The value of these properties far 
 exceeds the sum of their mortgages and capital stock indebtedness. 
 No man is rated in this argument as an American citizen unless he has 
 the right to vote in the United States tcithout naturalization and has the 
 right to the protection of our Government under public law. 
 
 The most striking feature of this exhibit is the very large profit to 
 the United States — so large that it seems at first unaccountable; but 
 the "great discrepancy between the exports and imports will vanish 
 when we take full account of the fact that the whole carrying trade and 
 mercantile business is ours in both directions. All economists regard 
 transportation and mercantile functions in the passage of commodities 
 from the purchaser to the consumer as a part of the production. To 
 the value of our produce at San Francisco must be added all further 
 accessions of value until it finally leaves our hands and passes into 
 those of the Hawaiian. Add, then, to the invoice value of our exports 
 the cost of transportation, commission, and insurance until we have put 
 the produce into the Hawaiian's hands, and the $36,000,000 becomes 
 not far from $44,000,000. It costs the Hawaiian not far from one- sixth 
 of the value of his crop to get it to San Francisco. Deduct that from 
 $54,000,000 and we have $45,000,000. Thus if we reckon Hawaiian 
 values against Hawaiian values the exchange becomes less unequal, as 
 it should, for the real exchange takes place in Hawaii. It is there that 
 
 * This is reckoned as profit for the following reasons : Among the commodities 
 whieh we send to the islands, and also among those which we buy in Europe and 
 send there on Hawaiian account, are machinery, building materials, etc. These are 
 used in construction. The labor which is employed, the improvements which come 
 from cultivation, and the natural appreciation of land make up together the final 
 value of the property. The cash outlay directly applied to the creation of this value 
 is, of course, small in comparison with that value. Whatever cash value has been so 
 applied is already accounted for and included in the table showing values delivered 
 to Hawaii. The value of the properties thereby acquired should of course appear 
 on the other side of the account, and also in the list of profits, for such it clearly is. 
 It pertains, however, to the capital-stock account and not to simple mercantile profit. 
 The figures here given largely understate the value of these jjroperties. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 4 71 
 
 our own products finally leave our hands, and it is there that Hawaiian 
 values first come into our hands. 
 
 The Committee on Ways and Means, seeing' that our exports in nine 
 years have shown on invoice value of $23,000,000, while our imports 
 show $54,000,000, have hastily concluded that the apparent balance of 
 trade against us of $31,000,000 had to be liquidated in coin aud exchange. 
 In fact, only about $13,000,000 is liquidated in that way, and the 
 $18,000,000 remaining is paid over to our own people and may be reck- 
 oned as a gross profit already realized. Over $9,000,000 has gone to 
 American shipping, nearly $3,000,000 to San Francisco commission 
 houses, nearly a million to the banks, over $2,000,000 for interest on 
 loans and advances, and over $3,000,000 as dividends and miscellane- 
 ous profits. 
 
 In addition to this we hold $6,500,000 of Hawaiian debts which 
 they must liquidate out of future shipments, and have created 
 $15,000,000 worth of magnificent productive properties in the islands 
 out of the soil by the combined action of capital and labor. It would 
 be difficult to find in all the annals of trade and production a result 
 more gratifying. 
 
 The Committee on Ways and Means have taken it for granted that 
 the loss of revenue to the Treasury is equal to the computed remission 
 of duty. This is a grave error. 
 
 First. The tariff on sugar for more than twenty years has been so 
 graduated as to become more and more forbidding, and, finally, pro- 
 hibitory as the grade and quality of raw sugar increases. This excludes 
 all eatable raw sugar from the grocery trade and makes it more profit- 
 able to the refiner to buy the lowest grades he can get. But it raw 
 sugar is duty free, it is the interest of the refiner to buy the highest 
 grades and the interest of the planter to make them. Accordingly the 
 Hawaiian planter makes the highest grades, not exceeding No. 20, 
 above which grade he must pay duty. 
 
 But without the treaty he would do as the Cuban does, i. e., make 
 them of as low grade as possible, so as to pay the minimum duty. The 
 Committee on VVays and Means has computed the remitted duties on 
 Hawaiian sugar as actually imported in the highest grades at $3.18 
 per cwt. prior to June 30, 1883, and $2.40 per cwt. subsequently 5 but 
 Hawaiian sugars, which would have been imported had the treaty never 
 existed, would have been in lower grades and paying presumably the 
 same average duty as all imported sugars. This was, prior to 1883, 
 about $3.41 per cwt. and about $1.96 subsequently. Of course we can 
 not reckon a duty we never could have collected, as a loss of revenue. 
 
 Instead, therefore, of losing on sugar $23,000,000 in nine years the 
 loss has not been ovef $18,000,000. 
 
 Second. But this loss must have had very large compensations to the 
 Treasury. Fully five-sixths of the Hawaiian crop has been bought and 
 paid for by exports, transportation services, and otherwise, for which 
 the treaty has created a demand, and for which no demand would have 
 existed elsewhere without the treaty. Our exports to third countries 
 could not possibly have been diminished by it. Now, the free entry of 
 Hawaiian sugar has no doubt caused us to purchase from third coun- 
 tries less dutiable sugar. Obviously the exported values withheld from 
 the purchase of dutiable sugar remain available for other purchases. 
 The full value of our exports must come back to us somehow, and if we 
 get less dutiable sugar we must get just sq much more of something 
 else. The only question is whether this " more of something else" pays 
 as much duty as the su^ar would have paid. Probably it does no't; 
 and so far there is* a loss, because some of these residual values come 
 
72 • HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 back in the shape of duty-free articles and because the duty on sugar 
 is higher (computed ad valorem) than the average of our total imports. 
 A part of the California bullion and wheat and wine sent to England 
 pays for Hawaiian sugar, which is duty free. About one sixth of the 
 Hawaiian crop is thus paid for, and to that proportion there is a total 
 loss of revenue. While it is impossible to compute what the real loss 
 is, I think it safe to say that it probably does not exceed one-third, and 
 certainly does not amount to one-half of the $18,000,000 computed as 
 lost on sugar. In any event the duty never leaves the country. It is 
 paid over by the refinery to the consignee of the Hawaiian, and is paid 
 out again, with much more besides, to American shipping, banks, mer- 
 chants, and stockholders. The gross profit of $36,000,000 throws into 
 insignificance the possible loss of $6,000,000 or $8,000,000 of revenue. 
 
 It has been said repeatedly that all the profits of this magnificent 
 trade and industry go to the benefit of Olaus Spreckels and a small 
 clique of speculators. What nonsense! If it did, he would richly 
 deserve it, and a vote of thanks by Congress besides. 
 
 It will be going to the root of^the matter at once to say that the 
 opposition to the treaty has arisen from the systematic and in some 
 measure successful attempts to saturate the public press and Congress 
 with utterly false ideas about Claus Spreckels and his relation to the 
 islands, to create a bitter personal prejudice against him, and by impli- 
 cation to illogically and unjustly extend that prejudice to the commerce 
 and industries of the Hawaiian Islands. Claus Spreckels certainly has 
 for many years monopolized the manufacture and sale of refined sugars 
 on the Pacific coast, and ruled that market to the extent of his powers 
 with a rod of iron. But the first grand mistake consists in supposing 
 that the Hawaiian treaty has or could have given any assistance to 
 the establishment of his monopoly or to its maintenance or confer upon 
 it any benefit whatever. The second mistake consists in wholly false 
 impressions about the wholly distinct personal relations of Mr. Spreckels 
 to the industry and commerce of raw sugar. In these he is only one 
 of many men, and though individually his relations are large, yet rel- 
 atively to the whole they are small, and he can no more control the 
 whole than the Cunard Company can control our commerce with 
 England. As a monopolist of refined sugar he can not escape the odium 
 which always attaches to a monopoly. As a planter and stockholder, as 
 a director of an American steamship company, and a banker, his whole 
 career and course of conduct will compare favorably with that of any 
 great and successful merchant in America. 
 
 The monopoly of refined sugar in San Francisco is, like all other 
 monopolies, a perfectly legitimate object of attack; and if it can be 
 broken up in any way such an end is devoutly to be wished. 
 
 But Claus Spreckels's relations to the island trade and industry are 
 a totally different matter, and when rightly understood will present 
 themselves to the unprejudiced mind in a totally different aspect. In 
 this field his operations are perfectly legitimate. It is my jmrpose to 
 point out that any attempt to terminate the treaty is simply an attempt 
 to strengthen and fortify his monopoly and to break down commenda- 
 ble enterprises which should be built up and sustained, and in which 
 Claus Spreckels is merely one of many participants. Whatever dam- 
 age might be inflicted upon him in respect to his island interest would 
 be more than compensated to him out of enlarged profits of his monop- 
 oly as a refiner, while the blow would fall with full and disastrous 
 effect upon thousands of innocent third parties, both in Hawaii and 
 California, whose interests should be dear to Congress and to the Ameri- 
 can people. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 73 
 
 The Hawaiian treaty lias become an object of attack by the sugar- 
 refining interest of the Eastern States and of the sugar-planting inter- 
 ests of Louisiana. The motives which have led to this attack are as 
 follows: 
 
 During the last few years the sales of sugar imported from Hawaii, 
 Manila, and Central America, and refined in San Francisco, have 
 been extending gradually into the markets of the Mississippi Valley, 
 advancing further eastward every year, thereby displacing the sales of 
 eastern sugars in the States and Territories west of the Mississippi 
 Eiver. The Eastern refiners and the Louisiana planters believe that 
 the possibility of this arises from the free entry of Hawaiian sugars, 
 thus enabling (as they suppose) the San Francisco refiners to purchase 
 raw sugar much more cheaply than they otherwise could. Thus they 
 believe that the treaty discriminates severely against their interests, 
 and is unjust to them. 
 
 This position is denied by the San Francisco refiners and importers 
 of sugar and by the owners of Hawaiian sugar properties in California. 
 They contend that the San Francisco refineries get their raw sugar no 
 cheaper by reason of the treaty, but are obliged to pay the same price 
 for it as for equivalent dutiable sugar from Asia; that the ability of 
 the Pacific refiners to compete successfully with the Atlantic refiners 
 is founded upon conditions wholly independent of the treaty, viz : First, 
 because unlimited amounts of Asiatic sugar can be laid down in San 
 Francisco cheaper than raw sugars can be laid down in New York; 
 second, because through eastward freights over the Pacific railways 
 are scantier than westward through freights, and the railroads natur- 
 ally prefer to carry sugar at low rates to hauling empty cars. They 
 contend that this competition is a natural one; that it is not helped 
 by the treaty and will not be hindered by its abrogation; that it is des- 
 tined to grow, and would grow if the Hawaiian Islands did not exist. 
 
 Since it is also claimed by the opponents of the treaty that it fosters 
 and sustains a monopoly of refined sugars, and that the benefits of the 
 treaty accrue only to that monopoly, and since the whole complaint is 
 founded in a gross misunderstanding of the nature and conditions of 
 the sugar business on the Pacific coast, it seems proper to discuss the 
 facts at some length. From these it will appear that these charges, as 
 well as others, are utterly without foundation. 
 
 It is a self-evident proposition that a cargo of Manila sugar delivered 
 in New York must sell at a price just equal to that of so much Cuban 
 sugar of equal grade. It is evident, also, that the price of that cargo at 
 Manila "free on board" must be less than the New York price by an 
 amount equal to the cost of transportation. It is further evident that 
 the price of a similar cargo of Manila sugar delivered in San Francisco 
 must exceed the Manila price by an amount equal to the total cost of 
 transportation. It is, therefore, an easy matter to compute whether 
 Manila sugar in San Francisco ought to be cheaper than Cuban or 
 Manila sugar in New York. 
 
 The rate of freight from Manila or Hongkong to San Francisco on 
 sugar is very low. A vessel can be chartered to go from San Francisco 
 to Manila in ballast and bring back sugar at $5 or $6 per ton, but dur- 
 ing the last eight years Asiatic sugar has largely come as mere ballast. 
 Freights from Manila to New York range from $9 to $12 per ton. 
 Interest, insurance, and shrinkage being proportional to the time of 
 the voyage are evidently in favor of San Francisco as compared with 
 New York. In brief, the San Francisco price of raw sugar is lower 
 than the New York price by three-eighths to five-eighths of a cent per 
 pound. 
 
74 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Hawaiian sugars are shipped by the agents or factors of the planters j 
 in Honolulu to commission merchants and importers in San Francisco, ] 
 and sold by the latter to the refinery. The terms of purchase after the. 
 treaty took effect were known as the "Manila basis.'? The refinery j 
 agreed in substance to take the whole of each planter's crop at a price i 
 which should be equal to that of an equivalent quantity and grade of j 
 Manila sugar delivered, duty paid, in San Francisco. The price of a j 
 certain grade of sugar at Manila known as "extra superior," polarizing ■] 
 91, and in color Eo. 10 Dutch standard, was telegraphed daily to Sani 
 Francisco. To this price was added $6 per ton for freight, 2. per cent! 
 insurance, the cost of sixty days' exchange, and a specific allowance! 
 for the remitted duty. This constituted the Manila basis for the day 
 of quotation. 
 
 Just here is one point of dispute between the sugar men of New York \ 
 and those of San Francisco and Honolulu. The New Yorkers refuse j 
 to believe that Spreckels pays the full normal price and the entire duty J 
 to the Hawaiians. If anybody is particularly interested in knowing 
 whether he does not it must be the Hawaiian planter and his Honolulu 
 factor, for an eighth of a cent per pound means to them a profit or loss 1 
 of hundreds of thousands of dollars. Time and again they have exam- 
 ined this question and put it to the most crucial tests, and the verdict 
 is universal that Spreckels has dealt with them fairly and squarely, and 
 this is the testimony alike of friends and enemies whose bread and 
 butter depends on knowing the truth and abiding by it. Who ought 
 to know best about it, they or people who live 3,500 miles away ? 
 
 A little over a year ago Spreckels withdrew the tender of the Manila I 
 basis and would only offer the Cuban. The result was, a new refinery 
 competing with him. Spreckels has always contended that the Manila 
 basis was higher than it ought to be; that he was overpaying the 
 planters and giving them more than Manila and China sugar would 
 have cost him. A second refinery, C. Adolf Low & Co., which was 
 pooled with Spreckels up to 1885, also seemed to think so, for, while 
 having the option of taking as much Hawaiian sugar as they wanted, 
 they declined taking any on the ground that Manila and Central Amer- 
 ican sugars were cheaper. My opinion is that Spreckels was in a great 
 measure right.* To show this would require a detailed examination, 
 
 * For the following reasons: Spreckels allows -$■ cent per pound for the value of 
 every degree of polariscope. The Manila standard polarizes 91°. The average 
 polarization of the whole Hawaiian crop is about 94°, and the allowance, therefore, 
 is, on the average, f cent above the Manila basis. Suppose, now, the price of 
 Hawaiian sugar delivered is 5 cents per pound for 91° ; for 94° it is 5f cents. But a 
 94° sugar contains - 9 3 r more of pure sugar than a 91° sugar, which at 5 cents is \\ 
 cent, or about \ cent. In other words, Spreckels pays f cent for what is worth to 
 him only £ cent. The lower cost of refining a 94° sugar than a 91° is fully covered 
 by the -£ 5 cent allowance for every color above No. 10, Dutch standard. This differ- 
 ence, computed on the last Hawaiian crop, amounts to over $350,000. If it be asked 
 how Spreckels came to concede too much for quality the answer is that when it was 
 first agreed upon, in 1876, the price of raw sugar was very high, and at that time the 
 allowance was not very excessive. The New York allowance was -fa cent per degree 
 of polarization. Moreover, it was at that time anticipated that the run of the 
 Hawaiian crop would not be above 91° or 92°. Once fixed, the allowance became a 
 custom, and custom is a powerful conservative force sometimes in matters of price. 
 
 Again, the great bulk of the Hawaiian crop comes to San Francisco in December 
 to March, inclusive, and Spreckels must pay for it on delivery. Hence he must carry 
 an enormous surplus stock, worth $3,000,000 to $4,000,000, during a great part of the 
 year, and the interest on that is no trifle. If he could buy Asiatic sugars as he wanted 
 them, or take advantage of the favorable stages of the market, he would have an 
 advantage he does nv>t now possess. All things considered I have no ddubt that the 
 practical working of the Manila basis was to make Spreckels pay more for Hawaiian 
 sugar than Manila sugar would have cost him. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 75 
 
 which no one but a sugar expert would easily understand. At the 
 same time it seems to me that the true price, while lower thau the 
 Manila basis, ought, during the extremely low prices of sugar last year, 
 to have been a little better than the Cuban basis. Be this as it may, 
 the vital fact remains in any event that the price on either basis would 
 be considerably lower in San Francisco than in New York. It also re- 
 mains true that the attempt of Spreckels to better himself in respect to \ 
 the terms on which he purchases Hawaiian sugar has cost him very 
 dear in the organization of an opposition refinery, and the end is not 
 yet. And this brings to us the next link in the chain. 
 
 Mr. Spreckels was obliged to buy the whole Hawaiian crop and pay 
 the full market price for it, including the entire duty, or else subject 
 himself to competition. To understand this it is necessary to look at 
 the nature of this monopoly. A monopoly means the want of effective 
 and full competition. What are the possible sources of competition in 
 the sale of refined sugars in California? There can be none from 
 foreign refined sugars, because the duty upon them is prohibitory. 
 There can be no effective competition from Eastern refined sugars, 
 because their price is established on the Atlantic seaboard, where 
 sugar is dearer and the railway transportation is prohibitory. Why is 
 there no local competition"? Because there is not work enough for two 
 refineries. A single refinery half as large as Havemeyer & Elder's can 
 saturate with sugar the whole country west of Denver. If, then, there 
 are two refineries, as has actually been the case, they must either pool 
 and divide the market, which they did, or else begin a war of extermi- 
 nation, which they are hoav doing. The causes which have rendered a 
 monopoly easily possible are, therefore, a prohibitory tariff on refined 
 sugar, the isolation of California from other States where sugar is 
 refined, its comparatively small population, and the fact that one ordi- 
 nary refinery is ample for all needs. Under such circumstances a monop- 
 oly, or else a pool, which amounts to the same thing, is inevitable. 
 Nothing on earth can stop it but time and the changes of conditions, 
 which time will ultimately bring. 
 
 The Hawaiian treaty has had nothing to do with the establishment 
 of this monopoly; the monopoly was fixed before the treaty, and so far 
 from being helped by it, has been embarrassed and weakened by it, and 
 may be yet more seriously embarrassed by its continuance, for the 
 treaty rendered possible two new sources of competition. The nature 
 of this competition is very instructive and will repay careful examina- 
 tion. 
 
 The duty upon raw sugars not only increases with their purity and 
 lightness of color, but increases in a faster ratio than the value of the 
 sugar itself. The result in New York is that it is cheaper and more 
 profitable for the refineries to purchase the impurest sugars they can 
 get, and that raw sugars of fine high quality are, in consequence of 
 this disportionate duty, dearer than refined sugars. In short, the 
 duty on raw sugars which are fit to eat is, to all intents and purposes, 
 prohibitory. This is the reason why raw sugar has entirely disap- 
 peared from our grocery stores. In England, the greatest sugar-eat- 
 ing country in the world, where sugar is duty free, a large proportion 
 of the sugar consumed does not go through the refinery at all, but is 
 sold to customers just as it comes from the plantations. If the tariff 
 on sugar were exactly proportional to its purity vast quantities of raw 
 sugar would be sold in the stores in the place of just so much refined 
 sugar. So it would be in the Eastern States if raw sugars up to 20 
 Dutch standard were duty free. It is easy to see that in California 
 
76 Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 tlie free entry of Hawaiian sugar up to No. 20 put the refinery into the 
 following difficulty : It must not permit the sugars to go upon the open 
 market. How was it to prevent it? By making it more profitable to 
 the planter to sell to the refinery than the grocery store. How was ■ 
 to do that? First, by paying a maximum price for the raws, and,', 
 second, by keeping down the price of refined sugar to points whichj 
 should not exceed the price of raws by more than a certain smallj 
 percentage. The maximum price of the raws was the Manila basis,! 
 and if the price of the refined exceeded the Manila basis by more than] 
 a certain small percentage the Hawaiian sugar would be tempted] 
 into the grocery trade direct. 
 
 Congress has been saturated with the idea that Spreckels has bought^ 
 Hawaiian sugar at his own price, appropriating the remitted duty toj 
 himself and at the same time increasing the price of refined sugar, j 
 The idea is absurd and impossible. The truth is just the reverse. The- 
 command of prices for raw sugar up to the Maniia basis rests with thei 
 planter, and Spreckels must yield or provoke a competition in which] 
 the planter is sure to win. Above the Manila basis the planter can ni 
 go without loss to himself. Spreckels, moreover, has been obliged to] 
 sell refined sugar at lower prices than he could command if the Hawaiian] 
 crop were out of the way. To restore the duty would crush the] 
 planter, leaving him to Spreckels' dictation and give him ( Spreckels)] 
 the power of exacting a larger price for his output without fear ofl 
 any competition from the planter. The effect of the treaty upon thei 
 monopoly has been to hold up the price of raw sugar to the full normal] 
 price and to bring the price of refined nearer to that of raws than it 
 would otherwise have been. 
 
 (2) The second source of competition is a new refinery. Mr J 
 Spreckels himself controls, as a majority stockholder, only one planta-] 
 tion on the islands. He has a minority interest in each of four others] 
 (unless he has acquired more since 1884). He and his friends together - 
 can not control more than a fourth part of the Hawaiian crop except by j 
 buying it on terms satisfactory to the planters. Suppose the others 
 planters to become dissatisfied with the terms of purchase he may] 
 offer, what is to prevent them from joining hands and starting a new 
 refinery in San Francisco to work their own sugars? Nothing, except 
 the want of an. inducement. The question of capital offers no difficulty 
 if there is anything to be gained. What would constitute an induce- 
 ment? Not the prospect of profit on the sale of refined sugars unless 
 they are prepared to crush Spreckels out completely and set up a new 
 monopoly in place of his. But a genuine inducement would be estab- 
 lished at once if Spreckels were to insist upon paying too low a price . 
 for their raw sugar. Suppose the cost of Asiatic sugar, duty paid, in 
 San Francisco is 5 cents and Spreckels will only pay the Hawaiians 4J 
 cents. Suppose two-thirds of the planters refuse and start a new j 
 refinery. A war of rates instantly follows. How low can Spreckles 
 afford to sell refined sugar? As low as the price of Asiatic sugar plus] 
 the cost of refining. How low could the planters afford to sell sugar?] 
 As low as the cost of raising raw sugar, shipping it to San Francisco,] 
 and refining it. When Spreckels has touched the bottom price the] 
 planter is still making the full profit on his raw sugar, but nothing on 
 his refined, and Spreckels is making no profit out of his refinery. 
 
 This is precisely what has happened. When Spreckels dropped from 
 the Manila to the Cuban basis some of the California stockholders and] 
 some of the keen Yankees in the island thought he was going too low. 3 
 They clubbed together, and, with the aid of San Francisco capitalists! 
 who hold Hawaiian plantation stocks, they started a new refinery. They j 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 77 
 
 did not expect to make much profit out of refined sugar, but they do 
 expect to get the fullest price of their raws. The ultimate result of 
 this contest will depend upon whether Spreekels is right in his asser- 
 tion that the Cuban basis is the normal price of sugar. 
 
 GENERAL RESULTS OF THE TREATY. 
 
 The treaty has developed a trade with the islands which, relatively 
 to the population, is enormous, and of which the profits have been and 
 still are exceedingly large. The profits have not, as generally sup- 
 posed, accrued to the great sugar monopoly, but chiefly to the Ameri- 
 can snipping which was evoked by the treaty, to the mercantile houses 
 which have handled the merchandise, and to the investors who have 
 advanced the capital to open and develop the productive properties. 
 These profits have been nearly double the remitted duties and four or 
 five times as great as the probable loss of revenue. 
 
 So far has the treaty been from benefiting a monopoly of refined 
 sugars in California that it has restricted its powers and embarrassed 
 it, and may even yet destroy it. The refinery is powerless to obtain 
 the benefit of the remitted duties in any degree whatever. It must 
 pay them in- full to the consignee of the planter, who, in turn, pays 
 them, and more besides, over to our shipping, banks, mercantile houses, 
 and investors. The remitted duties never leave the country. 
 
 The treaty has brought up a mercantile marine of our own, employ- 
 ing American-built steamers and sailing vessels, and the entire com- 
 merce, amounting to $12,000,000 annually, is in our hands. It is the 
 only foreign commerce to-day which we can call our own. Before the 
 treaty the sugar and rice imported at San Francisco came chiefly from 
 A sia and the East India Islands, where it was bought with London 
 exchange and shipped in foreign vessels. 
 
 The treaty has had no assignable effect whatever upon the sales of 
 sugar in the Mississippi Valley. These sales would have been the 
 same and would continue to be the same without the treaty as with it. 
 San Francisco is the natural source of supply of sugar for almost the 
 whole country west of the Kansas Missouri line, and of a considerable 
 territory still further east. The only real competition of San Francisco 
 in that region is the Louisiana planter, who has no more right to com- 
 plain of it than of the competition of New York. This competition is 
 independent of the treaty. Congress can not prevent it, and ought not 
 to if it could, for it is a normal and healthy one. 
 
 XL Also the following article in the forum for march, 
 
 1893, ON "HAWAII AND OUR FUTURE SEA-POWER," AND WRITTEN 
 BY CAPT. A. T. MAHAN. 
 
 [The Forum, March, 1893.] 
 
 HAWAII AND OUK FUTUEE SEA POWEE.* 
 
 The suddenness so far, at least, as the general public is concerned, 
 with which the long-existing troubles in Hawaii have come to a head, 
 and the character of the advances reported to be addressed to the 
 United States by the revolutionary government, formally recognized 
 as de facto by our representative on the spot, add another to the many 
 significant instances furnished by history that, as men in the midst 
 
 * Copyright, 1892, by the Forum Publishing Company. 
 
78 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 of life are in death, so nations in the midst of peace find themselves] 
 confronted with unexpected causes of dissension, conflicts of interests, j 
 whose results may be, on the one hand, war, or, on the other, aban-1 
 donment of clear and imperative national advantage in order to avoid 
 an issue for which preparation has not been made. By no premedi-j 
 tated contrivance of our own, by the cooperation of a series of eventsj 
 which, however dependent, step by step, upon human action, were not, 
 intended to prepare the present crisis, the United States finds herself] 
 compelled to answer a question, to make a decision, not unlike and 
 not less momentous than that required of the Roman senate when the 
 Mamertine garrison invited it to occupy Messina and so to abandon] 
 the hitherto traditional policy which had confined the expansion of 
 Eome to the Italian peninsula. For let it not be overlooked that, 
 whether we wish or no, we must answer the question, we must make 
 the decision. The issue can not be dodged. Absolute inaction in such 
 a case is a decision as truly as the most vehement action. We can now| 
 advance, but, the conditions of the world being what they are, if we 
 do not advance we recede; for there is involved not so much a partic-j 
 ular action as a question of principle pregnant of great consequences i 
 in one direction or in the other. 
 
 Occasion of serious difficulty should not, indeed, here arise. Unlike j 
 the historical instance just cited, the two nations that have now coma 
 into contact are so alike in inherited traditions, habits of thought, and 
 views of right, that injury to the one need not be anticipated from the; 
 predominance of the other in a quarter where its interests also pre- 
 dominate. JDespite the heterogeneous character of the immigration 
 which the past few years have been pouring into our country, our polit- 
 ical traditions and racial characteristics still continue English — Mr. 
 Douglas Campbell would say Dutch, but the stock is the same. Though 
 thus somewhat gorged with food not wholly to its taste, our political 
 digestion has so far contrived to master the incongruous mass of mate- 
 rials it has been unable to reject; and, if assimilation has been at times 
 imperfect, the political constitution and spirit remain English in essen- 
 tial features. Imbued with like ideals of liberty, of law, of right, cer- 
 tainly not less progressive than our kin beyond sea, we ar,e, in the 
 safeguards deliberately placed around our fundamental law, even more 
 conservative than they. That which we received of the true spirit of 
 freedom we have kept — liberty and law — not the one or the other, but 
 both. In that spirit we have not only occupied our original inheritance, 
 but also, step by step, as Rome incorporated the other nations of the 
 peninsula, we have added to it, spreading and perpetuating every- 
 where the same foundation principles of free and good government 
 which, to her honor be it said, Great Britain also has throughout her 
 course maintained. And now, arrested on the south by the rights of 
 a race wholly alien to us, and on the north by a body of states of like 
 traditions to our own, whose freedom to choose their own affiliations 
 we respect, we have come to the sea. In our infancy we bordered upon 
 the Atlantic only: our youth carried our boundary to the Gulf of Mex- 
 ico; to-day maturity sees us upon the Pacific. Have we no right or 
 no call to progress farther in any direction? Are there for us beyond 
 the sea horizon none of those essential interests, of those evident dan- 
 gers, which impose a policy and confer rights? 
 
 This is the question that has long been looming upon the brow of a 
 future now rapidly passing into the present. Of it the Hawaiian inci- 
 dent is a part, intrinsically, perhaps, a small part, but in its relations 
 to the whole so vital that, as has before been said, a wrong decision 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 79 
 
 does not stand by itself, but involves, not only in principle but in fact, 
 recession along the whole line. In our natural, necessary, irrepressible 
 expansion, we are here come into contact with the progress of another 
 great people, the law of whose being has impressed upon it a principle 
 of growth which has wrought mightily in the past and in the present 
 is visible by recurring manifestations. Of this working, Gibraltar, 
 Malta, Cyprus, Egypt, Aden, India, in geographical succession though 
 not in strict order of time, show a completed chain; forged link by 
 link, by open force or politic bargain, but always resulting from the 
 steady pressure of a national instinct, so powerful and so accurate that 
 statesmen of every school, willing or unwilling, have found themselves 
 carried along by a tendency which no individuality can resist or greatly 
 modify. Unsubstantial rumor and incautious personal utterance have 
 each suggested an impatient desire in Mr. Gladstone to be rid of the 
 occupation of Egypt; but scarcely has his long exclusion from office 
 ended than the irony of events signalizes his return thereto by an 
 increase in the force of occupation. It may further be profitably 
 noted, of the chain just cited, that the two extremities were first pos- 
 sessed—first India, then Gibraltar, far later Malta, Aden, Cyprus, 
 Egypt — and that, with scarce an exception, each step has been taken, 
 despite the jealous vexation of a rival. Spain has never ceased angrily 
 to bewail Gibraltar. "I had rather," said the first Napoleon, u see the 
 English on the heights of Montmartre than in Malta." The feelings 
 of France about Egypt are matter of common knowledge, not even 
 dissembled; and, for our warning be it added, her annoyance is 
 increased by the bitter sense of opportunity rejected. 
 
 It is needless to do more than refer to that other chain of mari- 
 time possessions, Halifax, Bermuda, Santa Lucia, Jamaica, which 
 strengthen the British hold upon the Atlantic, the Caribbean, and the 
 Isthmus of Panama. In the Pacific the position is for them much less 
 satisfactory, nowhere, perhaps, is it less so, and from obvious natural 
 causes. The commercial development of the eastern Pacific has been 
 far later and is still less complete than that of its western shores. The 
 latter when first opened to European adventure were already the seat 
 of ancient civilizations, in China and Japan, furnishing abundance of 
 curious and luxurious products to tempt the trader by good hopes of 
 profit. The western coast of America, for the most part peopled by 
 savages, offered little save the gold and silver of Mexico and Peru, and 
 these were jealously monopolized by the Spaniards, not a commercial 
 nation, during their long ascendency. Being so very far from Eng- 
 land and affording so little material for trade, Pacific America did not 
 draw the enterprise of a country the chief and honorable inducement 
 of whose seamen was the hope of gain, in pursuit of which they settled 
 and annexed point after point in the regions where they penetrated 
 and upon the routes leading thither. The western coasts of North 
 America, being reached only by the long and perilous voyage around 
 Cape Horn, or by a more toilsome and dangerous passage across the 
 continent, remained among the last of the temperate productive sea- 
 boards of the earth to be possessed by white men. The United States 
 were already a nation, in fact, as well as in form, when Vancouver was 
 exploring Puget Sound and passed first through the channel separating 
 the mainland of British America from the island that now bears his 
 name. Thus it has happened that, from the late development of British 
 Columbia in the northeastern Pacific and of Australia and New Zea- 
 land in the southwestern, Great Britain is again found holding the two 
 extremities of a line between which she must inevitably desire the 
 
80 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 intermediate links; nor is there any good reason why she should not 
 have them, except the superior, more urgent, more vital necessities of 
 another people — our own. Of these links the Hawaiian group pos- 
 sesses unique importance, not from its intrinsic commercial value, hut 
 from its favorable position for maratime and military control. 
 
 The military or strategic value of a naval position depends upon 
 its situation, upon its strength, and upon its resources. Of the three,, 
 the first is of most consequence, because it results from the nature of 
 things; whereas the two latter, when deficient, can be artificially sup- 
 plied, in whole or in part. Fortifications remedy the weakness of a 
 position, foresight accumulates beforehand the resources which nature 
 does not yield on the spot; but it is not within the power of man to 
 change the geographical situation of a point which lies outside the 
 limit of strategic effect. It is instructive, and yet apparent to the 
 most superficial reading, to notice how the first Napoleon, in comment- 
 ing upon a region likely to be the scene of war, begins by considering 
 the most conspicuous natural features, and then enumerates the com- 
 manding positions, their distances from each other, the relative direc- 
 tions, or, as the sea phrase is, their u bearings," and the particular 
 facilities each offers for operations of war. This furnishes the ground l 
 plan, the skeleton, detached from confusing secondary considerations, 
 and from which a clear estimate of the decisive points can be made. 
 The number of such points varies greatly, according to the character 
 of the region. In a mountainous, broken country they may be very 
 many; whereas in a plain devoid of natural obstacles there may be 
 few or more save those created by man. If few, the value of each is 
 necessarily greater than if many, and if there be but one its importance 
 is not only unique, but extreme, measured only by the size of the field 
 over which its unshared influence extends. 
 
 The sea, until it approaches the land, realizes the ideal of a vast! 
 plain, unbroken by obstacles. On the sea, says an eminent French 
 tactician, there is no field of battle; meaning that there is none of the 
 natural conditions which, determine, and often fetter, the movements 
 of the general. But upon a plain, however flat and monotonous,, 
 causes, possibly slight, determine the concentration of population into 
 town and villages, and the necessary communications between the 
 centers create roads. Where the latter converge, or cross, tenure 
 confers command, depending for importance upon the number of 
 routes thus meeting and upon their individual value. It is just so at 
 sea. While in itself the ocean opposes no obstacle to a vessel taking 
 any one of the numerous routes that can be traced upon the surface of 
 the globe between two points, conditions of distance or convenience, 
 of traffic or of wind, do prescribe certain usual courses. Where these 
 pass near an ocean position, still more where they use it, it has an 
 influence over them, and where several routes cross near by that 
 influence becomes very great — is commanding. 
 
 Let us now apply these considerations to the Hawaiian group. To 
 anyone viewing a map that shows the full extent of the Pacific Ocean, 
 with its shores on either side, two circumstances will be strikingly and 
 immediately apparent. He will see at a glance that the Sandwich. 
 Islands stand by themselves, in a state of comparative isolation, amid 
 a vast expanse of sea; and, again, that they form the center of a large 
 circle whose radius is approximately, and very closely, the distance 
 from Honolulu to San Francisco. The circumference of this circle, if 
 the trouble is taken to describe it with compass upon the map, will be 
 seen, on the west and south, to pass through the outer fringe of the 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 81 
 
 system of archipelagoes which, from Australia and New Zealand, extend 
 to the northeast toward the American continent. Within the circle a 
 few scattered islets, bare and unimportant, seem only to emphasize the 
 failure of nature to bridge the interval separating Hawaii from her 
 peers of the Southern Pacific. Of these, however, it may be noted that 
 some, like Fanning and Christmas islands, have within a few years 
 been taken into British possession. The distance from San Francisco 
 to Honolulu, 2,100 miles, easy steaming distance, is substantially the 
 same as that from Honolulu to the Gilbert, Marshall, Samoan, Society, 
 and Marquesas groups, all under European control, except Samoa, in 
 which we have a part influence. 
 
 To have a central position such as this, and to be alone, having no 
 rival and admitting no alternative throughout an extensive tract, are 
 conditions that at once fix the attention of the strategist — it may be 
 added, of the statesmen of commerce likewise. But to this striking 
 combination is to be added the remarkable relations borne by these 
 singularly placed islands to the greater commercial routes traversing 
 this vast expanse known to us as the Pacific, not only, however, to 
 those now actually in use, important as they are, but also to those that 
 must necessarily be called into being by that future to which the 
 Hawaiian incident compels our too unwilling attention. Oircum 
 stances, as was before tritely remarked, create centers, between which 
 communication necessarily follows, and in the vista of the future all, 
 however dimly, discern a new and great center that must greatly 
 modify existing sea routes, as well as bring new ones into existence. 
 Whether the canal of the Central American isthmus be eventually at 
 Panama or at Nicaragua matters little to the question now in hand, 
 although, in common with most Americans who have thought upon 
 the subject, I believe it will surely be at the latter point. Whichever 
 it be, the convergence there of so many ships from the Atlantic and 
 the Pacific will constitute a center of commerce, interoceanic and 
 inferior to few, if to any, in the world; one whose approaches will be 
 jealously watched and whose relations to the other centers of the 
 Pacific by the lines joining it to them must be carefully examined. 
 Such study of the commercial routes and their relations to the Hawaiian 
 Islands, taken together with the other strategic considerations pre- 
 viously set forth, completes the synopsis of facts which determine the 
 value of the group for conferring either commercial or naval control. 
 
 Kef erring again to the map, it will be seen that while the shortest 
 routes from the isthmus to Australia and New Zealand, as well as 
 those to South America, go well clear of any probable connection with 
 or interference from Hawaii, those directed toward China and Japan 
 pass either through the group or in close proximity to it. Vessels 
 from Central America bound to the ports of Northern America come, 
 of course, within the influence of our own coast. These circumstances 
 and the existing recognized distribution of political power in the 
 Pacific point naturally to an international acquiescence in certain 
 defined spheres of influence for our own country and for others, such 
 as has already been reached between Great Britain, Germany, and 
 Holland in the Southwestern Pacific, to avoid conflict there between 
 their respective claims. Though artificial in form, such a recognition 
 would, in the case here suggested, depend upon perfectly natural as 
 well as indisputable conditions. The United States is by far the 
 greatest in numbers, interests, and power of the communities border- 
 ing upon the North Pacific; and the relations of the Hawaiian Islands 
 to her ni.turally would be, and actually are, more numerous and more 
 S. Eep. 227. 6 
 
82 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 important than they oin be to any other state. This is true, although 
 unfortunately for the equally natural wishes of Great Britain and her 
 colonies, the direct routes from British Columbia to Eastern Australia 
 and New Zealand, which depend upon no building of a future canal, 
 pass as near the islands as those already mentioned. Such a fact, that 
 this additional great highway runs close to the group, both augments 
 and emphasizes their strategic importance; but it does not affect the*: 
 statement just made that the interest of the United States in them is 
 greater than that of Great Britain, and dependent upon a natural 
 cause, nearness, which has always been admitted as a reasonable 
 ground for national self-assertion. It is unfortunate, doubtless, for the 
 wishes of British Columbia and for the communications, commercial 
 and military, depending upon the Canadian Pacific Kail way, that the 
 United States lies between them and the South Pacific and is the state 
 nearest to Hawaii; but, the fact being so, the interests of our 65,000,000. 
 people, in a position so vital to our role in the Pacific, must be allowed 
 to outweigh those of the 6,000,000 of Canada. 
 
 From the foregoing considerations may be inferred the importance 
 of the Hawaiian Islands as a position powerfully influencing the com^ 
 mercial and military control of the Pacific, and especially of the north- 
 ern' Pacific, in which the United States, geographically, has the 
 strongest right to assert herself. These are the main advantages, 
 which can be termed positive; those, namely, which directly advance 
 commercial security and naval control. To the negative advantage^ 
 of possession, by removing conditions which, if the islands were in the 
 hands of any other power, would constitute to us disadvantages an<| 
 threats, allusion only will be made. The serious menace to our Pacific 
 coast and our Pacific trade, if so important a position were held by a 
 possible enemy, has been frequently mentioned in the press and dwelt 
 upon in the diplomatic papers which are from time to time given to 
 the public. It may be assumed that it is generally acknowledged. 
 Upon one particular, however, too much stress can not be laid, one td. 
 which naval officers can not but be more sensitive than the general 
 public, and that is the immense disadvantage to us of any maritime 
 enemy having a coaling station well within 2,500 miles, as this is, o| 
 every point of our coast line from Puget Sound to Mexico. Were there 
 many others available we might find it difficult to exclude from all. 
 There is, however, but the one. Shut out from the Sandwich Islands 
 as a coal base, an enemy is thrown back for supplies of fuel to dis- 
 tances of 3,500 or 4,000 miles — or between 7,000 and 8,000, going and 
 coming — an impediment to sustained maritime operations well nigh 
 prohibitive. The coal mines of British Columbia constitute, of course, 
 a qualification to this statement; but upon them, if need arose, we 
 might at least hope to impose some trammels by action from the land 
 side. It is rarely that so important a factor in the attack or defense of 
 a coast line — of a sea frontier — is concentrated in a single position, 
 and the circumstance renders doubly imperative upon us to secure it, 
 if we righteously can. 
 
 It is to be hoped, also, that the opportunity thus thrust upon us may 
 not be narrowly viewed, as though it concerned but one section of our 
 country or one portion of its external trade or influence. This is no 
 mere question of a particular act, for which, possibly, just occasion 
 may not yet have offered; but of a principle, a policy, fruitful of many 
 future acts, to enter upon which, in the fullness of our national prog? 
 ress, the time has now arrived. The principle accepted, to be con- 
 ditioned only by a just and candid regard for the rights and reasonal " 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 83 
 
 susceptibilities of ether nations — none of which is contravened by the 
 step here immediately under discussion — the annexation, even, of 
 Hawaii would be no mere sporadic effort, irrational because discon- 
 nected from an adequate motive, but a first fruit and a token that the 
 nation in its evolution has aroused itself to the necessity of carrying- 
 its life — that has been the happiness of those under its influence — 
 beyond the borders that have heretofore sufficed for its activities. 
 That the vaunted blessings of our economy are not to be forced upon 
 tin? unwilling may be, conceded ; but the concession does not deny the 
 right nor the wisdom of gathering in those who wish to come. Com- 
 parative religion teaches that creeds which reject missionary enter- 
 prise are foredoomed to decay. May it not be so with nations? Cer- 
 tainly the glorious record of England is consequent mainly upon the 
 spirit and traceable to the time when she launched out into the deep — 
 without formulated policy, it is true, or foreseeing the future to which 
 her star was leading, but obeying the instinct which in the infancy of 
 nations anticipates the more reasoned impulses of experience. Let us, 
 too, learn from her experience. Not all at once did England become 
 the great sea power which she is, but step by step, as opportunity 
 offered, she has moved on to the world wide preeminence now held by 
 English speech and by institutions sprung from English germs. How 
 much poorer would the world have been had Englishmen heeded the 
 cautious hesitancy that now bids us reject every advance beyond our 
 shore lines. And can any one doubt that a cordial, if unformulated, 
 understanding between the two chief states of English tradition, to 
 spread freely, "without mutual jealously and in mutual support, would 
 greatly increase the world's sum of happiness ?- 
 
 But if a plea of the world's welfare seem suspiciously like a cloak for 
 national self-interest, let the latter be frankly accepted as the adequate 
 motive which it assuredly is. Let us not sink from pitting a broad self- 
 Interest against the narrow self-interest to which some would restrict 
 us. The demands of our three great seaboards, the Atlantic, the Gulf, 
 and the Pacific — each for itself, and all for the strength that comes from 
 drawing closer the ties between them — are calling for the extension, 
 through the Isthmian Canal, of that broad sea common along which, 
 and along which alone, in all ages prosperity has moved. Land carriage, 
 always restricted and therefore always slow, toils enviously but hope- 
 lessly behind, vainly seeking to replace and supplant the royal high- 
 way of nature's own making. Corporate interests, vigorous iu that 
 power of concentration which is the strength of armies and of minori- 
 ties, may here for a while withstand the ill-organized strivings of the 
 multitude, only dimly conscious of its wants; yet the latter, however 
 temporarily opposed and baffled, is sure at last, like the blind forces of 
 nature, to overwhelm all that stand in the way of its necessary prog- 
 ress. So the Isthmian Canal is an inevitable part in the future of the 
 United States; yet scarcely an integral part, for it can not be separated 
 from other necessary incidents of a policy dependant upon it, whose 
 details cannot be exactly foreseen. But because the precise steps that 
 may hereafter be opportune or necessary can not yet be certainly fore- 
 told, is not a reason the less, but a reason the more, for establishing a 
 pri nciple of action which may serve to guide as opportunities arise. Let 
 us start from t-ne fundamental truth, warranted by history, that the 
 control of the seas, and especially along the great lines drawn by 
 national interest or national commerce, is the chief among the merely 
 material elements in the power and prosperity of nations, It is so 
 
84 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 because the sea is the world's great medium of circulation. From this 
 necessarily follows the principle that, as subsidiary to such control, it 
 is imperative to take possession, when it can righteously be done, 
 of such maritime positions as contribute to secure command. If 
 this principle be adopted there will be no hesitation about 
 taking the positions — and they are many— upon the approaches 
 to the Isthmus, whose interests incline them to seek us. It has its 
 application also to the present case of Hawaii. 
 
 There is, however, one caution to be given from that military point of 
 view beyond the need of which the world has not yet passed. Military 
 positions, fortified posts, by land or by sea, however strong or admirably 
 situated, do not by themselves confer control. People often say that 
 such an island or harbor will give control of such a body of water. It 
 is an utter, deplorable, ruinous mistake. The phrase may indeed by 
 some be used only loosly, without forgetting other implied conditions 
 of adequate protection and adequate navies; but the confidence of our 
 nation in its native strength, and its indifference to the defense of its 
 ports and the sufficiency of its fleet, give reason to fear that the full 
 consequences of a forward step may not be soberly weighed. Napoleon, 
 who knew better, once talked this way. "The islands of San Pietro, 
 Corfu, and Malta," he wrote, "will make us masters of the whole Medi- 
 terranean." Yain boast ! Within one year Corfu, in two years Malta, 
 were rent away from the state that could not support them by its ships. 
 Nay, more; had Bonaparte not taken the latter stronghold out of the 
 hands of its degenerate but innocuous government, that citadal of the 
 Mediterranean would perhaps — would probably — never have passed 
 into those of his chief enemy. There is here also a lesson for us. 
 
 It is by no means logical to leap, from this recognition of the neces- 
 sity of adequate naval force to secure outlying dependencies, to the con- 
 clusion that the United States would for that object need a navy equal 
 to the largest now existing. A nation as far removed as is our own 
 from the bases of foreign naval strength may reasonably reckon upon 
 the qualification that distance — not to speak of the complex European 
 interests close at hand — impresses upon the exertion of naval strength. 
 The mistake is when our remoteness, unsupported by carefully calcu- 
 lated force, is regarded as an armor of proof, under cover of which any 
 amount of swagger may be safely indulged. Any estimate of what is 
 an adequate naval force for our country may properly take large account 
 of the happy interval that separates both our present territory and our 
 future aspirations from the centers of interest really vital to European 
 states. If to these safeguards be added, On our part, a sober recogni-. 
 tion of what our reasonable sphere of influence is and a candid justice 
 in dealing with foreign interests within that sphere, there will be little 
 disposition to question our preponderance therein. 
 
 Among all foreign states it is especially to be hoped that each pass- 
 ing year may render more cordial the relations between ourselves and 
 the great nation from whose loins we sprang. The radical identity of 
 spirit which underlies our superficial differences of polity will surely 
 so draw us closer together, if we do not willfully set our faces against 
 a tendency which would give our race the predominance over the seas of 
 the world. To force such a consummation is impossible, and, if possible, 
 would not be wise ; but surely it would be a lofty aim, fraught with 
 immeasurable benefits, to desire it, and to raise no needless impedi- 
 ments by advocating perfectly proper acts, demanded by our evident 
 interest?, in offensive or arrogant terms. — (A, T. Mahan.) 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 85 
 
 XII. Also the following extract from the report of hon. 
 
 JOHN QUINCY ADAMS, CHAIRMAN OF THE COMMITTEE ON FOREIGN 
 
 )l 
 OF PRESIDENT TYLER, DECEMBER 30, 1842. 
 
 "It is a subject of cheering contemplation to the friends of human 
 improvement and virtue that, by the mild and gentle influence of 
 Christian charity, dispensed by humble missionaries of the gospel, 
 unarmed with secular power, within the last quarter of a century, the 
 people of this group of islands have been converted from the lowest 
 debasement of idolatry to 4he blessings of the Christian gospel; 
 united under one balanced government; rallied to the fold of civiliza- 
 tion by a written language and constitution, providing security for the 
 rights of persons, property and mind, and invested with all the ele- 
 ments of right and power which can entitle them to be acknowledged 
 by their brethren of the •human race as a separate and independent 
 community. To the consummation of their acknowledgment the 
 people of the North American Union are urged by an interest of their 
 own, deeper than that of any other portion of the inhabitants of the 
 earth — by a virtual right of conquest, not over the freedom of their 
 brother man by the brutal arm of physical power, but over the mind 
 and heart by the celestial panoply of the gospel of peace and love." 
 
 XIII. Also the following, a translation of the constitution 
 
 OF THE HAWAIIAN GOVERNMENT OF 1840. 
 
 "In the Hawaiian bill of rights, the chiefs endeavored to incorporate 
 in few words the general basis of personal rights, both of the chiefs and 
 common people, and to guard against perversion; and this they have 
 accomplished with, perhaps, as much precision and consistency as the 
 Americans, who affirm 'that all men are born free and equal, possessing 
 certain inalienable rights, life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness. 7 
 
 " With distinguished and commendable care do the Hawaiian s of 
 1840 acknowledge the paramount authority of God, in which Kaahu- 
 manu had set them a noble example, and the importance of an unwav- 
 ering purpose in legislation not to controvene his word," 
 
 The following translation I have made with care from the original, 
 published at the islands as the constitution of 1840 : 
 
 "God has made of one blood all the nations of men, that they might 
 alike dwell upon the earth iu peace and prosperity. And he has given 
 certain equal rights to all people and chiefs of all countries. These are 
 the rights or gifts which he has granted to every man and chief of cor- 
 rect deportment, life, the members of the body, freedom in dwelling 
 and acting, and the rightful products of his hands and mind; but not 
 those things which are inhibited by the laws. 
 
 " From God also are the office of rulers and the reign of chief magis- 
 trates for protection; but in enacting the laws of the land it is not 
 right to make a law protecting the magistrate only and not subjects; 
 neither is it proper to establish laws for enriching chiefs only without 
 benefiting the people, and hereafter no law shall be established in 
 
 ! opposition to the above declarations; neither shall taxes, servitude, 
 nor labor be exacted: without law of any man in a manner at variance 
 1 with those principles. 
 
 , 
 
 "PROTECTION FOR ALL. 
 
 c Therefore let this declaration be published in order to the equal 
 tection of all the people and all the chiefs of these islands while 
 
86 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 maintaining a Correct deportment, that no chief may oppress any sub- 
 ject, and that chiefs and people may enjoy equal security under the 
 same system of law; the persons, the lands, the dwelling enclosures, 
 and all the property of all the people are protected while they conform 
 to the laws of the Kingdom, neither shall any of these be taken except 
 by the provisions of law. Any chief who shall perseveringly act in 
 opposition to this constitution shall cease to hold his office as a chief 
 of these Hawaiian Islands; and the same shall apply to governors, offi- 
 cers of Government, and land agents. But if one condemned should 
 turn again and conform himself to the laws it shall be in the power ol 
 the chiefs to reinstate him in the standing he occupied before his tres- 
 pass. 
 
 "FOUNDATION OF LAWS. 
 
 "According to the principles above declared, we purpose to regulate 
 this Kingdom, and to seek the good of all the chiefs and all the people 
 of these Hawaiian Islands. We are aware that we can not succeed ty 
 ourselves alone, but through God we can; for He is King over all king- 
 doms; by whom protection and prosperity may be secured ; therefore 
 do we first beseech him to point out to us the right course, and aid 01 
 work. 
 
 " Wherefore, resolved, 
 
 "I. No law shall be enacted at variance with the word of the Lord 
 Jehovah, or opposed to the grand design of that word. All the laws 
 of this country shall accord with the general design of God's law. 
 
 "II. All men of every form of worship shall be protected in their 
 worshipping Jehovah, and in their serving Him; nor shall any one be 
 punished for merely neglecting to serve God, provided he injures no 
 man and brings no evil on the Kingdom. 
 
 "III. The law shall support every unblamable man who is injured by 
 another all shall be protected in every good work, and every man shall 
 be punishable who brings evil on the Kingdom or individuals. Nor shall 
 any unequal law be established to give favor to one through evil to 
 another. 
 
 "IV. No man sballbepnnisheelunlesshiscrimebe first maele to appeal 
 nor shall he be punished without being examined in the presence of his 
 accuser. When the accused and the accuser have met face to face, ane 
 the trial proceeds according to law, and guilt is established before thei 
 both, then punishment shall follow. 
 
 " V. It shall not be proper for any man or chief to sit as judge 
 juror to try his own benefactor, or one directly connected with hii 
 Therefore, if one is condemned or acquitted, and it shall soon be knowi 
 that some of the triers acted with partiality to favor whom he loved, 
 perhaps to enrich himself, then there may be a new trial before the 
 impartial. 
 
 " EXPLANATION OF THE POSITION OF THE RULERS. 
 
 " The nature of the position of the chief magistrates and of the polie 
 of the country is this : Katnehameha I was the head of this Kingdom 
 dynasty. To him pertained all the lands from Hawaii to Niihan, bi 
 they were not his own personal property ; they belonged to the people 
 and the chiefs, and Kaineliameha was their head and the dictator of 
 the country. Therefore no one had before, and no one has now, the 
 right to convey away the smallest portion of these islands without the 
 consent of the dictator of the Kingdom. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 87 
 
 " These are the dictators or the persons who have had the direction of 
 it from that time down, Kamehameha II and Kaahumanu I, and at the 
 present time Kamehameha III. To these persons only has belonged 
 the direction or dictatorship of the realm down to the present time, 
 and the documents written by them only are the documents of the 
 Kingdom. 
 
 "The Kingdom is to be perpetuated to Kamehameha III and to his 
 heirs, and his heir shall be one whom he and the chiefs shall appoint 
 during his lifetime; but if he shall not nominate, then the appointment 
 shall devolve solely on the nobles and representatives. 
 
 "PREROGATIVES OF THE KINO. 
 
 "This is the King's position: He is the sovereign of all the people 
 and all the chiefs. At his direction are the soldiers, the guns, the 
 forts, and all the implements of war of the Kingdom. At his direction 
 is the public property, the revenue from the poll tax, the land tax, and 
 the three days monthly labor tax, to accord, however, with the pro- 
 visions of law. He shall possess his own private lands, and such as 
 shall be forfeited for the annual tax. 
 
 " He is the chief judge of the supreme court, and to him belongs the 
 execution of the laws of the land, the decrees, and the treaties with 
 other countries, in accordance with the provisions of the laws of this 
 country. 
 
 " It is for him to make treaties with the rulers of all other kingdoms, 
 and to hold intercourse with ministers sent hither from other coun- 
 tries, and to consummate agreements. 
 
 " It is for him to declare war should a period of distress arrive, and 
 the chiefs could not well be assembled; and he shall be commander 
 in chief of the army. All important business of the Kingdom not com- 
 mitted by law to others, belongs to him to transact. 
 
 "of the premier of the kingdom. 
 
 " It shall be the duty of the King to appoint a chief of ability and 
 high rank to be his prime minister, who shall be entitled premier of the 
 I Kingdom, whose office and business shall be like that of Kaahumanu I 
 I and Kaahumanu II. For in the life time of Kamehameha, the ques- 
 i tions of life and death, right and wrong, were for Kaahumanu to 
 decide, and at the time of his death he gave charge, i Let the Kingdom 
 be Liholiho's, and Kaahumanu the prime minister.' That policy of 
 Kamehameha, wherein he sought 'to secure a premier, ,is to be per- 
 petuated in this Hawaaiian country, but in accordance with the pro- 
 visions of law. 
 
 " This is the business of the premier : Whatever appropriate business 
 of the Kingdom the King intends to do the premier may do in the name 
 of the King. The words and acts of the Kingdom by the premier are 
 the words and acts of the King. The premier shall receive and 
 acknowledge the revenue of the Kingdom and deliver it to the King. 
 The premier shall be the King's special counsellor in all the important 
 business of the Kingdom. The King shall not transact public business 
 without the concurrence of the premier; nor shall the premier transact 
 public business without the concurrence of the King.* If the King shall 
 veto what the premier counsels or attempts that is a negative. What- 
 ever important public business the King chooses to transact in person 
 he may do, but only with the approbation or consent of the premier. 
 
88 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 "OF GOVERNORS. 
 
 
 "There shall be four governors in this Hawaiian country; one of 
 Hawaii, one of Mani and the adjacent isles, one of Oahu, and one of 
 Kauai and the adjacent isles. All the governors from Hawaii to Kauai 
 shall hold their office under the King. 
 
 "This is the character and duty of the office of governor: He is the 
 director of all the tax officers in his island, and shall sustain their orders 
 which he shall deem right, confirming according to the provisions of 
 law, and not his own arbitrary will. He shall preside over all the 
 judges of his island and execute their decisions as above stated. He 
 shall choose the judges of his district and give them their commissions. 
 
 "The governor is the high chief (viceroy) over his island or islands, 
 and shall have the direction of the forts, the soldiers, guns, and all the 
 implements of war. Under the King and premier shall be all the 
 governors from Hawaii to Kauai. Each shall have charge of the reve- 
 nue of his island, and shall deliver it to the premier. 
 
 "In case of distress he may act as dictator, if neither King nor pre- 
 mier can be consulted. He shall have charge of all the King's business 
 on the island, the taxation, improvements, and means of increasing 
 wealthy and all officers there shall be under him. To him belong all 
 questions and business pertaining to the government of the island, not 
 assigned by law to others. 
 
 "On the decease of a governor, the chiefs shall assemble at such a 
 place as the King shall appoint, and together seek out a successor of 
 the departed governor, and the person whom they shall choose and 
 the King approve by writing shall be the new governor. 
 
 "OF CHIEFS OR NOBLES UNDER THE KING. 
 
 : 
 
 "In the public councils of the chiefs these are the counsellors f( 
 the current period: Kamehameha III, Kekauluohi, Hoapiliwahin 
 Kaukini, Kekauonohi, Kahekili, Paki, Konia, Keohokalole, Leleiohoku, 
 Kehuanaoa, Keliiahonui, Kanaina, Li Keoniana, a me Haalilio, and if 
 a new member is to enter the law shall specify it. These persons shall 
 take part in the councils of the Kingdom. But if the council choose to 
 admit others merely for consultation it shall be allowable, the specified 
 counsellors only being allowed to vote. No law shall be enacted for 
 the country without their consent. 
 
 "In this manner shall they proceed: They shall meet annually to 
 devise means for benefiting the country and enact laws for the King- 
 dom. In the month of April shall they assemble at such time and 
 place as the King shall appoint. It shall be proper for the King to take 
 counsel with them on all the important concerns of the Kingdom in 
 order to secure harmony and prosperity, or the general good, and they 
 shall attend to all the business which the King shall commit to them. 
 They shall retain their own personal estates, larger or smaller divisions 
 of the country, and may conduct their affairs on their own lands accord-, 
 ing to their pleasure, but not in opposition to the laws of the Kingdom. 
 
 "OF REPRESENTATIVES ELECTED 
 
 " Several men shall be annually chosen to act in council with the 
 King and chiefs, and to devise with them laws for the country. Some 
 from Hawaii, some from Maui, some from Oahu, and some from Kauai, 
 shall the plebeians choose according to their o%n pleasure. The law 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 89 
 
 will determine the method of choosing and the number to be chosen. 
 These chosen representatives shall have a voice in the Government, 
 and no law can be established without the consent of the majority of 
 fchem. 
 
 "OF THE MEETINGS OF THE LEGISLATURE OR PARLIAMENT. 
 
 "There shall be an annual meeting as aforesaid, but if the chiefs 
 choose another meeting at another time they may meet at their dis- 
 cretion. 
 
 "In the assembling of Parliament, let the hereditary nobles meet by 
 themselves and the elected rulers meet by themselves. But if they 
 choose to take counsel together occasionally at their discretion, so be it. 
 
 "In this manner shall they proceed: The hereditary chiefs shall 
 choose a secretary for their body, and on the day of their assembling 
 he shall record all their transactions; and that book shall be preserved 
 that what they devise for the Kingdom may not be lost. 
 
 "In the same manner shall the elected representatives proceed; they 
 shall choose a secretary for themselves, and on the day they assemble, 
 to seek the good of the Kingdom and agree on any measure, he shall 
 record it in a book, which shall be carefully preserved, in order that 
 v the good desired for the country may not be lost. And no new law 
 shall be established without the consent of a majority of the nobles 
 and of the elected representatives. 
 
 "When any act or measure shall have been agreed on by them it shall 
 be carried on paper to the King, and if he approves and signs his name, 
 and also the premier, then it shall become a law of the Kingdom, and 
 it shall not be repealed except by the body which enacted it. 
 
 "OF THE TAX OFFICERS. 
 
 "The King and premier shall choose tax officers and give them a com- 
 mission in writing. They shall be distinct for the separate islands. 
 There shall be three, or more or less, for each island, at the discretion 
 of the King and premier. 
 
 "A tax officer, having received a commission, shall not be removed 
 without a trial. If convicted of crime he may be removed ; but the 
 number of years the office shall continue may be previously limited by 
 law. 
 
 " This is clearly the business of the tax officers : They shall apprise the 
 people of the amount of assessment, that they may hear beforehand at 
 the proper time; they shall proceed according to the orders of the 
 governors and the provisions of law; and when the time for paying- 
 taxes shall arrive, they shall collect the amount and deliver it to the 
 governor, and the governor to the premier, and the premier to the King. 
 The tax officers shall also direct the public labor for the King, but may 
 commit its details to the land agents, presiding themselves over them 
 in this work. They shall also have charge of any new business which 
 the King may design to extend through the Kingdom, but in their 
 doings they ahall be subordinate to the governors. They shall be 
 arbiters of the tax laws, and in all cases where land agents' or landlords 
 oppress the peasantry, and in every difficulty between land agents and 
 tenants, and everything specified in the tax law established June 7th, 
 1839. 
 
 "In this manner shall they proceed: Each shall exercise his office 
 
90 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 in his own district. If a difficulty arise between & land agent and a 
 tenant the tax officer shall investigate it, and if th£ tenant is in fault 
 the tax officer and land agent shall execute the law upon him; but if 
 the land agent is in fault in the judgment of the tax officer the latter 
 shall call the other tax officers of the island, and, if they agree with 
 him, judgment against the land agent is confirmed, and the governor 
 shall execute the law on him; but if any believe the tax officer to 
 have erred the governor may be apprised and try the case over again, 
 and if he is believed to have erred the case may be made known to 
 the supreme judges, and they shall try the case anew. 
 
 "OF THE JUDGES. 
 
 "The governor of each island shall choose judges for the island 
 according to his own mind, two or more, at his own discretion, and 
 give them a written commission. When they receive this they shall 
 not be removed without trial, but the law may limit their term of office. 
 
 " In this manner shall they proceed : The court days shall be declared 
 beforehand, and when the appointed day arrives they shall proceed 
 with trials according to law. To them shall be given jurisdiction in 
 respect to all the laws except those connected with taxation, and to 
 the difficulties between land agents, landlords, and tenants. The 
 governor shall sustain them and execute their judgment. But if their 
 judgment is thought to be unjust he who thinks so may complain or 
 appeal to the supreme judges. 
 
 ."OF THE SUPEEME JUDGES. - 
 
 "The elected representatives shall choose four judges to assist the 
 King and premier, and these six shall be the supreme judges of the 
 Kingdom. This shall be their business: Cases of difficulty not well 
 adjusted by the tax officers or island judges they shall try again 
 according to law; the court days shall be declared beforehand, that 
 those who are in difficulty may apply, and the decision of this court 
 shall stand. There is thereafter no appeal. Life and death, to bind 
 and release, to fine and not to fine, are at their disposal, and with them 
 the end of controversy. 
 
 "OF CHANGES IN THE CONSTITUTION. 
 
 "This constitution shall not be considered as fully established until 
 the people generally shall have heard it, and certain persons as herein 
 mentioned shall be chosen and shall assent to it, then firmly estab- 
 lished is this constitution. 
 
 "And thereafter, if it be designed to alter it, the people shall be first 
 apprised of the nature of the amendment intended to be introduced, 
 and the next year, at the meeting of the nobles and representatives, 
 if they agree to insert a passage or to annul a passage, they may do it 
 lawfully. 
 
 " This constitution, above stated, has been agreed to by the nobles, 
 and our names are set to it this e" ghth day of October, in the year of 
 our Lord 1840, at Honolulu, Oahu. 
 (Signed), 
 
 " Kameiiameha III, 
 " Kekauluohi." 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 91 
 
 a The house of nobles, or hereditary lords and ladies, consisted of 
 the King himself, a female premier, four governors of islands, four 
 women of rank, and five chiefs of the tyiird rank. The people were 
 allowed to choose by districts annually seven men to be members of 
 the national Legislature for a year: two from Hawaii, two from Maui 
 and adjacent islands, two from Oahu, and one from Kauai, the Govern- 
 ment bearing their expenses. The proposition was also distinctly made 
 to increase the number after a time. The right of suffrage, so far as 
 to vote for one or two men to act in making laws and appointing 
 supreme assistant judges, was extended to all, but guarded with pecu- 
 liar care." 
 
 XIV. Also the following from the remarks of mr. draper, 
 
 OF MASSACHUSETTS, MADE IN THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES, 
 AND PUBLISHED IN THE CONGRESSIONAL RECORD OF FEBRUARY 
 
 4, 1894. 
 
 I believe that the true policy of this Government is to negotiate a 
 suitable treaty with the de facto Government in Hawaii, and annex the 
 islands. 
 
 After this (or before if necessary), if Liliuokalani is supposed to have 
 any rights, purchase them (since she is willing to sell), biit on no 
 account ought we to neglect this opportunity of securing this naval and 
 coaling station, so important to us, both from the point of view T of com- 
 merce and of coast defense. 
 
 I will first point out briefly its advantages to us from a commercial 
 point of view. 
 
 Situated at the intersection of the trade route between North Amer- 
 ica and Australasia, with the rich commercial stream which will flow 
 between the China Seas and the Atlantic as soon as the Isthmus canal 
 (whether it be through Nicaragua or Panama) is opened, the position 
 of Hawaii is ideal for controlling both lines of commerce; and, for a 
 nation which expects to maintain trade routes in the Pacific, its pos- 
 session is a necessity. 
 
 All the great commercial powers recognize the fact that our trade 
 must be guarded; that convenient stations, as near as possible to the 
 well-defined trade routes, must be established; and that supplies and 
 facilities for refitting may be available at distances not too widely 
 separated. 
 
 Until 1886 Hawaii was nearer to the territory of the United States 
 than to that of any other power, the distance to San Francisco being 
 but 2,100 miles, while the British fortified port of Victoria, with its 
 neighboring dockyard of Esquimault, and coal mines of Nanaimo, was 
 2,360 miles distant. The next nearest British port was Leonka, in the 
 Fiji, group, 2,700 miles distant in an opposite direction. 
 
 French territory was 2,380 miles distant at Tahiti ; Germany held the 
 Admiralty Islands, distant 3,400 miles; and Spain the Caroline Islands, 
 2,600 miles distant, and the Ladrones, about 2,900 miles distant. 
 
 Since that time Germany has moved up to a distance of 2,098 miles, 
 by annexing the Marshall Islands and placing herself in a flanking 
 position on both the South Pacific and transpacific trade routes. 
 France, by the acquisition of the Low Archipelago and the Marquesas 
 Islands, is 2,050 miles distant from Hawaii, on the South Pacific route. 
 Great Britain has advanced from Fiji toward the intersecting point on 
 clearly define! lines, annexing group after group and detached islands 
 when they were on the line of approach, even though uninhabited or 
 without harbors and of no commercial value, until in 1891 her flag was 
 
92 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 planted on Johnston Island, 600 miles from Hawaii, and the nearest 
 point she can approach to her American territory, unless the next move 
 be the occupation of Hawaii itself. 
 
 In one year, 1888, British cruisers took possession of the Savage, 
 Suwarrow, and Phoenix groups and Christmas and Fanning islands, 
 and in 1892 the occupation of the Gilbert and Ellice groups and Gard- 
 ner and Danger islands completed the covering of the South Pacilic 
 trade from Johnston Island to Australia. The only unannexed group 
 on that line remaining is the Sainoan Islands, and they are closely sur- 
 rounded by British and French possessions. 
 
 It has not been a blind grab for territory which has been going on 
 in the South Pacific for six years past, but a working out of strategical 
 schemes with definite ends in view; and the United States is the only 
 great power interested in the Pacific trade which has uothad the wis- 
 dom to acquire territory in localities where the great trade of the future 
 will need guarding and supplying. 
 
 Samoa and Hawaii have been ripe to our hands for years. They are 
 most advantageously situated for our needs, as bases from which our 
 cruisers could work in time of war to protect our own trade and break 
 up that of an enemy. The moral force of the United States is all that 
 has kept European hands off these two groups to the present time, but 
 should a strategic necessity for their occupation by either of those 
 powers arise moral force would lose its power and we would have to be 
 prepared to then fight for them or to retire at once from the absurd 
 dog-in-the-manger position we have so long occupied. 
 
 To appreciate fully the question of ocean trade it is well to observe 
 the policy which Great Britain has consistently and successfully fol- 
 lowed for generations in developing and supporting her commerce. 
 Trade with India was established, then the route was guarded. When 
 the Suez Canal was cut a different disposition was needed ; and they 
 now have the complete chain of guard stations formed by Gibraltar, 
 Malta, Cyprus, Egypt, and Aden, the chain being continued to China 
 by Ceylon, Penang, Singapore, and Hongkong. The route around the 
 Cape of Good Hope and to Australia is covered by Sierra Leone, 
 Ascension, St. Helena, Cape Town, Natal, Zanzibar, and Mauritius. To 
 America the route is guarded by St. Johns, Halifax, Bermuda, Jamaica, 
 St. Lucia, Barbados, Nassau, Balize, and Demerara. 
 
 The Falkland Islands at the southern extremity of America form a 
 guard station for the trade passing around Cape Horn, and up to this 
 point it is well to note that no station is farther than 3,000 miles from 
 the next on the trade route it is designed to protect; and cruisers 
 patrolling the routes, as well as merchant vessels traversing them, need 
 never be farther removed than 1,500 miles from a base where supplies 
 of coal and facilities for refitting are available. 
 
 The foresighted statesmen of Great Britain have had a full under- 
 standing of the fact that the i)reservation intact of the circulation of 
 British ships in the great arteries of trade is an absolute requisite to 
 the well-being and even life of the British Empire, and this it is which 
 has guided them in the establishing around the world a complete chain 
 of guarded stations, from which her commerce can be supplied and 
 succored, whether peace or war prevail. 
 
 Until very recent times British trade in the Pacific has not been 
 essential so far as the welfare of the Empire was concerned, and the 
 guarding stations at the Falkland Islands, Fiji, and Victoria, British 
 Columbia, may have been supposed to be sufficient for all needs; but 
 it is worthy of note that as long ago as 1877 an essayist of acknowl- 
 edged ability (Vice- Admiral Colomb, of the British navy) asserted, " I 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 93 
 
 bold it futile to attempt the defense of the Pacific trade route by any 
 sort of vessels which must rest on the bases of Vancouver, Fiji, and 
 the Falkland Islands." It is also worthy of note that contempora- 
 neously with the completion of the Canadian Pacific Bailroad, and the 
 establishment from its Pacific terminus of regular steamer lines to 
 China and to Australasia, the British bases began to be moved closer 
 together; and when the probability of the building of the Nicaragua 
 Canal was established, the movement toward the trade center at HaAvaii 
 became a very rapid one. 
 
 At present, instead of the wide gaps in the British system of 3,000- 
 mile stations, which existed when the Falkland Island station was 
 7,900 miles from that at Vancouver and 6,700 miles from that at Fiji, 
 which in turn was 4,800 miles from Vancouver, they have established 
 the flag of the Empire at Easter Island, 2,400 miles from the Falkland 
 group, which is in turn 600 miles from newly acquired Ducie Island, 
 from where Pitcairn Island is 300, and the Cook group still farther, 
 1,800 miles, on a line toward Fiji. On the line from Fiji to Vancouver 
 the gap has been shortened to L',900 miles from Johnston Island to Van- 
 couver, and all the intermediate territory from Johnston Island to Fiji 
 is under the British flag. 
 
 Other stations are still needed, and British strategists make no secret 
 of the assertion that on the outbreak of war with a maritime power, a 
 necessary first move, unless the Pacific trade were to be abandoned, 
 would be the occupation and retention of Hawaii, Guadalupe Island, 
 off the coast of Lower California, and one of the islands in the Bay of 
 Panama, with a reliance on the friendship or fears of the South Ameri- 
 can States for depots at Callao and Valparaiso. As a matter of fact, 
 they have such a depot at present in the harbor of Callao. 
 
 Now, Mr. Speaker, sentiment has not hoisted the British flag over 
 these isolated ports, which, to maintain in a state of efficiency, are a 
 source of great expense without any apparent return. Their coal 
 depots, storehouses, repairing facilities, and at salient points batteries 
 and garrisons, are provided by a business instinct purely, which recog- 
 nizes that the trade which is the lifeblood of the empire must be 
 efficiently guarded; and centuries of experience have taught them the 
 proper means to employ. 
 
 If there is a gap in the guard stations of the Pacific trade at present, 
 or a salient point which should be possessed, and Hawaii is such a 
 point, sentiment, which does not trouble our British friends, will not pre- 
 vent their cruisers, under the direction of far-seeing statesmen, whose 
 aim is to secure any and every advantage for British trade, from seizing 
 and holding, when the time to them seems propitious, just what is 
 thought necessary to strengthen the weak places in their trade-route 
 patrol. 
 
 War ships to pa.trol a trade route efficiently, to guard their own com- 
 merce and damage that of an enemy, require bases from which to operate 
 with the certainty of finding their necessities supplied at any oneof them. 
 Merchant vessels in time of war require them as points of rendezvous 
 and refuge, and, as we have seen, Great Britain has* foreseen the 
 necessities and provided such bases at convenient points. No other 
 nation has this immense advantage, although France and Germany 
 ar# making great efforts, the former in Africa, Asia, and Australasia, 
 and the latter, so far, in Africa and Australasia only, where coal depots 
 and bases for naval operations have been established. 
 
 The United States has the right to establish coal depots in Samoa 
 and Hawaii, and at present small supplies exist at both places; but 
 
94 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 unprotected they are of no value, and Germany has aiual rights in the 
 former. 
 
 The concession in 1887 of Pearl River, in Hawaii, to the United States 
 for use as naval station, with exclusive privilege of establishing a dry 
 dock, storehouses, and repair shops, is a valuable one, but has never 
 been utilized. The situation is admirable, and the estimated cost of 
 necessary fortifications and harbor works is moderate in view of the 
 great advantage to our nation. 
 
 Our position with regard to dry docks in the Pacific is peculiarly 
 weak. Modern war vessels require docking at intervals, and a fleet to 
 maintain command of the sea must have dry docks in which to make 
 repairs and maintain the ship in a state of full efficiency as to speed. 
 We have not one dock outside the mainland of our country which 
 would be available for our ships in time of war; and on the entire 
 Pacific coast have at present but one large and one small dock, at the 
 Mare Island navy-yard, and one building in Puget Sound, and our 
 vessels in the Pacific would have to return to them whenever docking 
 was requisite. 
 
 Great Britain, on the contrary, has made ample provisions in this 
 respect. Bordering on the Pacific she has Government dry docks at 
 Esquimault, Brisbane, Sydney, Melbourne, and Hongkong, while many 
 private docks are available in the ports of Australia, New Zealand, 
 Hongkong, Singapore, Penang, and Lndia. 
 
 France has Government dry docks in New Caledonia and Saigon, 
 Cochin China. Holland has governmental dry docks, which would 
 probably be available for Germany, in Sourabaya and Batavia; and 
 Russia has two large ones in the southeast corner of Siberia, at Vladi- 
 vostock. We must have additional docking facilities if we are to 
 maintain either naval power or trade in the Pacific waters it time of 
 war. 
 
 Coming now to the strategic advantages from coast defense point of 
 view. 
 
 No naval force can operate on a hostile coast without a friendly base 
 within easy distance. Our Atlantic coast is faced by a line of foreign 
 bases. England has strongly fortified Halifax on our Northeast border, 
 and built Government dry docks both there and at St. Johns. Six 
 hundred and ninety miles from New York, and less than 600 from the 
 Carolina coast, she has at great expense fortified Bermuda, furnished 
 it with the largest floating dry dock in the world, and supplied it with 
 great stores of coal and shops for repair work, and all for the sole pur- 
 pose of maintaining a base from which British naval forces could oper- 
 ate against the Atlantic coast of the United States in time of war. 
 Jamaica and St. Lucia perform the same duty with regard to our Gulf 
 coasts and the isthmus transit; and it is a notable fact that the 
 defenses of all these places have been extensively augmented since an 
 isthmus canal became a possibility of the near future. 
 
 France has St. Pierre and Miquelon on our Northeast borders, with 
 Guadeloupe, Martinique, and Cayenne on the South coast. Spain has 
 her bases in Cuba and Porto Rico; the Dutch in Curacoa, and the 
 Danes in St. Thomas; and it is not improbable that either of the two 
 latter may be available for a German base should occasion arise. 
 
 Any power which has not such a naval base off our coast can not 
 make successful war upon the United States, a fact which was quickly 
 appreciated by Italy during a late diplomatic incident; and an early 
 move of the United States in a war with either of the European powers 
 possessing these bases would have to be their capture and retention, if 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 95 
 
 possible. If the United States held all the bases named it would be 
 practically free from attack on its Atlantic coast. 
 
 In the Pacific we now have the opportunity to secure our Western 
 coast by accepting possession of Hawaii as our most rational form of 
 coast defense. With adequate fortifications on these islands, and a 
 suitable naval force in the Pacific, our coast would be far more secure 
 in time of war than it could be made by any expenditure for harbor 
 defenses on the mainland alone. 
 
 Further, if our commercial interests are to predominate in the future 
 in those waters our fleet must predominate there also, and a properly 
 proportionate fleet would be a sufficient guaranty that serious attack 
 would not be made on this most important naval base. 
 
 The same is equally true of our entire Pacific coast, as with such a 
 fleet, with bases at San Francisco, Hawaii, and the entrance to the 
 Nicaragua Canal, not only would our Pacific trade be secure and that 
 of any other power untenable, but our coast line would be equally secure, 
 and American control of the canal, so far as the Pacific end of it is 
 concerned, would be assured. 
 
 Excepting Hawaii the only base for possible extensive naval opera- 
 tions against the Pacific States is the British station at Esquimault, 
 which is susceptible of capture by a land expedition. 
 
 It must be distinctly understood that Hawaii can not remain indepen- 
 dent supported only by moral force. It is of too great strategic value 
 and will assuredly meet the fate of all islands and isolated points of 
 like value at the hands of either Great Britain, France, or Germany, 
 each of the two former having already once seized them (once in 1843 
 and once in 1849). Even if the United States were by moral force to pre- 
 serve Hawaiian independence during time of peace the islands would 
 undoubtedly be seized by the first naval power with whom we went to 
 war, and held by all the force it could muster, as a base from which to 
 attack our Western coast and gain control of the prospective canal. 
 
 For the United States to expend great sums on the local defense 
 of San Francisco in the shape of forts and harbor defenses, and leave 
 Hawaii to become a base for operations against them, is a short-sighted 
 and extravagant policy. 
 
 As Bermuda is a standing menace in front of our Atlantic coast, so 
 will Ha waii become a similar one to our Pacific coast, if we do not hold 
 it as an essential part of our coast defense. 
 
 COAL. 
 
 To make the advantage of Hawaii to this country from a naval stand- 
 point clearer I will devote a little time to some details of the question 
 of coal and coaling stations. 
 
 The possession of unlimited coal is a great advantage to a nation, but 
 in order to convert it into naval advantage it must be placed on board 
 of a ship of war. This is a simple thing with us so long as our naval 
 vessels are in home ports, or so long as we are at peace, wherever the 
 ships may be. It is in time of war that the difficulties of making our 
 naval strength felt away from our own coasts will become apparent. 
 Keutral ports will then be closed to our cruisers so far as supplying their 
 coal necessities is concerned, for coal will be contraband of war as much 
 as is other ammunition. Coaling in the open sea from supply ships is, 
 up to the present time, an unsolved problem, and even if satisfactory 
 mechanical arrangements be devised the supply vessels must run the 
 gauntlet of hostile cruis srs for great distances. A certainty of finding 
 
96 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 the collier in specified localities on definite dates, which is almost impos- 
 sible without naval stations, must also be established, as a failure to 
 meet would result in leaving the cruiser helpless. 
 
 Wind is no longer a motive power for ships of war, and the days 
 when a cruiser could keep the sea and do the work she was designed 
 for, so long as her provisions and water held out, are gone. Coal is 
 now the prime necessity, and unless our cruisers have points provided 
 for them to which they can go with a certainty of finding a supply, 
 they will on the outbreak of war have to be brought home to operate 
 off our own coasts from the home bases of supply, or else be left pow- 
 erless in neutral harbors until the close of the war. 
 
 The only other solution is to build cruisers of such size that they 
 can carry their own coal and remain at sea for long periods independent 
 of coal depots or supply vessels. 
 
 According to the published performances of our cruisers the very best 
 that has yet been done by one of them is the late voyage of the Phila- 
 delphia, steaming from Callao to Honolulu, a distance of 5,200 miles, 
 burning 703 tons of coal in eighteen days, at the rate of 12 knots an 
 hour, and 39 tons of coal a day, which gives a distance of 7-3 knots 
 per ton of coal burned. 
 
 As this ship and all the others of her class (and we have a number 
 of them) can carry only about 1,000 tons of coal, in some cases less, 
 she would have been powerless to reach any other port from Honolulu 
 had she not been able to replenish her supply upon arrival. 
 
 It is not known that the cruisers of any foreign power have done so 
 well ; and it is a fact that, class for class, our cr uisers carry more coal 
 and steam better than do those of other nations; but it is also a fact that 
 we need much greater coal-carrying capacity than we have at present, 
 or else we must follow foreign example and establish coal depots. 
 
 It is published that we have two commerce-destroyers, with light 
 batteries, substantially completed, each to carry 2,200 tons of coal, 
 which at the Philadelphia's rate of 7*3 knots per ton of coal, would 
 enable them to cover at slow speed about 16,000 miles ; but if they are 
 to destroy commerce they will have to occasionally steam at much 
 greater speed than 10 to 12 knots, and it is safe to say that in time of 
 war they could not cover a greater distance than 12,000 miles without 
 replenishing their supply. This would mean an immediate return after 
 a cruise of 6,000 miles, as we have now no place to which they could go 
 away from our mainland, with a certainty of getting the coal that is 
 absolutely necessary to their usefulness. 
 
 England does^not need a coal capacity in any of her vessels greater 
 than will enable them to traverse 4,000 or 5,000 miles, as we have 
 seen that her coal depots are planted along the trade routes at dis- 
 tances of about 3,000 miles. 
 
 France, where she has important commercial interests, has similar 
 depots; so have Germany, Holland, and Spain. 
 
 Eussia is nearly as badly off as is the United States, but she has the 
 fortified depotof Vladivostock in Asiatic waters and has lately acquired 
 the use of French ports wherever she may need them. Even with these 
 advantages she is furnishing herself with crusiers of great size, carry- 
 ing over 3,000 tons of coal. 
 
 We have neither the depots nor the cruisers of great coal endurance; 
 and the most rational mode of strengthening this very apparent weakness 
 would seem to be to obtain coal depots, as the English do, and to begin 
 by accepting the most valuable one of Hawaii, 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 97 
 
 As an example on this point, no foreign armored ships have a greater 
 coal endurance than those of Italy, yet not one of these immense ships 
 can steam over 7,000 miles without replenishing its supply, and some 
 of them can not do so well. 
 
 As the distance from Italy to the coast of the United States is prac- 
 tically about 5,000 miles, they would have a very brief period of use- 
 fulness after arrival on our coasts, in the absence of the bases possessed 
 by other European powers, and would have to rely on supply cruisers 
 over a long line of communication, which could be cut off by cruisers, 
 in the absence of the most efficient patrol. 
 
 The same is quite true of the United States or any other power which 
 undertakes a naval expedition without a base, as no number of batteries 
 or battalions stationed on the mainland can secure the safety of the 
 needed supplies while in transit, or the usefulness of a naval force at 
 any distance from a home port. 
 
 The development of foreign commerce is one, perhaps the principal, 
 argument advanced for the free-trade policy of the Democratic party. 
 While not agreeing with this policy, I am willing to agree that ocean 
 trade is an important source of prosperity to .any nation. That of the 
 Pacific is just opening on an era of activity which will be vastly aug- 
 mented on the completion of an isthmus canal, and this trade belongs 
 to the United States, if we are wise enough to secure it. 
 
 But trade, to establish itself on a sound basis, must feel assured of 
 protection at all times, and know that it will not have to be abandoned 
 on the outbreak of every little war which may turn loose upon it a pack 
 of destroyers of insignificant strength, compelling it to lie idle with all 
 the capital involved until peace prevails again. 
 
 If the United States aim at commercial supremacy in the Pacific, its 
 trade must have such assurances, and a first necessity is the acquisi- 
 tion of bases for the protectors. Not only Hawaii is needed, but Somoa 
 (distant 2,260 miles) ; a station at the mouth of the canal (say, 4,200 
 miles from Honolulu and 3,000 from San Francisco) ; and another at 
 the Straits of Magellan (distant 4,000 miles from the isthmus and 5,000 
 from Somoa). With these bases, a properly organized fleet of suffi- 
 cient size to keep the communications open between them, will hold 
 the Pacific as an American ocean, dominated by American commercial 
 enterprise for all time. 
 
 Now, the value of these islands to the United States for the reasons 
 I have stated has long been appreciated by American statesmen. 
 
 Minister Stevens, whatever attacks may be made upon him, is cer- 
 tainly an able, farsighted, and loyal American, and his letter of 
 November 20, 1892, to Secretary Foster, on this subject, is well worthy 
 of perusal. 
 
 Minister McCook wrote in 1866 to Secretary Seward in regard to the 
 Sandwich Islands, in part, as follows: 
 
 "They are the resting place, supply depot, and reshipping point of 
 all our American whaling fleet. The greater part of the agricultural, 
 commercial, and moneyed interests of the islands are in the hands of 
 American citizens. All vessels from our Pacific coast to China pass 
 close to these shores. 
 
 " Geographically these islands occupy the same important relative 
 position toward the Pacific that the Bermudas do toward the Atlantic 
 coast of the United States, a position which makes them important to 
 the English, convenient to the French, and, in the event of war with 
 either of those powers, absolutely necessary to the United States-" 
 S. Kep. 227 Z 
 
98 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Minister Pierce, in 1871, wrote the following to Secretary Fish: 
 
 "Impressed with the importance of the subject now presented for 
 consideration, I beg leave to suggest the inquiry whether the period 
 has not arrived making it proper, wise, and sagacious for the United 
 States Government to again consider the project of annexing the 
 Hawaiian Islands to the territory of the Eepnblic. That such is to be 
 the political destiny of this archipelago seems a foregone conclusion 
 in the opinion of all who have given attention to the subject in this 
 country, the United States, England, France, and Germany. 
 
 "A majority of the aborigines, Creoles, and naturalized foreigners of 
 this country, as I am credibly informed, are favorable, even anxious for 
 the consummation of the measure named. 
 
 "The native population is fast disappearing. The number existing 
 is now estimated at 45,000, having decreased about 15,000 since the 
 census of 1860. The number of foreigners in addition is between 5,000 
 and 6,000, two-thirds of whom are from the United States, and they own 
 more than that proportion of foreign capital, as represented in the agri- 
 culture, commerce, navigation, and whale fisheries of the Kingdom. 
 
 "I now proceed to state some points of a more general character 
 which should influence the United States Government in their decision 
 of the policy of acquiring possession of this archipelago, their geograph- 
 ical position, occupying, as it does, an important central strategical 
 point in the North Pacific Ocean, valuable, perhaps necessary, to the 
 United States for a naval depot and coaling station, and to shelter and 
 protect our commerce and navigation, which in this hemisphere is des- 
 tined to increase enormously from our intercourse with the 500,000,000 
 population of China, Japan, and Australia. Humboldt predicted that 
 the commerce on the Pacific would in time rival that of the Atlantic. 
 A future generation, no doubt, will see the prophecy fulfilled. 
 
 "The immense injury inflicted on American navigation and commerce 
 by Great Britain in the war of 1812-1814 through her possession ot 
 Bermuda and other West India Islands, as also that suffered by the 
 English from French privateers from the Isle of France during the wars 
 between those two nations, are instances in proof of the necessity of 
 anticipating and preventing, if we can, similar evils that may issue from 
 these islands if held by other powers. 
 
 "Their proximity to the Pacific States of the Union, fine climate and 
 soil, and tropical productions of sugar, coffee, rice, fruits, hides, goat- 
 skins, salt, cotton, fine wool, etc., required in the West, in exchange for 
 flour, grain, lumber, shooks, and manufactures of cotton, wool, iron, and 
 other articles, are evidence of the commercial value of one to the other 
 region. Is it probable that any European power who may hereafter be 
 at war with the United States will refrain from taking possession of this 
 weak Kingdom in view of the great injury that could be done to our 
 commerce through their acquisition to them?" 
 
 Secretary Fish, in a letter of instruction of March, 1873, used the fol- 
 lowing language: 
 
 "The position of the Sandwich Islands as an outpost, fronting and 
 commanding the whole of our possessions on the Pacific Ocean, gives to 
 the future of those islands a peculiar interest to the Government and 
 people of the United States. It is very clear that this Government can 
 not be expected to assent to their transfer from their present control to 
 that of any powerful maritime or commercial nation. Such transfer to 
 a maritime power would threaten a military surveillance in the Pacific 
 similar to that which Bermuda has afforded in the Atlantic. The latter 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 99 
 
 has been submitted to from necessity, inasmuch as it was congenital 
 with our Government, but we desire no additional similar outposts in 
 the hands of those who may at some future time use them to our dis- 
 advantage. 77 
 
 Gen. Schofield, in May, 1873, under confidential instructions from the 
 Secretary of War, made a full report upon the value of Pearl Harbor 
 as a coaling and repair station, recommending its acquisition, and later 
 lie appeared before a committee of the House of Eepresentatives to urge 
 the importance of some measure looking to the control of the Sandwich 
 Islands by the United States. 
 
 Now, the desired and desirable opportunity has arrived. The Pro- 
 visional Goverment proposes a treaty of annexation, and the so-called 
 Queen is ready to part with such rights as she has for a comparatively 
 small sum. 
 
 The whites of the island desire earnestly to join us, and the natives 
 certainly are not violently opposed. 
 
 This is shown by the fact that when the American flag was lowered 
 in Hawaii, by order of Commissioner Blount, although it created some 
 excitement in this country, it caused no rejoicing there, according to 
 Mr. Blount's report. 
 
 He says: 
 
 " Inspired with such feelings, and confident no disorder would ensue, 
 I directed the removal of the flag of the United States from the Gov- 
 ernment building, and the return of the American troops to their ves- 
 sels. This was accomplished without any demonstration of joy or 
 grief on the part of the populace. 77 
 
 Capt. Hooper says : 
 
 " There were no demonstrations of any kind as the American flag 
 came down, and not a single cheer greeted the Hawaiian flag as it was 
 raised aloft. The native men stood around in groups, or singly, smok- 
 ing and chatting and nodding familiarly to passing friends, or leaning 
 idly against the trees and fences, while the women and children, which 
 formed a large proportion of the assemblage, were talking and laugh- 
 ing good-naturedly. As the hour for hauling down the American flag 
 approached, many people, men, women, and children could be seen 
 approaching the Government square in a most leisurely manner, and 
 showing more interest in the gala-day appearance of the crowd than 
 in the restoration of their national flag. The air of good-natured indif- 
 ference and idle curiosity with which the native men regarded the pro- 
 ceedings, and the presence of the women and children in their white or 
 bright- colored dresses was more suggestive of a country "fair 77 or 
 horse race than the sequel of a ' revolution. 7 77 
 
 Even the presence of the "armed forces 77 of the Provisional Govern- 
 ment, numbering, perhaps, 200, parading the corridors of the Govern- 
 .ment house, failed to elicit any sign of a feeling of anger or resentment. 
 
 Mr. John F. Colburn, one of the Queen 7 s cabinet, in describing the 
 revolution, says: 
 
 "The next day (Monday) the proclamation dictated by these gentle- 
 men was printed and posted and distributed all over town. Later on 
 in the day two mass meetings were held, one by the native element 
 and the other by the foreign element. At the former the natives 
 accepted the proclamation, though it was directly contrary to what 
 they wanted (a new constitution), and the latter denounced the Queen 
 and left everything in the hands of the committee of safetv suoke.n 
 about, 77 
 
100 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Colburn's remark that the natives accepted the proclamation, althoi gh 
 it was directly contrary to what they wanted, is delicious. 
 
 There is no reason against annexation in the dissimilarity of laws, 
 as an official document issued by our War Department in February of 
 this year contains, the following statement: 
 
 "The laws are modeled on those of the United States. There is a 
 supreme court of justice, and, in addition, circuit judges and justices 
 of the peace." 
 
 On the authority of this book I also state that 01 per cent of the 
 trade of these islands is with the United States. 
 
 The former policy of our Government toward Hawaii and the antici- 
 pation of their eventual annexation is detailed in the report of Secre- 
 tary Foster, of February 15, 1893, from which I will read briefly. 
 
 [Seriate Ex. Doc. No. 77, Fifty-second Congress, second session.] 
 
 "The policy of the United States has been consistently and con- 
 stantly declared against any foreign aggression in the Kingdom of 
 Hawaii inimical to the necessarily paramount rights and interests of the 
 American people there and the uniform contemplation of their annex- 
 ation as a contingent necessity. But beyond that it is shown that 
 annexation has been on more than one occasion avowed as a policy and 
 attempted as a fact. Such a solution was admitted as early as 1850 
 by so farsighted a statesman as Lord Palmerston when he recom- 
 mended to a visiting Hawaiian commission the contingency of a pro- 
 tectorate under the United States, or of becoming an integral part of 
 this nation in fulfillment of a destiny due to close neighborhood and 
 commercial dependence upon the Pacific States. 
 
 "Early in 1851 a contingent deed of cession of the Kingdom was 
 drawn and signed by the King and placed sealed in the hands of the 
 commissioner of the United States, who was to open it and act upon 
 its provisions at the first hostile shot fired by France in subversion ot 
 Hawai ian independence. 
 
 "In 1851 Mr. Marcy aadvocated annexation, and a draft of a treaty 
 was actually agreed upon with the Hawaiian ministry, but its com- 
 pletion was delayed by the successful exercise of foreign influence 
 upon the heir to the throne, and finally defeated by the death of the King, 
 Kamehameha III. 
 
 "In 1867 Mr. Seward, having become advised of a strong annexa- 
 tion sentiment in the islands, instructed our minister at Honolulu 
 favorably to receive any native overtures for annexation. And on the 
 12th of September, 1867, he wrote to Mr. McOook that 'if the policy 
 of annexation should conflict with the policy of reciprocity, annexa- 
 tion is in every case to be preferred.' 
 
 "President Johnson in his annual message of December 9, 1868, 
 regarded reciprocity with Hawaii as desirable ' until the people of the 
 island shall of themselves, at no distant day, voluntarily apply for 
 admission into the Union.' 
 
 "In 1871, on the 5th of April, President Grant, in a special message, 
 significantly solicited some expression of the views of the Senate 
 respecting the advisability of annexation. 
 
 "In an instruction of March 25, 1873, Mr. Fish considered the neces- 
 sity of annexing the islands in accordance with the wise foresight of 
 thoro who see a future that must extend the jurisdiction and the lim- 
 its of this nation, and that will require a resting spot in midocean 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 101 
 
 between tlie Pacific coast and the vast domains of Asia, whicK jire now 
 opening to commerce and Christian civilization.' And he directed 'our 
 minister not to discourage the feeling which may exist in favor of 
 annexation to the United States, but to seek and even invite infoi [na- 
 tion touching the terms and conditions upon which that object might 
 be effected. 
 
 U Since the conclusion of the reciprocity treaty of 1875 it has been 
 the obvious policy of the succeeding administrations to assert and 
 defend against other powers the exclusive commercial rights of 
 the United States and to fortify the maintenance of the existing 
 Hawaiian Government through the direct support of the United States 
 so long as that Government shall prove able to protect our paramount 
 rights and interests. 
 
 "On December 1, 1881, Mr. Blaine, in an instruction to the American 
 minister at Honolulu, wrote: 
 
 <u It (this Government) firmly believes that the position of the 
 Hawaiian Islands, as the key to the dominion of the American Pacific, 
 demands their benevolent neutrality, to which end it will earnestly 
 cooperate with the native Government. And if through any cause the 
 maintenance of such a position of benevolent neutrality should be 
 found by Hawaii to be impracticable, this Government would then 
 unhesitatingly meet the altered situation by seeking an avowedly 
 American solution of the grave issues presented.'" 
 
 Now, a word as to the objections to annexation and I will close. I 
 know that a new line of thought has been developed among us, which 
 I can not better characterize than by calling it a system of national 
 self-abnegation. 
 
 If any policy can be shown to be for the special advantage of the 
 United States gentlemen holding these views oppose it. 
 
 If Hawaii is valuable to us there will be so much the more generosity 
 in presenting it to England. 
 
 If our business has been more prosperous, and our labor better paid 
 than elsewhere, they think this is not fair to the rest of the world, and 
 advocate a reduction of the tariff to equalize conditions. 
 
 I do not address myself to gentlemen holding such views, as I can 
 not understand their position nor they mine. 
 
 From my own standpoint I have heard only one objection to the 
 policy of annexation that seemed to me to have substantial weight. It 
 is that the population of the Sandwich Islands are in great part unfit 
 for American citizenship. This may be true, but in that case we can 
 annex it as a part of one of our present States, or maintain a territo- 
 rial government until they are fitted, as we are doing in the case of 
 Alaska, and as we have done heretofore with other annexations. 
 
 The fear of annexing these small islands, which we so much need, 
 ou grounds of opposition to territorial expansion, seems peculiar, almost 
 absurd, in a country more than three-quarters of whose territory comes 
 from annexations by purchase or otherwise. 
 
 Square miles. 
 
 In 1783 our territory amounted to 827, 844 
 
 The Louisiana pnrcliase added .V 1, 179, 931 
 
 Florida added 59, 268 
 
 Texas added 376, 133 
 
 The Mexican cession, California, etc 545, 783 
 
 The G adsden purchase 45, 535 
 
 The Alaska purchase 577, 390 
 
 Making a total of 3,603,884 
 
102 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 After as 'sim Hating all this territory we ought not to be afraid of 
 (3,000 square miles more 1 . 
 
 To summarize: These islands will not only be valuable to us, but 
 their possession is a commercial and naval necessity. They are offered 
 to us by both of the parties who claim to be entitled to their control. 
 If we do not accept, their incorporation by one of the European powers 
 is likely, and they will be a menace to our Pacific coast from that time 
 forward. 
 
 As Americans, actuated by the desire to advance our country's inter- 
 ests, we shall never have a greater opportunity than the present one, 
 and I sincerely hope we shall take advantage of it. 
 
 XY. Also the following extract from an article, pub- 
 lished IN HARPER'S MAGAZINE FOR SEPTEMBER, 1883, PREPARED 
 BY MR. MARSHALL, A SPECIAL ENVOY OF KAMEHAMEHA III TO j 
 THE UNITED STATES AND ENGLAND, TO ARRANGE FOR THE REVO- 
 CATION OF THE ACTS OF LORD GEORGE PAULET IN OCCUPYING 
 HAWAII AS TERRITORY OF GREAT BRITAIN. 
 
 AN UNPUBLISHED CHAPTER OF HAWAIIAN HISTORY. 
 
 "From 1838 till 1843 the Hawaiian Islands were a bone of conten- 
 tion. Intrigues were constantly set on foot by agents and subjects of 
 France and England, having for their object the subversion of the 
 native Government and the seizure of the islands. In 1839 the French 
 compelled, the King, Kamehameha III, to comply with certain unwar- 
 rantable demands, and as a security for future good behavior to deposit 
 $20,000. It was thought that the demand was made in expectation 
 that the King would be unable to comply, and that thus the French 
 would have an excuse to seize the groups. The American merchants 
 came forward and raised the sum, and the peril was for a time averted. 
 
 "But the plots continued, and in 1842 the British consul, Ei chard 
 Charleton, a coarse and illiterate man, incited by an ambitious adven- 
 turer, one Alexander Simpson, endeavored to involve the native Gov-, 
 eminent in difficulties that would result in hoisting the British flag over 
 the group. In the same year Sir George Simpson, governor of the 
 Hudson Bay Company's territories, visited the islands. An English 
 gentleman of liberal views, he would not lend himself to the intrigues 
 of his countrymen, albeit one of them was his nephew, and by his advice 
 the King, harassed on all sides, decided to send commissioners to the 
 United States, England, and France to try to obtain, if possible, a defi- 
 nite acknowledgment of his Kingdom and sovereignty. 
 
 " To this important embassy were appointed Eev. William Eichards, 
 formerly one of the American missionaries, but who had been for some 
 time acting as adviser to the King, and Haalileo, a native chief. They 
 quietly embarked in a small schooner for Mazatlan, and crossed Mex- 
 ico to Vera Cruz. As soon as it was known that they had left the 
 islands on this mission the British consul, Charleton, also secretly 
 embarked for London, via Mexico, to lay his complaints before the 
 British Government, leaving Simpson as deputy to carry out their joint 
 designs, whom, however, the Hawaiian Government declined to 
 recognize. 
 
 "On the Mexican coast Charleton fell in with Lord George Paulet, 
 commanding Her British Majesty's frigate, the Carysfort, and made his 
 lordship, as his course afterward showed, a convert to his schemes, 
 and, by his formal and plausable complaints against the King, induced 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 103 
 
 Rear- Admiral Thomas, commanding the British sqiladron on that sta- 
 tion, to order the Carysfort to Honolulu for the purpose of investigating 
 the alleged grievances. 
 
 u On his arrival Lord Paulet, a hot headed young nobleman, readily 
 lent himself to the designs of Simpson, without inquiring into the 
 merits of the case, dazzled by the idea of so early in his career making 
 a brilliant stroke for his country, and extending her drumbeat round 
 the world by one more station. Making outrageous demands upon the 
 King, at the cannon's mouth, compliance with which he knew would be 
 impossible, he required, as an alternative, the immediate cession of the 
 Kingdom to England, or he would open fire upon the city and declare 
 war in the name of Great Britain. 
 
 "In this terrible crisis the proclamation issued by this native King 
 to his people is so touching and so king-like that I will quote it here: 
 
 " i Where are you, chiefs, people, and commons from my ancestors, 
 and people from foreign lands ? 
 
 " * Hear ye! I make known to you that I am in perplexity by reason 
 of difficulties into which I have been brought without cause, therefore 
 I have given away the life of our land. Hear ye ! but my rule over 
 you, my people, and your privileges will continue, for I have hope 
 that the life of the land will be restored when my conduct is justified. 
 
 " ' Done at Honolulu, Oahu, this 25th day of February, 1843. 
 
 " < Kamehameha III. 
 " ' Kekatjltjohi.' 
 
 u Lord Paulet took formal possession of the islands, installing himself 
 as governor of Her Majesty's new dominion, destroyed every Hawaiian 
 flag he could get hold of, and placed an embargo on every native vessel, 
 so that no one could go out and carry the news. 
 
 "An American man-of-war, the Boston, Oapt. Long, had come in a 
 few days before the cession. Oapt. Quackenbush, late of Norfolk, Va., 
 was then a midshipman on board of her. The Americans were very 
 indignant. They had their guns double- shotted in hopes of an oppor- 
 tunity to interfere, but, being on a cruise, could not go out of their way 
 to carry the news, and could only remain neutral. 
 
 "Lord Paulet would thus have cruelly prevented the King from 
 communicating with, his ambassadors, who were abroad successfully 
 working for the acknowledgment of his independence, hoping to com- 
 mit the home Government to an acceptance of this * voluntary ' cession 
 at the cannon's mouth before the other side of the story could be pre- 
 sented to it. His young lordship and Simpson chuckled over the suc- 
 cess of the stroke by which they had, as they supposed, closed every 
 avenue of egress for Hawaiian vessels, and secured the arrival of their 
 own dispatches in England in advance of every other version of the 
 story. V ankee shrewdness was, however, too much for his lordship's 
 plans. 
 
 " It happened that the King had chartered his own yacht, HoikaiJca 
 (Swift Runner), previously to the cession, to an American house for a 
 voyage to Mazatland and back. Lord Paulet, anxious to get posses- 
 sion of the only creditable craft at the islands, in order to send Simp- 
 son as his bearer of dispatches to England by the speediest way, and 
 being prevented, by its charter, from seizing the vessel without the con- 
 sent of the American house, offered, in case they would relinquish 
 their charter, to allow them to send an agent on the ship to attend to 
 their business on the coast, and to bring down any freight on the 
 return trip, thereby saving them the whole expense of the charter. 
 
104 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 "It must be remembered that in those days communication between 
 the islands of the Pacific and the coast was very infrequent, depending 
 on merchant ships that came from Boston twice a year, except for 
 occasional chance vessels. 
 
 "Lord Paulet rightly conjectured that the Yankee merchants would 
 jump at the offer to have all their business transacted at his expense, 
 but he little dreamed of all the use that might be made of the oppor- 
 tunity he was giving them. 
 
 "The officers of the Boston, who would have been glad of an excuse 
 for a forcible interference with his lordship's plans, not being allowed 
 that pleasure, consoled themselves by giving a ball on board, to which 
 the officers of the Carysfort were not invited. 
 
 "I was then a young merchant in Honolulu, and attended the ball 
 with many other of the American residents. At its height I was 
 quietly invited into the cabin of the Boston, where I found Capt. Long, 
 Dr. Judd, previously a prominent American missionary, then acting as 
 the King's minister, and other influential citizens and warm friends of 
 the King. Here I was told of the King's desire to send an envoy to 
 England to present his protest against Lord Pauleys act of violence, 
 and his answer to the charges against him, and to demand the restitu- 
 tion of his sovereignty. I was informed also of the opportunity offered 
 to the firm of Ladd & Co. of sending a messenger to the coast in the 
 yacht. 
 
 " Ladd & Co., who were warm friends of the island Government, had. 
 proposed that the King should send a secret ambassador, in the 
 character of their commercial agent, thus turning Lord Poulet's master- 
 stroke against himself in the neatest possible way. 
 
 "I was asked if I would go in this double capacity of ostensible super- 
 cargo and actual minister plenipotentiary. 
 
 "Mr. Charles Brewer, who was one of the council, a noble-hearted 
 man, with whom I was about associating myself in business — now 
 enjoying a green old age in Boston — not only gave consent to my 
 going, but agreed to advance for the King the necessary funds, and 
 take his pay in fire-wood, all of the King's other revenues having been 
 cut off. 
 
 " I readily accepted the commission. No time was to be lost. Lord 
 Poulet had rechristened the Haikaika as 'Her Majesty's tender Albert, 7 
 and was fitting her out with all possible dispatch. 
 
 " The King and his premier, a princess almost equal in rank, without 
 whose signature none of his acts was valid, had left the island of Oahu 
 immediately upon the cession, and in sullen dignity of despair buried 
 themselves among the mountains of the adjacent island of Maui, leaving 
 Dr. Judd, his minister, to represent and protect his interests — a man 
 of indomitable courage, unusual ability, and unflinching devotion to 
 his sovereign. 
 
 " Those happy isles in that day did not boast a lawyer. My creden- 
 tials were copied verbatim, except necessary variations, from the old 
 Blue Book containing the credentials of John Adams as the first Amer- 
 ican minister to England. Mine were a commission as envoy extraor- 
 dinary and minister plentipotentiary to the court of St. James from the 
 native King of the Hawaiian Islands," the title Kamehameha was 
 allowed by Lord Paulet to retain, with some half dozen other blank 
 commissions signed by the King and premier, to be filled out by myself 
 for other countries as occasion might require. These were rendered 
 necessary by the unc srtainty of my finding the King's other ambassa- 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 105 
 
 dors, Haalileo and Kichards, with whom, in case I did find them, I 
 was to associate myself. 
 
 " The papers were drawn up by Dr. Judd and a confidential clerk at 
 midnight, in the royal tomb in Honolulu, with a king's coffin for a table. 
 So secret was it necessary to keep the transaction that even this clerk 
 Was not trusted with the name of the ambassador, which was left to be 
 inserted by myself after I had sailed. The papers prepared, a canoe 
 with picked crew of Kanakas was dispatched from a distant point of 
 the island to summon His Majesty and his suite to a midnight council. 
 Crossing the boisterous channel in this frail conveyance, they landed at 
 midnight on the shores of Waikiki, a suburb of Honolulu,' and in its 
 cocoauut grove my credentials received the signature and seal of the 
 king and his Kuhina-nui — a great minister " — Kekauluohi, the "Big- 
 mouthed Queen." Then the King and his attendants returned to their 
 mountains without Lord Paulet having a suspicion that they had ever 
 left them. 
 
 " The American consul at Honolulu took advantage of the oppor- 
 tunity also to make me the bearer of his dispatches to Washington, 
 with details of the cession, which would, of course, have momentous 
 interest to the American Government, and the protest of the Ameri- 
 can residents against the act of Lord Paulet." 
 
 XVI. Also the following extracts from the history of the 
 
 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, BY JAMES JACKSON JARVES, PUBLISHED IN 
 
 1846. 
 
 "The chiefs, fully sensible of their political wants, sent, by Mr. Rich- 
 ards, in 1836, to the United States to procure a suitable person to fill 
 the situation of legal adviser and teacher in the new policy circum- 
 stances were forcing upon them. In this way they were backed by 
 the opinion of the mission, who, desirous of preserving themselves 
 from the responsibility, would gladly have seen it in able and disinter- 
 ested hands. The wants of the chiefs were fully appreciated by the 
 American board, but nothing was effected. Individuals of talent, by 
 the time they have acquired the experience suitable for such a post, 
 which in its real effect would have been equivalent to the supreme 
 direction of public affairs, generally have fixed themselves in permanent 
 relations at home. 
 
 " With all the modern favor in the cause of missions, and the very 
 many excellent discourses yearly uttered from pulpits, we rarely see 
 entire disinterestedness manifested in the middle-aged — those who have 
 known the world and tasted its goods, however prepared they may be 
 by those very qualifications for the posts they so industriously urge 
 upon others. The path of novelty, enterprise, and benevolence is rarely 
 filled by any except the young and enthusiastic. That the chiefs, rely- 
 ing on the philanthropy of any experienced public man to have com- 
 plied with their request, should have failed is what might reasonably 
 have been anticipated. A young man, ambitious of the influence if 
 not of the actual power of a Peter the Great or an Alfred, on a petty 
 scale, might readily have been found, but the chiefs were suspicious of 
 youth. Desiring age and experience, they should have offered a salary 
 equivalent to some of the highest posts in the United States. On such 
 a contingency few objections would have been found unanswerable. 
 The path of duty would have been opened to many blind to all other 
 considerations. This is human nature, as we see it in the pulpit and 
 on the bench. In every position it requires its motive power. 
 
 " It is said that the honorable Theo. L. Frelingshuysen was invited 
 
106 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 , 
 
 to become the adviser of the chiefs, but declined. At all events, 
 Richards was wholly unsuccessful. On his return, the position of the 
 chiefs being none the less embarrassing, compelled them to apply to the 
 mission for aid. Without any definite action of their body, they com- 
 menced that system which by the natural course of events has led to j 
 the direct employment of several of their number — having first been i 
 disconnected from their ranks — in the service of the Government. For- 
 eigners were required in public affairs. The chiefs chose those on whom i 
 they could most rely, and whatever may have been their errors of judg- 
 ment, the result has shown that they were not mistaken in relying upon 
 their zeal and fidelity: and it may be well be doubted whether, at that 
 time, the Kingdom furnished men more suitable, from knowledge and 
 experience with the people and foreigners to administer to its wants. 
 The history of the policy they adopted will be traced to the period of 
 its present development. 
 
 u The mission and their seceders were united in their views to build' 
 up a nation of Hawaiians distinct from all foreign influence. The fol- 
 lowing resolutions, taken from the missionary minutes for 1838, show 
 the just views entertained at this date: 
 
 " '1st Resolved, That though the system of government in the Sand-; 
 wich Islands has, since the commencement of the reign of Liholiho, 
 been greatly improved through the influence of Christianity, and the 
 introduction of written and printed laws and the salutary agency of 
 Christian chiefs has proved a great blessing to the people ; still, the 
 system is so very imperfect for tie management of the affairs of a civil^ 
 ized and virtuous nation as to render it of great importance that cor-;! 
 rect views of the rights and duties of rulers and subjects, and of the 
 principles of jurisprudence and political economy, should be held up 
 before the King and the members of the national council. 
 
 UL 2d Resolved) That it is the duty of the missionaries to teach the 
 doctrine that rulers should be just, ruling in the fear of God, seeking 
 the best good of their nation, demanding no more of subjects, as such, 
 than the various ends of the Government may justly require 5 and if 
 church members among them violate the commands of God they 
 should be admonished with the same faithfulness and tenderness in 
 their dependents. 
 
 " '3rd Resolved, That rulers in power are so by the province of God, 
 and in an important sense by the will or consent of the people, and 
 ought not to resign or shrink from the cares and responsibilities of 
 their offices; therefore, teachers of religion ought carefully to guard 
 the subjects against contempt for the authority of their rulers, or any 
 evasion or resistance of government orders, unless they plainly set at 
 defiance the commands of God. 
 
 " L 4th Resolved) That the resources of the nation are at is own disposal 
 for its defense, improvement, and perfection, and subjects ought to be 
 taught to feel that a portion of their time and services, their property 
 or earnings, may rightfully be required by the sovereign or national 
 council for the support of government in all its branches and depart- 
 ments, and that it is a Christian duty to render honor, obedience, fear J 
 custom, and tribute to whom they are due, as taught in the 13th of 
 Romans, and that the sin of disloyalty, which tends to confusion, anar- 
 chy, and ruin, deserves reproof as really and as promptly as that of 
 injustice on the part of rulers or any other violation of the commands 
 of God.' 
 
 " '5th Resolved, That rulers should be allowed to do what they will 
 with their own, or with what they have a right to demand j we ought 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 107 
 
 to encourage the security of the right of subjects also to do what they 
 will with their own, provided they render to Caesar his due.' 
 
 " i 6th Resolved, That rulers ought to be prompted to direct their 
 efforts to the promotion of general intelligence and virtue as a grand 
 means of removing the existing evils of the system, gradually defining 
 and limiting by equitable laws the rights and duties of all classes, 
 that thus by improving rather than revolutionizing the Government, 
 its administration may become abundantly salutary, and the heredi- 
 tary rulers receive no detriment but corresponding advantage.' 
 
 " 1 7th Resolved, That to remove the improvidence and imbecility of the 
 people, and promote the industry, wealth, and happiness of the nation, 
 it is the duty of the mission to urge mainly the motives of loyalty, 
 patriotism, social kindness, and general benevolence; but, while on 
 the one hand he should not condemn their artificial wants, ancient or 
 modern, because they depend on fancy, or a taste not refined, he 
 should, on the other, endeavor to encourage and multiply such as 
 will enlist their energies, call forth ingenuity, enterprise, and patient 
 industry, and give scope for enlarged plans of profitable exertion, 
 which, if well directed, would clothe the population in beautiful cot- 
 tons, fine linen, and silk, and their arable fields with rich and various 
 productions suited to the climate; would adorn the land with numer- 
 ous comfortable, substantial habitations, made pleasant by elegant 
 furniture, cabinets, and libraries; with permanent and well endowed 
 school houses and seminaries, large, commodious, and durable churches, 
 and their seas and harbors with ships owned by natives sufficient to 
 export to other countries annually the surplus products of their soil, 
 which may, at no very distant period, amount to millions. 
 
 iU 8th Resolved, That we deem it proper for members of this mission 
 to devote a portion of their time to instructing the natives into the 
 best method of cultivating their lands, and of raising flocks and herds, 
 and of turning the various products of the country to the best advan- 
 tage for the maintenance of their families, the support of government 
 and of schools, and the institutions of the gospel and its ministers, 
 at home and abroad. 7 " 
 
 "Mr. Richards entered upon his official duties by delivering to the 
 chiefs a course of lectures on political economy and the general science 
 of government. From the ideas thus derived, based upon their old 
 forms, a constitution was drawn up. Although greatly limiting their 
 power, the chiefs passed it unanimously. 
 
 "The laws of the Kingdom were carefully revised and published. In 
 comparison with the past the progress of the nation was now rapid. 
 The liberal policy of other nations, and whatever of their forms could 
 with propriety be here transplanted, were embodied in the new 
 statutes, but on a scale commensurate with the feebleness of youth of 
 the people. The penal code was greatly improved; primary and courts 
 of appeal established; the jury system adopted. Provision was made 
 for the more regular enforcement of debt — transmission of property, 
 property in trust, interest in accounts, in short sufficient was done 
 greatly to benefit the position of natives and foreigners. Taxation was 
 rendered more equal and lighter. Encouragement was proffered to 
 industry and to the increase of population. An enlightened public- 
 school system was organized. Their laws, imperfect as they may seem 
 to the critical eyes of a superior civilization, were yet in advance of the 
 people. But Avherever they were allowed to operate fairly and system- 
 atically much good was effected, and they served to prepare the way 
 for more important changes. 
 
108 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 V 
 
 " The people were thoroughly convinced that the immunity once claim ed 
 by chiefs for crimes of their own was at an end by an impartial trial by 
 jury of one of that class in 1840 for the murder of his wife. He, with 
 an accomplice, were both brought in guilty, and suffered the full 
 penalty of the law, death by hanging. The foreigners also began to 
 see that there was some virtue in the courts by a fine imposed upon 
 the English consul for riotous conduct" 
 
 "On his way to England Mr. Charlton had fallen in with Lord George 
 Paulet, commanding H. B. M. frigate Carysfort, and by his representa- 
 tions interested his lordship in his views. Simpson had also sent 
 dispatches to the coast of Mexico, which induced Bear-Admiral Thomas 
 to order the Carysfort to Honolulu for the purpose of inquiring into 
 the matter. She arrived on the 10th of February, 1843, before the sale of 
 Charlton's property had taken place. Simpson immediately went on 
 board to concert measures with Lord George, who, from his entire acqui- 
 escence in his plans, appears to have been wholly won over at this inter- 
 view to sustain them. The authorities on shore suspected there was 
 no friendly feeling from the withholding the nsual salutes. Mr. Judd, 
 on behalf of the Government, made an official call on board, but was 
 informed he could not be received. Visits from the French and United 
 States consuls were similarly declined. Capt. Paulet addressed the 
 governor, informing him that he wished to confer with the King, who 
 was then absent. 
 
 " The King arrived from Maui on the 16th, and on the next day 
 received the following letter and demands from Lord George Paulet : 
 
 "'H. B. M.'s Ship Carysfort, 
 
 " i Oahu, 17th February, 1843. 
 " ' Sir : In answer to your letter of this day's date, which I have too 
 good an opinion of Your Majesty to allow me to believe ever emanated 
 from yourself, but from your ill- advisers, I have to state that I shall 
 hold no communication whatever with Dr. G. P. Judd, who, it has 
 been satisfactorily proved to me, has been the Punic mover in the 
 unlawful proceedings of your Government against British subjects. 
 
 "'As you have refused me a personal interview I inclose you the 
 demands which I Consider it my duty to make upon your Government, 
 with which I demand a compliance at or before 4 o'clock p. m. to-mor- 
 row, Saturday; otherwise I shall be obliged to take immediate coercive 
 steps to obtain these measures for my countrymen. 
 
 " ' I have the honor to be, your Majesty's most obedient, humble serv- 
 ant, 
 
 " < George Paulet, 
 
 " 'Captain. 
 "'His Majesty Kamehameha III. 
 
 " 'Demands made by the Bight Honorable Lord George Paulet, captain, 
 royal navy, commanding R. B. M 7 s. ship Carysfort, upon the King oj 
 the Sandwich Islands. 
 
 "'First. The immediate removal, by public advertisement, written in 
 the native and English languages, and signed by the governor of this 
 island and F. W. Thompson, of the attachment placed upon Mr. Charl- 
 ton's property; the restoration of the land taken by Government for 
 its own use, and really appertaining to Mr. Charlton; and reparation 
 or the hea TT y loss to which Mr. Charlton's representatives have been 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 109 
 
 exposed by the oppressive and unjust proceedings of the Sandwich 
 Islands Government. 
 
 u ' Second. The immediate acknowledgment of the right of Mr. Simp- 
 son to perform the functions delegated to him by Mr. Charlton, namely, 
 those of Her Britannic Majesty's acting consul, until Her Majesty's 
 pleasure be known upon the reasonableness of your objections to him. 
 The acknowledgment of that right and the reparation for the insult 
 offered to Her Majesty, through her acting representative, to be made 
 by a public reception of his commission and the saluting the British 
 Hag with twenty-one guns, which number will be returned by Her 
 Britannic Majesty's ship under my command. 
 
 "'Third. A guaranty that no British subject shall in future be sub- 
 jected to imprisonment in fetters, unless he is accused of a crime which, 
 by the laws of England, would be considered felony. 
 
 " ' Fourth. The compliance with a written promise given by King 
 Kamehameha to Capt. Jones, of Her Britannic Majesty's ship Gurocoa, 
 that a new and fair trial would be granted in a case brought by Henry 
 Skinner, which promise has been evaded. 
 
 " i Fifth. The immediate adoption of firm steps to arrange the matters 
 in dispute between British subjects and natives of the country, or 
 others residing here, by referring these cases to juries, one-half of whom 
 shall be British subjects, approved by the consul, and all of whom 
 shall declare on oath their freedom from prejudgment upon or interest 
 in tin 1 , cases brought before them. 
 
 u ' Sixth. A direct communication between His Majesty, Kamehameha, 
 and Her Britannic Majesty's acting consul for the immediate settlement 
 of all cases of grievances and complaint on the part of British subjects 
 against the Sandwich Island Government. 
 
 "'Dated on board Her Britannic Majesty's ship Carysfort, at Oahu, 
 this 17th day of February, 1843. 
 
 "'George Paulet, 
 
 " ' Captain.'' 
 
 "Capt. Long, of the U. S. S. Boston, then in port, was informed, by 
 letter, at midnight, of the anticipated attack of the British commander. 
 In the morning the Carysfort was cleared for action, springs put on her 
 cables, and her battery brought to bear upon the town. The English 
 families embarked for security on board a brig in the outer roads. 
 The Americans and other foreigners, having but short notice, placed 
 their funds and papers on board the Boston and other vessels, intending 
 to retreat to them with their families in case of actual hostilities. The 
 town was in a state of great excitement. The dispositions of the chiefs 
 were uncertain, and it was feared that the rabble, taking advantage of 
 the confusion, might pillage the place. Excited by the gross injustice 
 of the demands, the first impulse of the King and his council, in which 
 they were sustained by the indignant feeling of the entire foreign popu- 
 lation excepting the few who sided with Simpson, were for energetic 
 measures. Arms were procured and bodies of men began to assemble. 
 
 "The common natives, unconscious of the fatal effects of disciplined 
 gunnery, ardently desired to fight the ship. Some supposed they 
 might overpower her crew by numbers in boarding. But peaceful coun- 
 cils at last prevailed. It is in such emergencies that the real influence 
 of the missionaries becomes apparent. The natural desire of chiefs 
 and foreigners was to resist at all hazards; but the entire indoctrina- 
 tion of the mission, animated by the peaceful principles of the gospel, 
 had been of that nature that depends more upon the sword of the 
 
110 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 spirit than the arm of flesh. Desirous of avoiding the unhappy 
 consequences of strife and bloodshed, and relying, through providence, 
 on the justice of the nation's cause, and the magnanimity of the Queen 
 of Great Britain, they counseled peace. Shortly before the hour of 
 commencing hostilities had arrived, the King dispatched a letter to 
 the Carysport, informing Lord George Paulet that he yielded to his 
 demands, under protest, and had appointed Sir George Simpson and 
 William Eichards as his commissioners to the court of Great Britain 
 to settle the pending difficulties. 
 
 "His Majesty appointed February 20 at 11 o'clock a. m., to receive 
 Lord George and the vice-consul. On the same day that the King 
 notified Lord of his acquiescence to his demands, in conjunction with 
 the premier he protested against his acts in these words : 
 
 "'We, Kamehameha III, King of all the Sandwich Islands, and 
 Kekauluohi, premier thereof, in accordance with the laws of nations 
 and the rights of all aggrieved sovereigns and individuals, do hereby 
 enter our solemn act of protest before God, the world, and before the 
 Government of Her Most Gracious Majesty Yictoria, Queen of the 
 United Kingdoms of Great Britain and Ireland : 
 
 u 'Against the Bight Hon. Lord George Paulet, captain of Her British 
 Majesty's ship Carysfort, now lying in the harbor of Honolulu, for all 
 losses and damages which may accrue to us and to the citizens of other 
 countries residing under our dominion and sovereignty, in consequence 
 of the unjust demands made upon us this day by the said Bight Hon. 
 Lord George Paulet, enforced by a threat of coercive measures and an 
 attack upon our town of Honolulu in case of noncompliance with the 
 same within a period of nineteen hours, thereby interfering with our 
 laws, endangering the good order of society, and requiring of us what 
 no power has a right to exact of another with whom they are on terms 
 of peace and amity. 
 
 "'And we do solemnly protest and declare that we, the sovereign 
 authority of these islands, are injured, grieved, abused, and damaged 
 by this act of the said Bight Hon. Lord George Paulet, and w r e hereby 
 enter our solemn appeal unto the Government of Her Most Gracious 
 Majesty, represented by him, for redress, for justification, and for repay- 
 ment of all said losses, damages, and payments which may in conse- 
 quence accrue unto us, or unto the citizens of other countries living 
 under our jurisdiction.' 
 
 " 'On the 20th the King and premier visited the Garysfoot and were 
 received with royal honors. This courtesy, however, was but a prelude 
 to a further series of demands rendered necessary to accomplish Simp- 
 son's aim, by the unexpected compliance of the King with the first. 
 These were brought forward at an interview on the following day. The 
 total amount demanded in money was $117,330.89. The character of 
 these claims, and the object of the parties, may be gathered from a 
 brief notice of the first brought forward. This was in favor of a Mr. 
 Skinner, a connection of Mr. Charlton's. Indemnification to the 
 amount of $3,000 was demanded for him on the alleged ground of hav- 
 ing lost the interest and profits on $10,000 unemployed for four months, 
 which he had reserved to purchase the property of Mr. Charlton, if 
 sold on execution. The arrival of the Carysfoot had stopped the sale, 
 and he had lost the opportunity of thus employing his funds.' (pp. 
 161, 162, and 163.) 
 
 '"24th. — A meeting having been arranged for 10 o'clock a. m., the 
 King requested me to visit Lord George and say to him that he could 
 bear this course no longer ; he would give up and let them do as they 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. Ill 
 
 pieced, etc. I accordingly met Lord George and Simpson in the 
 street, coming to the meeting ; said I had a message from the King, 
 that he was sick. I went with them to the consular office, where I was 
 left alone with Simpson. I said, the King feels himself oppressed, 
 broken down, ruined, and, to use his own expression, a dead man; that 
 he had been up all night and was sick; that he had determined to give 
 up; that if he, Simpson, persisted in his present course ruin would 
 follow; that the King could not undo by his own act the action of the 
 courts and enforce these claims without time to modify the laws. I 
 begged him to desist and give time to modify the laws and act with 
 consistency. He would allow juries to be composed of half English in 
 case their interests were concerned. 
 
 " t The Dominis case had been disposed of according to the King's 
 written promise to Capt. Jones. Moreover, since that time, the 
 parties had settled by amicable arbitration. That to require all the 
 late decisions of the legally organized courts to be set aside by the act 
 of the King would be illegal and oppressive on the part of Mr. Simp- 
 son, and decidedly oppressive on the part of the King, and would 
 justly involve him both with Americans and French, etc. Simp- 
 son replied that the English had been treated harshly, and conse- 
 quently the Government must suffer. His course could not be altered. 
 
 "'Went with Lord George and Simpson to the council; acted as 
 spokesman. Eeiterated the above, and added the King was determined 
 to hold out no longer; do what you like, take the islands, but do not 
 force him to acts of injustice ; it would be cruel in the extreme, better 
 take all. Lord George replied that his demands were not unjust; he 
 acted on the best information and testimony. I said, I know that you 
 think so but I assure you that such is not the opinion of the Govern- 
 ment. The King remarked that he did not think that his Government 
 had done wrong. I said, we must be heard; your information is incor- 
 rect ; we appeal to Great Britain ; take the islands, we will yet have 
 justice. Lord George replied that he did not come to take the islands. 
 I said, you had better do it than pursue these subjects further in this 
 manner. He or Simpson said that they could only act on a request of 
 the King, and it must be in writing. Said I, let all proceedings be 
 stopped; let the Government have time to reflect, and I think they will 
 come to the conclusion that it is better for you to take the Government 
 of the islands than to go any further. But we must have time; you 
 drive the King to distraction, and I fear that he will cede the islands 
 to France, as lie has been invited to do. Simpson said he would not 
 allow much delay. Lord George said, two or three days and no more. 
 Simpson said, to-morrow noon, and if it was not done, he should expect 
 the Dominis case to be tried on Saturday. I observed that the time 
 was too short; Monday then at the furthest. We went into certain 
 explanations as to manner of doing the thing, and I wrote down in 
 pencil the following : 
 
 "'In consequence of the difficulties in which the Sandwich Islands 
 are involved, and the impossibility of complying with the demands made 
 by Her Britannic Majesty's representative in the form in which they 
 are presented, we cede [the Government of] our islands to Lord George 
 Paulet, etc., for the time being, subject to any arrangements that 
 may have been entered into with the Government of Great Britain, and 
 until intelligence shall have been received, and in case no arrangement 
 shall have been made previous to date, subject to the decision of Her 
 Majesty's Government on conference with the ministers of the Sand- 
 wich Islands Government, after a full report of our affairs shall have 
 
112 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 been represented to Great Britain; and in case the ministers are 
 rejected by Her Britannic Majesty, then subject to an^ arrangements 
 which may be entered into. 
 
 " l Simpson took the paper and walked in the veranda with Lord 
 George, and, returning, said that would do; he would make a copy with 
 very few verbal alterations. 
 
 " < It was arranged that the chiefs should have an opportunity to 
 consider these things, and an answer to be given to-morrow noon. Lord 
 George and Shnpson left. King and Auhea sat with astonishment and 
 misery. Discussed awhile in council, when I left them in order to take 
 some refreshment. When I returned I found them anxious to gain 
 further information. The subject of ceding to France and the United 
 States was a ray of hope which seemed to gleam across their dark path, 
 but they foresaw that under such circumstances they would still have 
 this fury — Simpson — to deal with until the French took possession, 
 and he would doubtless involve them in more trouble, and their cause 
 become too bad to admit of justification. France is still acting a hos- 
 tile part towards them. Charlton and Simpson are their enemies, but 
 England is their friend. 
 
 "'To England they look up with the most filial affections. France 
 is picking a quarrel with them now, and complaints are now in existence 
 which will make more trouble. If the claims of Simpson are allowed 
 the laws will suffer and the nation be weakened so much that France 
 will leave them nothing. England can defend them from France, and 
 to cede to France would be to say England had no right here, which is 
 to the Government more than doubtful, reckoning right as the nations 
 do. This might be considered an act of treachery. 
 
 4 "May be that their independence is secured already. If so, a forcible 
 possession on the part of either would annul it. A cession would not 
 if made with provisos. 
 
 "In the evening I went for Lord George, who, together with Simpson 
 and Dr. Kooke, came. Begulated a few points respecting the course he 
 should pursue in case he took possession. Informed them that we should 
 take every possible step to justify the Government and get back the 
 islands, and he demanded a pledge that such exertions be not considered 
 an act of hostility to them. 
 
 "'It was agreed that a decision should be made by 12 o'clock on the 
 25th. Lord George went away. Every possible view of the case was 
 taken up by the council, and the result seemed to be to give up the islands 
 on the terms proposed. 
 
 "'25th. The King sent for me before breakfast. Wished to know 
 what I thought of the old proposition of ceding to France and the 
 United States. I said I feared it would involve the Government in 
 great trouble. The French admiral would soon be here and take pos- 
 session, which would excite hostility between Catholics and Protes- 
 tants; meanwhile Simpson would continue his course of conduct, and 
 the difficulties would become inextricable. Give yourself into the arms 
 of Great Britain, *ust to the generosity of that great and good nation, 
 you may have the benefit of the intervention of France for the adjust- 
 ment of difficulties and the security of your independence. Let them 
 take possession, and then you can represent your case in full. Lord 
 George called. I informed him that the matter was nearly decided. 
 One of the propositions that came from me was waived, viz, that a 
 commission be appointed to adjust the claims of British subjects. 
 
 " 'Dudoit called and many others. Every argument used to induce 
 the King to cede to France and the United States. Sat down to put 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 113 
 
 the documents into form. The King proposed to make a speech. I 
 •said they could make that out among themselves, which they did. 
 Deed of cession being ready, the chiefs came in and it was read. Sorrow 
 and distress marked every countenance. I was asked to pray. During 
 prayer sighs suppressed were often heard. I committed the case to 
 God, imploring His blessing on the step about to be taken as the only 
 peaceful alternative for the nation, etc. When I rose not an individual 
 left his knees for a full minute, and then 1 saw that tears had come to their 
 relief. They sat in silence for a moment when the King arose, and with 
 a iirm step seized a pen and subscribed his name. " Let it go," said he, 
 " if I get help I get it, if not, let it go; I can do no more." The premier 
 then added her signature.' (Extract from a journal kept by Mr. Judcl, 
 who was minister of the King to conduct negotiations with Lord George 
 Paulet, pp. 164, 165, and 166.) 
 
 u Having decided upon a provisional cession of his dominions to Great 
 Britain, the King announced the event to his subjects in a touching 
 proclamation: 
 
 " ' Where are you, chiefs, people, and commons from my ancestors, and 
 people from foreign lands "? 
 
 u * Hear ye ! I make known to yon that I am in perplexity by reason 
 of difficulties into which I have been brought without cause; there- 
 fore, I have given away the life of our land, hear ye! But my rule 
 over you, my people, and your privileges, will continue, for I have hope 
 that the life of the land will be restored when my conduct is justified. 
 
 "'Done at Honolulu, Oahu, this 25th day of February, 1843. 
 
 "Kamehameha III. 
 "Kekauluoki.' 
 
 u On the 28th of November, the Hawaiian commissioners obtained 
 from the governments of France and England a joint declaration to 
 the effect that — 
 
 " < Her Majesty the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain 
 and Ireland, and His Majesty the King of the French, taking into con- 
 sideration the existence in the Sandwich Islands of a government capa- 
 ble of providing for the regularity of its relations with foreign nations, 
 have thought it right to engage reciprocally to consider the Sandwich 
 Islands as an independent state, and never to. take possession, neither 
 directly nor under the title of protectorate, nor under any other form, 
 of any part of the territory of which they are composed. 
 
 " 'The undersigned, Her Majesty's principal secretary of state for for- 
 eign affairs, and the ambassador extraordinary of His Majesty the 
 King of the French at the court of London, being furnished with the 
 necessary powers, hereby declare in consequence that their said majes- 
 ties take reciprocally that engagement. 
 
 "' In witness whereof the undersigned have signed the present decla- 
 ration, and have affixed thereto the seal of their arms. 
 
 "'Done in duplicate, at London, the 28th day of November, in the 
 year of our Lord 1843. 
 
 " 'Aberdeen. [l. s. 
 "'St. Aulaire. [l. s.' 
 
 " This solemn engagement on the part of these two powers was the final 
 act by which the Kingdom of Hawaii was admitted within the pale of 
 civilized nations." 
 
 •"No measure tends more to consolidate and render a nation prosper- 
 
 S. Eep. 227 8 
 
114 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 ous and respectable than a sound and judicious code of laws. Th< 
 chiefs were early aware of their deficiency, and as soon as their ne^ 
 legislative forms came into operation proposed to execute the task: 
 under any circumstances a difficult one; but in those of their Kingdoi 
 doubly so from the mixed population, foreign and native, that the: 
 were called to govern. The first volume of statute laws was issued ii 
 1846. 
 
 "The departments are subdivided into numerous bureaus, compris- 
 ing the duties enumerated under their several heads. By this system 
 the business of government and its machinery have become methodized 
 on a simple and not expensive scale, for although the subdivisions are 
 numerous, yet one clerk suffices for many. The judiciary act and the 
 criminal code, on the new basis, are not yet completed. As in every 
 other step forward which the Hawaiian nation has taken, unwar- 
 rantable abuse and unreasonable cavil have been showered upon it for 
 this, chiefly upon the specious pretense that the system was too cum- 
 bersome and altogether beyond its growth. An impartial examination 
 will doubtless detect points which can be amended with benefit; this 
 is to be expected, and the intention of the Legislature is rather experi- 
 mentative than final, to feel their way as it were to a code simple and 
 effective. But to do this experience mast be acquired in legislation 
 and the practical operation of laws. In the transition of the nation, 
 with its rapid growth from foreign sources, it has been found that there 
 has been felt a want rather than an overplus of system. The machinery 
 of government, being of a liberal and constitutional character, provides 
 in itself for checks on excess and remedies for evils. If 'let alone 7 by 
 foreign powers, there is ground for the belief that Hawaiian legislation 
 will in no whit in character be behind that of numerous new countries, 
 offshoots of the old, now budding into existence on the shores of the 
 Pacific. 
 
 "The executive government was constructed as follows: 
 . "'His Majesty King Kamehameha III. 
 
 "< Cabinet council created October 29, 1845. — His highness, Keoni 
 Ana,* premier and minister of the interior; R. C. Wyllie, minister for- 
 eign affairs; G. P. Judd, minister of finance; William Richards, min- 
 ister of instruction ; John Ricord, attorney- general. 
 
 " 'Nobles. — M. Kehauonohi; A.Keliiahonui, chamberlain; Keoni Ana, 
 premier; Alapai; A. Paki, judge of supreme court; Konia; I. Kaeo, 
 judge of supreme court; Iona, judge of supreme court; Paulo Kanoa; 
 Kamauu; M. Kekuanaoa, governor of Oahu; W. P. Leleiohoku, gov- 
 ernor of Hawaii; Ruta; Keohokalole; O. Kanaina, judge of supreme 
 court; Ioane Ii, guardian of young chiefs; Iona Piikoi; Beniki Nama- 
 keha; K. Kapaakea; James Young Kanehoa, t governor of Maui.' 
 
 "The governers are honorary members of the privy council. 
 
 "Besides the 4 cabinet officers of foreign birth, there are 5 Americans 
 and 4 Englishmen, naturalized subjects, commissioned as judges in 
 foreign cases, collectors, director of Government press, heads of bureaus, 
 etc. In addition to these are a number of clerks transiently employed, 
 and officers connected with the several departments, who depend upon 
 fees for their recompense. 
 
 "In no one respect have the Government shown more laudable zeal 
 than in educating the young chiefs, who, by birth, are destined to fill 
 important posts. For the purpose of bestowing upon them a solid and 
 
 * Son of Mr. Young, Kamehameha's favorite. 
 
 tSon of Kamehaineha's favorite, Mr. Yonng, of the Elenora, who landed in 1790 
 and died in 1835 at the advanced age of 93 years, highly respected by all classes. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 115 
 
 practical education in the English language, embracing not only the 
 usual studies pursued in the better class of seminaries in the United 
 States, but to engraft in their minds the habits, thoughts, moral and 
 domestic education which children of their age and circumstances 
 receive in civilized countries, in 1839 they were taken from their native 
 parents and out of the sphere of mere Hawaiian influences and incor- 
 porated into a boarding school, under the charge of Mr. and Mrs. 
 Cooke, teachers of the American mission. During the seven years the 
 school has bee'u established their progress has been rapid, and they 
 are now versed in the common branches of an English education, besides 
 being practically acquainted with the tastes, household economy, and 
 habits of refined domestic life. The annual expense of the school is 
 now about $5,000. The number of scholars 15. • 
 
 " 'Moses Kaikioewa, son of Kekuanaoa and Kinau, born July 20, 
 1829, expectant governor of Kauai. 
 
 "'Lota Kamehameha, son of Kekuanaoa and Kinau, born December 
 11, 1830; expectant governor of Maui. 
 
 "'Alexander Liholiho, son of Kehuanaoa and Kinau, born February 
 9, 1834, heir apparant, by adoption, of the King. 
 
 "' Victoria Kamamalu, daughter of Kehuanaoa and Kinau, born 
 November 1, 1838, premier by birth. 
 
 " 'William O. Lunalilo, son of Kanaina and Kehauluohi, born Janu- 
 ary 1, 1835. 
 
 " « Bernice Pauahi, daughter of Paid and Konia, born December 19, 
 1831. 
 
 "'Jane Loeau, daughter of Kalaniulumokee andLiliha, born 1828. 
 
 '"Elizabeth Kekaniau, daughter of Laanui, born September 11, 1834. 
 
 "'Emma Eooke, daughter of Fanny Young,* born January 2, 1836. 
 
 " 'Peter Young Kaeo, son of Kaeo and Lahilahi,* born March 4, 1836. 
 
 "'James Kaliokalani, son of Paakea and Keohokalole, born May 29, 
 1835. 
 
 "'David Kalakaua, son of Paakea and Keohokalole, born November 
 16, 1836. 
 
 "'Lydia Makaeha, daughter of Paakea and Keohokalole, born Sep- 
 tember 2, 1838. 
 
 "'Mary Paaaina. 
 
 "'Kinau Pitt, son of W. Pitt Kalaimokee.' 
 
 " The rapid progress of the Hawaiian group in commercial impor- 
 tance is best illustrated by their commercial statistics both before the 
 organization of their present Government and since, when under 
 improved auspices their value has more rapidly developed. The 
 facilities which they afforded the American vessels engaged in the 
 lucrative Northwest fur trade, to which was soon added the equally 
 profitable one of sandal wood, gave them such good repute that pre- 
 vious to 1820 the hardy whale fishers resorted to them for recruits and 
 men. As early as 1823, from 40 to 60 whale ships, mostly American, 
 were to be seen in the harbor of Honolulu at one time. 
 
 " From January, 1836, to December 31, 1841, 358 vessels belonging 
 to the United States, of which four fifths were whalers, touched at 
 Honolulu; an average of 71f annually, besides 17 men-of-war. Of 
 English vessels during the same period there were 82 and 9 men-of- 
 war. Those of France and other nations numbered not over 20. The 
 average annual imports for those years were to the value of $365,854, 
 one-half of which were American goods, one-quarter Chinese and Oali- 
 
 * Daughters of John Young. 
 
116 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 fornian, and the remainder from England, Mexico, Chile, and other 
 sources. 
 
 "Four newspapers in the Hawaiian tongue have been sustained by 
 the missionaries. The first, Lama Hawaii, was commenced in 1833. 
 The present Ka Elele, besides much religious matter, gives a summary 
 of general news, publishes Government notices, and affords scope for 
 the literary efforts of the natives themselves, some of whom manifest 
 respectable powers of thought and composition. 
 
 "It is computed that 70,000 of the population have learned to read 
 and 65,444,000 printed pages have been issued from the mission press, 
 embracing, among other works, two complete editions, of 10,000 each, 
 of the Holy Scriptures, three of the New Testament, amounting to 
 30,000 copies, Worcesters Sacred Geography, Universal Geography, 
 Geographical Questions, Scripture Chronology and History, Animals 
 of the Earth, with a chart. History of Beasts, Hawaiian History, 
 Church History, Mathematics, embracing Geometry, Trigonometry, 
 Mensuration, Surveying and Navigation, Colburn's Algebra, Anatomy, 
 Wayland's Moral Philosophy, Colburn's Intellectual Arithmetic, Tract 
 on.Astronomy, Maps of Universal Geography, and Bunyan's Pilgrim's 
 Progress. 
 
 "The works published have been altogether of a devotional or edu- 
 cational class. More interest would have been awakened could some 
 others of a less grave and more historic character have been included." 
 
 "A moral sentiment, founded more upon a classification of certain 
 actions, either as evil or as good, and their attendant punishments or 
 rewards than upon any definite ideas of sin and virtue considered in 
 their relations to moral purity and the love of the Father, pervades the 
 nation. With the more enlightened something superior to this pre- 
 vails. Consequently, as in older Christianized communities, a man 
 enjoys respect in proportion to his moral qualifications. Vice is con- 
 demned and virtue applauded. Many, of course, are to be found more 
 fond of a good name than of the means necessary for its attainment.. 
 Publicly they are one being, privately another. 
 
 " Thevery fact of the necessity of the deception shows a great advance- 
 ment in moral sentiment since the days of Liholiho, and instead of being 
 considered a reproach to the missionaries should be hailed as a favorable 
 symptom of their labors, the dawn of further improvement. In human- 
 ity, care for the sick and aged, their domestic relations, honesty, tem- 
 perance, and systematic industry there has been great advancement. 
 From a warlike, treacherous, and cruel people they have become mild, 
 tractable, and desirous of knowledge. The intelligent observer will 
 find much in their present character to gratify him and more to sur- 
 prise when he contrasts them with what they were but a score of years 
 since. But he who goes among them, his imagination picturing a 
 nation changed from brutal savages, by the spirit of God, to guileless 
 Christians, worshiping Jehovah in all the innocence and strength of a 
 first love, their family altars emblems of purity and happiness, their 
 congregations simple and sincere, and their dispositions and deport- 
 ment refined to the high standard of Christian excellence in his own 
 country, will be sadly disappointed. 
 
 "It is still difficult to make the natives understand the nature of 
 truth. They have been so accustomed, from their earliest years, to 
 habits of deception, that with very many, perhaps the majority, it may 
 be doubted whether any other sensation arises from the detection of a 
 falsehood than mortification at being discovered. In no other point 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 117 
 
 are tliey more obtuse, but this moral bhmtness is gradually wearing 
 away. Licentiousness is a chief vice of the nation; not that they are 
 much worse in this respect than nations generally residing within the 
 tropics, but it continues to be their most prominent trait. A few years 
 ago, in its protean forms, it was common to all, and as undisguised as 
 the light of day. Now it hides its head, and seeks a new garment to 
 conceal its foul markings. The following table of crime for Oahu will 
 serve to show the proportion of other often ses to those of sensuality. 
 It is taken from the Kama Hawaii, of January 16, 1839, a native paper, 
 but the period embraced in the report is not given. And it should be 
 recollected that but a small proportion of the latter offenses are ever 
 detected or exposed. A number of foreigners are embraced in the list, 
 chiefly for riot, mutiny, and desertion. 
 
 Offenses. 
 
 Manslaughter 1 4. 
 
 Theft 4fc 
 
 Riot " 32 
 
 False witness 48 
 
 Desertion 30 
 
 Mutiny 15 
 
 Seduction 18 
 
 Lewdness 81 
 
 Adultery 246 
 
 Total ' 522 
 
 "Another table of purely native cases for Honolulu, taken from the 
 records of the t inferior court 7 from January 1, 1840, to December 4, 
 of the same year, gives the following striking result: 
 
 Offense. 
 
 Men. 
 
 Women. 
 
 Total. 
 
 Adultery, fornication 
 
 126 
 
 43 
 
 35 
 
 20 
 
 12 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 127 
 3 
 3 
 
 8 
 2 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 252 
 
 Theft 
 
 46/ 
 
 Gambling 
 
 38 
 
 Desecration of Sabbath . 
 
 38 
 
 Reviling language 
 
 14 
 
 Heathenish practices 
 
 4 
 
 Assault and battery 
 
 8 
 
 Drunkenness 
 
 6 
 
 Furious riding 
 
 
 6 
 
 Rape 
 
 
 2 
 
 Interference with police 
 
 
 3 
 
 Street walking 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 Slander 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Passing false coin 
 
 
 1 
 
 Desertion of husband 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 Total 
 
 275 
 
 152 
 
 427 
 
 
 
 "The above table shows a -conviction of 427 cases out of a population 
 of about 9,000. To these should be added 121 others, tried before the 
 police court, making in all rather more than 600 cases for 1846. Of the 
 121, 38 were for licentiousness and 43 for stealing. But few occur for 
 fighting, the Hawaiians being a very peaceable people. A great deal 
 of petty thieving exists, particularly towards foreigners, to steal from 
 whom is not viewed so disreputable as from themselves. The standard 
 of morality, it will be seen, is low, particularly among the men; but 
 
118 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 crimes are rare. There have been but five executions for three murders 
 for ten years. 
 
 " It is incontrovertible that there yet exists in the nation a large 
 body of people who are equally disposed to religious rites, or to acts of 
 a different character, as may be most accordant to the taste of those 
 whom they wish to gratify. Another generation must arise, with bet- 
 ter homes and more civil and religious advantages, before the habits 
 of the old are sufficiently eradicated. While evidence for the more 
 favorable view of missionary labor, to a partial investigator, appears 
 conclusive, ample grounds for the opposite opinion exists. The truth 
 lies in neither extreme. The friends of humanity have just cause to 
 be grateful that so much has been accomplished, and should labor 
 earnestly that the remaining dark spots may be wholly effaced." 
 
 "The government of the Kingdom is essentially Christian. Founded 
 upon missionary teaching, it derives its principles and objects from 
 gospel ethics. Under its influence, the despotism of the chiefs over 
 life and property has been abolished and the nation invited to lay 
 hold of its rights in both. Laws favorable to virtue, industry, and 
 increase of population have been enacted. Families having 3 children 
 of their own are freed from taxation ; those having more are rewarded 
 by gifts of lands. The natives are encouraged to secure allodial titles 
 by a remission of all taxes on such for twenty years. Taxation is light- 
 ened and made stimulative to honest industry. The present laws are 
 equitable and protective. Justice is fairly administered and the sound- 
 est principles of classical and modern law have become the professed 
 guides of the courts. 
 
 u Commerce has brought among the nation many foreigners, in every 
 way an advantage to the morals and enterprise of the natives. Scat- 
 tered throughout the group they provide them, almost at the very doors 
 of their huts, with ample supplies of foreign goods of all descriptions 
 at fair prices, receiving in return the avails of native labor. Tliey have 
 furnished them with cattle and the vegetable products of other coun- 
 tries* and introduced the arts, trades, and professions of civilized life. 
 The examples and encouragements of civilized households are thus 
 brought to their very thresholds. They have given a value to the time 
 of the native by creating a demand for his labor, and have equally 
 bestowed a value to his hitherto unproductive lands by practically 
 developing the hidden wealth of the soil. 
 
 "The most indifferent industry is sure of ample reward. Vice, as in 
 other lands, has no apology for an existence here on the plea of a super- 
 abundance of labor in the honest branches of livelihood. Not a man need 
 be a thief from necessity, nor a woman unchaste from want. Lands 
 everywhere lie groaning in wild luxuriance, crying out for hands to till 
 them. The handicraft of women, and even the services of children are 
 in constant demand. Commerce has raised the remuneration of the 
 former and the wages of the laborers to the highest rate of stimulative 
 reward. 
 
 "The policy of the Government is essentially protective to the 
 Hawaiian race, to the intent to fully solve the question of their 
 capability of civilization. The white advisers *of the King, having 
 this end practically in view, fail to meet the more enlarged views and 
 desires of white residents, who look upon the final extermination 
 or loss of the native race and dynasty as their destiny, and conse- 
 quently desire to see the fullest encouragement offered for the ingress 
 and permanent settlement of a foreign population and capital. While 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 119 
 
 these would urge the Government on with a rapidity commensurate 
 with Anglo-Saxon spirit and intelligence, the native race by their 
 slowness of apprehension and fears for their security in case the full 
 torrent of civilized emigration and enterprise is let in unrestrained 
 upon them, hold them back. On the one hand the Government is as 
 unable fully to satisfy the cravings of the whites to advance, as it 
 is to bring the native mind to a clear appreciation and faithful carry- 
 ing out of the measures best adapted to benefit it and render it more 
 capable of assimilating with the superior intelligence of Anglo-Saxon 
 intellect. They steadily endeavor to preserve the Hawaiian race; to 
 christianize and civilize themj and to this end they invite a limited 
 cooperation of foreign aid, enough to innoculate the nation with 
 courage and enterprise, without deluging it in a torrent which in their 
 present condition they would inevitably fail to bear up against. In 
 this way a just middle course is adopted, which it would seem from 
 past experience tends to build up a mixed Hawaiian and foreign race, 
 civilized, moral, and industrious, and capable of taking an elevated 
 position in the ranks of minor nations." 
 
 XVII. Also the following extracts from the Honolulu 
 
 DIRECTORY AND HISTORICAL SKETCH OF THE HAWAIIAN OR SAND- 
 WICH ISLANDS, BY C. C. BENNETT, INCLUDING A CHRONOLOGICAL 
 TABLE OF NOTABLE EVENTS CONNECTED WITH HAWAIIAN HISTORY. 
 
 "1736. Kamehanieha I born at Kokoiki, Kohala. 
 
 "1740. The King of Oahu, on the passage to Molokai, sees a ship. 
 
 u 1768. Kaahumanu born. 
 
 "1775. Kaahumanu becomes the wife of Kamehameha I. 
 
 "1779. January 17 Oapt. Cook anchored in the bay of Kealakekua, 
 Hawaii. 
 
 "February 14 Capt. Cook was slain at Kaawaloa, Hawaii. 
 
 "1782. April, Kalaniopuu died, leaving his Kingdom (western 
 Hawaii), to Kiwalao, who was his own son. 
 
 " July, the battle named Mokuahae, i. e., the fight of Kamehameha 
 with Kiwalao and his party at Keomo, Hawaii, Kamehameha triumphed, 
 Kiwalao was slain, and Keoua became King of Kau and Puna. 
 
 " Keawemauhili reigns as King at Hilo, Hawaii. 
 
 "Keaulumoku composed the mele Haui Ka Lani, or a prophecy of 
 the overthrow of Hawaii by Kamehameha. 
 
 " 1790 first American ship (Eleanor , Capt. Metcalf), visited the islands. 
 
 " Keona was taken prisoner by Kamehameha at Koapapaa, Hama- 
 kua, Hawaii, and Kamehameha thus became sole King of the whole 
 island. 
 
 " John Young and Isaac Davis became attached to Kamehameha. 
 
 "1791. In this year the battle of Nuuanu was fought, im which 
 Kalanikupule,. son of Kahekili, King of Maui and Oahu, was slain, 
 and thus Maui, Molokai, Lanai, and Oahu fell into the hands of Kame- 
 hameha. 
 
 " 1792. March 3, Capt. Vancouver first visited the islands, and left 
 cattle, sheep, etc. 
 
 "The Boedalus, store ship, visited Waimea, Oahu; a massacre. 
 
 "1793. March 12, Vancouver anchored at Lahaina. 
 
 " 1794. December, first discovery of Honolulu Harbor. Entered by 
 Jaclml and Prince Leboo, American. 
 
 " Kekuanaoa born. 
 
 "1795. January 12, last visit of Vancouver. 
 
 " Daedalus visits Mihau -, massacre. January 1, murder of captains. 
 
 "17&7. Liholiho (Kamehameha II) was born. 
 
120 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 "1601. The fleet of canoes called Peleleu arrived at Kawaihae. 
 
 "1802. The Peleleu arrived at Lahaina. 
 
 "1803. The Peleleu arrived at Oahu. 
 
 " 1804. The great pestilence called a aliulau olcuu. 
 
 "1812. The stone wall of Kiholo was built. 
 
 "1814. March, Kauikeaouli (Kamehameha III) was born. 
 
 "1817. The fort at Honolulu finished. 
 
 "1819. May 8, Kamehameha I died. 
 
 "October, Liholiho breaks kapu on the night of kukahi. 
 
 "1820. January, a battle on account of breaking kapu, at Kuamoo 
 on Hawaii. 
 
 "March 30, first missionaries arrived at Kailua. 
 
 "April 18, missionaries first arrived at Honolulu. 
 
 "July, Messrs. Whitney and Buggies sailed for Kauai." 
 
 "First whaler (Mary, Oapt. Allen) enters Honolulu Harbor. 
 
 " 1821. First house of Christian worship built in Honolulu. 
 
 " 1822. January 7, printing first commenced at the islands. It is said 
 that King Liholiho was allowed to pull the first sheet. 
 
 "1823. April 27, the second company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "November 27, Liholiho, his Queen, and attendants sailed for Eng- 
 land, leaving the Kingdom in the care of Kaahumanu. 
 
 "1824, July 8, Kamamalu, wife of Libolibo, died in London. 
 
 "July 13, Libolibo died in London. 
 
 "August, Kapiolani descended into the volcano of Kilauea. 
 
 "1825, May 4, Bold and his companions return from England with 
 the remains of the King and Queen in the English frigate Blonde. 
 
 "1827, October, Kinau and Kekuaiiaoa were married. 
 
 "1828, March 30, the third company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 " July 3, first meetinghouse at Honolulu dedicated. 
 
 " December 2, Boki and his company sailed away from the islands 
 and were lost. 
 
 "1830, December 11, His Majesty Kamehameha V was born. 
 
 "1831, June 7, the fourth company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "September, the high school at Lahaina was commenced.- 
 
 "1832, May 17, the fifth company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "June 5, Kaahumanu died. 
 
 "June, Kinau was appointed premier (kuhina nui). 
 
 "The Oahu Charity School was commenced. 
 
 "1833, March, Kamehameha III assumes the reins of government, 
 and Kinau becomes his minister (Kuhina Nui). 
 
 "May 1, the sixth companv of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "The Bethel Church built"at Honolulu. 
 
 "1834, February 9, Kamehameha IV (Alexander Liholiha) was born. 
 
 "February 14, first newspaper printed at the Hawaiian Islands, 
 called the Lama Hawaii, at Lahainaluna. 
 
 "The newspaper Kumu Hawaii commenced at Honolulu. 
 
 "1835, June 6, the seventh company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "First Hawaiian Almanac printed. 
 
 "1836, January 2, the queen dowager, Emma, was born. 
 
 "The female seminary at Wailuku, Maui, commenced. 
 
 "The first weekly newspaper in English commenced. 
 
 "The high school of Mr. Lyman commenced at Hilo. 
 
 "December, Nahienaena died. 
 
 "1837, February 4, Kamehameha III and Kalama were married. 
 
 "April 9, the eighth company of missionaries arrived. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 121 
 
 "The business of laying out public streets in Honolulu was com- 
 menced. 
 
 " November 7, remarkable rise and overflow of tide throughout the 
 islands. 
 
 "1838, August, the chiefs commence the study of political economy 
 with Mr. Richards. 
 
 "November 1, Victoria Kainamalu was born. 
 
 "April 4, Kinau died. 
 
 "1839. April 5, Kekauluohi became premier (KuhinaNui.) 
 
 "May 10, the printing of the first edition of the Hawaiian bible 
 finished. 
 
 "July 9, the French man-of-war VArtemise (Capt. Laplace) arrived. 
 
 "Kaikioewa died. 
 
 "1840* The school for the young chiefs commenced at Honolulu — 
 Mr. and Mrs. Cook teachers. 
 
 "January, Hoapili, governor of Naui, died. 
 
 "The stone meeting-house at Kawaiahao, Honolulu, commenced. 
 
 "August 3, Mr. Bingham and family returned to the United States. 
 
 " October 8, Kamehameha III gives the first written constitution to 
 the people of the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 "October 20, Kamanawa and his servant were publicly executed for 
 jcrime. 
 
 "September. The United States exploring expedition arrived. 
 
 "1841, May. Kapiolani died. • 
 
 "May 21. The ninth company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "The school for missionaries' children at Punahou (now Oabu Col- 
 lege) commenced. 
 
 " 1842. January, Hoapili Wahine (Kalakaua) died. 
 
 " July 8, Haalilio sailed as commissioner to the courts of France, 
 England, and the United States. 
 
 " July 21, the meetinghouse at Kawaihal finished. 
 
 " September 21, the tenth company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "1843. The United States consent to the independence of the 
 Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 " February 25, Lord George Paulet seized the Hawaiian Islands and 
 raised the English flag. 
 
 " July 31, the sovereignty of the islands was restored by Admiral 
 Thomas, of the English navy. 
 
 " September, Bartimeus Puaaiki died. 
 
 "1844. The Government of Belgium consents to the independence of 
 the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 " November 28, the governments of England and France recognize 
 the independence of the Hawaiian Islands. 
 
 "July 15, the eleventh company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "Silk exported from the islands — 197 pounds. 
 
 "Haalilio died on his return voyage to the islands. 
 
 "1845. April 2, representatives first chosen from the common people 
 under the constitution of October, 1840. 
 
 "Mr. Eichards, the interpreter of Haalilio, returned with his remains. 
 
 " Kekauluohi died. 
 
 " First export of coffee — 248 pounds. 
 
 "John Young (Keoni Ana) is appointed premier (kuhina nui). 
 
 " 1846. February 11, commissioners appointed to settle land claims, 
 
 "March 20, Mr. Whitney died at Lahaiualuna. 
 
 "1847. Mr. Eichards died. 
 
122 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 " Governor Kuakini died. 
 
 "First appearance of Mormons at Honolulu, en route for California. 
 
 "1848. Leleiohoku (William Pitt) died. 
 
 "Moses Kaikoewa died. 
 
 " Kaiminaauao died. 
 
 "The twelfth company of missionaries arrived. 
 
 "The measles (mai puupuu ula) prevailed, and was very fatal. 
 
 "1849. The fort seized at Honolulu by Admiral Tromelin, of the 
 French navy. 
 
 "Beef first exported from the islands — 158 barrels. 
 
 " Keliiahonui died. 
 
 "1850. James Young Kanehoa died. Kaoanaeha died. 
 
 "1851. The Hawaiian Missionary Society was formed. 
 
 "Kekauonohi died. 
 
 "June, the court house at Honolulu built. 
 
 "First whale oil and bone transshipped. 
 
 "1852. April 2, Kaliokalani died. 
 
 "First export of fungus. 
 
 "1853. The smallpox (mai puupuu liilii) swept over the islands. 
 
 "1854. The fort at Lahaina demolished by order of the Government. 
 
 "December 15, Kamehameha III (Kauikeaouli) died, and Kanieha- 
 meha IY became King. 
 
 "1855. Pakidied. 
 
 "Mr. Hitchcock, of Molokai, died.- 
 
 "Flour exported — 463 barrels. 
 
 "1856. June 2, Kamehameha IV was united in marriage with Emma 
 Eooke. 
 
 "Isaac Davis was married to Euta Keelikolani. 
 
 "1857, the fort at Honolulu was demolished by order of the Govern- 
 ment. 
 
 " Konia (widow of Paki) died. 
 
 "John Young (Keoni Ana), the premier, died. 
 
 "Victoria Kamamalu appointed KuhinaNui. 
 
 " May 28, William L. Lee, chief justice of the supreme court, died, 
 a jed, 36. 
 
 "David Malo, native Hawaiian historian, died. 
 
 "Honeybees first introduced, by the E. H. Agricultural Society. 
 
 "Oahu prison built. 
 
 "1858, May 20, birth of the Prince of Hawaii. 
 
 " Eice first systematically cultivated near Honolulu. 
 
 " Sailors' Home established. 
 
 " 1859, July, Eev. L. Smith's premises burnt. 
 
 " April 20, Jona Piikoi died, aged 50. 
 
 " April 26, laying of corner stone, Odd Fellows' Hall. 
 
 " January 7, dedication of Odd Fellows' Hall. 
 
 "February, eruption of volcano on Mauna Loa, running down to Wai- 
 nanalii. 
 
 " The civil code published. 
 
 " Gaslight first introduced into Honolulu. 
 
 "September 9, William Pitt Kinau, son of Leleiohoku and E. Keeli- 
 kolani, died at Kohala, Hawaii, aged 17. 
 
 "1860, May 5, arrival of Japanese embassy en route to the United 
 States. 
 
 "New custom-house built, Honolulu. 
 
 " Queen's hospital built. 
 
 " Honolulu flour mill and foundry burned. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 123 
 
 " Steamer Kilauea arrived. 
 
 " Prince L. Kamehameha (Kamehameha V) sailed for California. 
 
 " September 23, Rev. Dr. R. Armstrong, minister of public instruc- 
 tion, died. 
 
 "Passage of the 'law to mitigate,' etc. 
 
 "1862. April, Palmyra Island, in latitude 5° 50' K"., longitude 161° 53' 
 W., taken possession of by Oapt. Z. Bent, for Kameliameha IV and his 
 successors, and subsequently declared by royal proclamation to be a 
 part of the Hawaiian domain. 
 
 "August 27, death of the Prince of Hawaii, aged 4 years, 3 months 
 and 7 days. 
 
 "The funeral took place September 7. 
 
 "Lahainaluna Seminary burned and was rebuilt the same year. 
 
 "October 11, Reformed Catholic Church mission arrived. 
 
 "1863. November 30, His Majesty Kamehameha IV died, aged 29 
 years, 9 months, and 21 days, and Prince Kamehameha ascended the 
 throne as Kamehameha V. 
 
 "1864. May 5, convention of delegates to amend the constitution 
 called by the King. 
 
 " July 7, convention opened. 
 
 "August 13, convention dissolved and constitution abrogated. 
 
 "August 20, new constitution granted by the King. 
 
 "L. Haalelea died. 
 
 " 1865. October 19, R. C. Wyllie, minister of foreign relations, died, 
 aged 67. 
 
 "Queen Emma visited the United States and Europe. 
 
 "January 27, arrival of the steamer Ajax from California. 
 
 "1865. May 29, H. R. H. Princess V. Kamamalu died, aged 27 years 
 6 months and 29 days. 
 
 "July 20, J. Dudoit, formerly French consul, murdered. 
 
 "October 22, return of Queen Emma. 
 
 "1867. March 12, G. M. Robertson, first associate justice of the 
 supreme court, died, aged 47. 
 
 "1868. November 4, His Highness Mataio Kekuanaoa, father of the 
 late King and his present Majesty, died, aged 75 years. 
 
 " 1869. July 21, arrival of H. R. H. Alfred Ernest, Duke of Edinburg, 
 in command of H. B. M.'s ship Galatea. 
 
 "August 2, light-house at the entrance of Honolulu Harbor perma- 
 nently lighted. 
 
 XVIII. Deed of cession. 
 
 " The deed of cession reads as follows: 
 
 "'In consequence of the difficulties of complying with the demands 
 in the manner in which they are made by Her Britannic Majesty's rep- 
 resentative upon us, in reference to the claims of British subjects, we 
 do hereby cede the group of islands known as the Hawaiian (or Sand- 
 wich) Islands unto the Right Honorable Lord George Paulet, captain 
 of Her Britannic Majesty's ship of war Carysfort, representing Her 
 Majesty Victoria, Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, from this date 
 and the time being; the said cession being made witli the reservation 
 that it is subject to any arrangement that may have been entered into 
 by the representatives appointed by us to treat with the Government 
 of Her Britannic Majesty; and in the event that no agreement has been 
 
124 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 executed previous to the date hereof, subject to the decision of Her 
 Britannic Majesty's Government, on conference with the said representa- 
 tives appointed by us ; or, in the event of our representatives not being 
 accessible or not having been acknowledged, subject to the decision 
 which Her Britannic Majesty may pronounce on the receipt of full 
 information from us and from the Eight Honorable Lord George Paulet. 
 
 "' In confirmation of the above we hereby affix our names and seals 
 this twenty-fifth day of February, in the year of our Lord one thousand 
 eight hundred and forty-three, at Honolulu, Oahu, Sandwich Islands. 
 
 '"Signed in the presence of G. P. Judd, recorder and translator for 
 the Government. 
 
 "'Kamehameha III. 
 '"Kekauluohi. 
 
 XIX. ARTICLE 78, CONSTITUTION OF 1852. 
 
 " ' Every male subject of His Majesty, whether native or natural- 
 ized, and every denizen of the Kingdom, who shall have paid his taxes, 
 who shall have attained the age of 20 years, and who shall have resided 
 in the Kingdom for one year immediately preceding the time of election, 
 shall be entitled to one vote for the representative or representatives of 
 the district in which he may have resided three months next preceding 
 the day of election ; provided, that no insane person, nor any person who 
 shall at any time have been convicted of any infamous crime within this 
 Kingdom, unless he shall have been pardoned by the King, and by the 
 terms of such pardon been restored to all the rights of a subject, shall 
 be allowed to vote/ 
 
 CONSTITUTION OF 1864. 
 
 " ' Constitution granted by His Majesty Kamehameha F, by the grace of 
 God, king of the Hawaiian Islands, on the twentieth day of August, 
 A. J). 1864. 
 
 '"Article 1. God hath endowed all men with certain inalienable 
 rights; among which are life, liberty, and right of acquiring, possess- 
 ing, and protecting property, and of pursuing and obtaining safety and 
 happiness. 
 
 " 'Article 2. All men are free to worship God according to the dic- 
 tates of their own conscience; but this sacred privilege hereby secured 
 shall not be so construed as to justify acts of licentiousness or practices 
 inconsistent with the peace or safety of the Kingdom. 
 
 " 'Article 3. All men may freely speak, write, and publish their 
 sentimeuts on all subjects, being responsible for the abuse of that 
 right, and no law shall be enacted to restrain the liberty of speech, or of 
 the press, except such laws as may be necessary for the protection of 
 His Majesty the King and the royal family. 
 
 " 'Article 4. All men shall have the right, in an orderly and peace- 
 able manner, to assemble, without arms, to consult upon the common 
 good and to petition the King or Legislative Assembly for redress of 
 grievances. 
 
 " 'Article 5. The privilege of the writ of habeas corpus belongs to 
 all men, and shall not be suspended, unless by the King, when in cases 
 of rebellion or invasion the public safety shall require its suspension. 
 
 "'Article 6. No person shall be subject to punishment for any 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 125 
 
 offense, except on due and legal conviction thereof in a conrt having 
 jurisdiction of the case. 
 
 " '.Article 7. No person shall be held to answer for any crime or 
 offence (except in cases of impeachment, or for offences within the 
 jurisdiction of a police or district justice, or in summary proceedings 
 for contempt) unless upon indictment, fully and plainly describing 
 such crime or offence, and he shall have the right to meet the witnesses 
 who are produced against him face to face; to produce witnesses and 
 proofs in his own favor; and by himself or his counsel, at his election, 
 to examine the witnesses produced by himself, and cross-examine those 
 produced against him, and to be fully heard in his defence. In all 
 cases in which the right of trial by jury lias been heretofore used it 
 shall be held inviolable forever, except in actions of debt or assumpsit 
 in which the amount claimed is less than fifty dollars. 
 
 " i Article 8. No person shall be required to answer again for an 
 offence of which he has been duly convicted or of which he has been 
 duly acquitted upon a good and sufficient indictment. 
 
 " ' Article 9. No person shall be compelled, in any criminal case, to 
 be a witness against himself, nor be deprived of life, liberty, or prop- 
 erty without due process of law. 
 
 " 'Article 10. No person shall sit as a judge or juror in any case 
 in which his relative is interested, either as plaintiff or defendant, or in 
 the issue of which the said judge or juror may have, either directly or 
 through a relative, any pecuniary interest. 
 
 '" Article 11. Involuntary servitude, except for crime, is forever 
 prohibited in this Kingdom; whenever a slave shall enter Hawaiian 
 territory he shall be free. 
 
 " 'Article 12. Every person has the right to be secure from all 
 unreasonable searches and seizures of his person, his house, his papers, 
 and effects; and no warrants shall issue, but on probable cause sup- 
 ported by oath or affirmation and describing the place to be searched 
 and the persons or things to be seized. « 
 
 " « Article 13. The King conducts his Government for the common 
 good, and not for the profit, honor, or private interest of any one man, 
 family, or class of men among his subjects. 
 
 " 'Article 14. Each member of society has a right to be protected 
 by it in the enjoyment of his life, liberty, and property, according to 
 law; and, therefore, he shall be obliged to contribute his proportional 
 share to the expense of this protection, and to give his personal 
 services or an equivalent when necessary; but no part of the property 
 of any individual shall be taken from him, or applied to public uses, 
 without his own consent or the enactment of the Legislative Assembly, 
 except the same shall be necessary for the military operation of the 
 Kingdom in time of war or insurrection; and whenever the public 
 exigencies may require that the property of any individual should be 
 appropriated to public use he shall receive a reasonable compensation 
 therefor. 
 
 "'Article 15. No subsidy, duty, or tax of any description shall be 
 established or levied without the consent of the legislative assembly; 
 nor shall any money be drawn from the public treasury without such 
 consent, except when between the sessions of the legislative assem- 
 bly the emergencies of war, invasion, rebellion, pestilence, or other pub- 
 lic disaster shall arise, and then not without the concurrence of all the 
 cabinet and a majority of the whole privy council; and the minister 
 of finance shall render a detailed account of such expenditure to the 
 legislative assembly. 
 
126 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 "'Article 16. No retrospective laws shall ever be enacted. 
 
 " 'Article 17. The military shall always be subject to the laws of the 
 land; and no soldier shall, in time of peace, be quartered in any house 
 without the consent of the owner; nor in time of war but in a man- 
 ner to be prescribed by the Legislature. 
 
 "'Article 18. Every elector shall be privileged from arrest on elec- 
 tion days, during his attendance at election, and in going to and 
 returning therefrom, except in cases of treason, felony, or breach of 
 the peace. 
 
 "'Article 19. No elector shall be obliged to perform military duty 
 on the day of election as to prevent his voting, except in time of war 
 or public danger. 
 
 " 'Article 20. The supreme power of the Kingdom in its exercise 
 is divided into the executive, legislative, and judicial; these shall 
 always be preserved distinct, and no judge of a court of record shall 
 ever be a member of the legislative assembly. 
 
 i' 'Article 21. The Government of this Kingdom is that of a con- 
 stitutional monarchy, under His Majesty Kamehameha V, his heirs 
 and successors. 
 
 " 'Article 22. The crown is hereby permanently confirmed to His 
 Majesty Kamehameha V, and to the heirs of his body lawfully begotten, 
 and to their lawful descendants in a direct line; failing whom, the 
 crown shall descend to Her Royal Highness the Princess Victoria 
 Kamamalu Kaahumanu. and the heirs of her body lawfully begotten, 
 and their lawful descendants in a direct line. The succession shall be 
 to the senior male child, and to the heirs of his body; failing a male 
 child, the succession shall be to the senior female child and to the heirs 
 of her body. In case there is no heir as above provided, then the 
 successor shall be the person whom the sovereign shall appoint, with 
 the consent of the nobles, and publicly proclaim as such during the 
 King's life; but should there be no such appointment and proclama- 
 tion and the throne should become vacant, then the cabinet council, 
 immediately after the occurring of such vacancy, shall cause a meeting 
 of the legislative assembly, who shall elect by ballot some native Alii of 
 the Kingdom as successor to the throne; and the successor so elected 
 shall become a new Stirps for a royal family, and the succession from 
 the sovereign thus elected shall be regulated by the same law as the 
 present royal family of HawaiL 
 
 " 'Article 23. It shall not be lawful for any member of the royal 
 family of Hawaii, who may by law succeed to the throne, to contract 
 marriage without the consent of the reigning sovereign. Every mar- 
 riage so contracted shall be void, and the person so contracting a mar- 
 riage may, by the proclamation of the reigning sovereign, be declared 
 to have forfeited his or her right to the throne, and, after such procla- 
 mation, the right of succession shall vest in the next heir, as though 
 such offender were dead. 
 
 " 'Article 24. His Majesty Kamehameha V will, and his succes- 
 sors upon coming to the throne shall, take the following oath : I sol- 
 emnly swear in the presence of Almighty God to maintain the consti- 
 tution of the Kingdom whole and inviolate, and to govern in conformity i 
 therewith. 
 
 " 'Article 25. No person shall ever sit upon the throne who has been 
 convicted of any infamous crime, or who is insane, or an idiot. 
 
 "'Article 26. The King is the commander-in-chief of the army and 
 navy, and of all other military forces of the Kingdom, by sea and land ; 
 and" has full power by himself, or by any officer or oHicers he may 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 127 
 
 appoint, to train and govern such forces as lie may judge best for the 
 defense and safety of the Kingdom. But he shall never proclaim 
 without the consent of the legislative assembly. 
 
 " 'Article 27. The King, by and with the advice of his privy coun- 
 cil, has the power to grant reprieves and pardon, after conviction, for 
 all offenses, except in cases of impeachment. 
 
 " 'Article 28. The King, by and with the advice of his privy coun- 
 cil, convenes the legislative assembly at the seat of Government, or 
 at a different place if that should become dangerous from an enemy, 
 or any dangerous disorder; and in case of disagreement between His 
 Majesty and the legislative assembly he adjourns, prorogues, or dis- 
 solves it, but not beyond the next ordinary session under any great 
 emergency he may convene the legislative assembly to extraordinary 
 sessions. 
 
 " 'Article 29. The King has the power to make treaties. Treaties 
 involving changes in the tariff or in any law of the Kingdom shall be 
 referred for approval to the legislative assembly. The King appoints 
 public ministers, who shall be commissioned, accredited, and instructed 
 agreeably to the usuage and law of nations. 
 
 u 'Article 30. It is the King's prerogative to receive and acknowl- 
 edge public ministers, to inform the legislative assembly by royal mes- 
 sage, from time to time, of the state of the Kingdom, and to recommend 
 to its consideration such measures as he shall judge necessary and 
 expedient. 
 
 "'Article 31. The person of the King is inviolable and sacred. 
 His ministers are responsible. To the King belongs the executive 
 power. All laws that have passed the legislative assembly shall 
 require His Majesty's signature in order to their validity. 
 
 "'Article 32. Whenever, upon the decease of the reigning sover- 
 eign, the heir shall be less than eighteen years of age, the royal power 
 shall be exercised by a regent or council of regency, as hereinafter pro- 
 vided. 
 
 "'Article 33. It shall law r ful for the King at any time when he may 
 be about to absent himself from the Kingdom to appoint a regent, or 
 council of regency, who shall administer the Government in his name; 
 and likewise the King may, by his last will and testament, appoint a 
 regent, or council of regency, to administer the Government during the 
 minority of any heir to the throne, and should a sovereign decease, 
 leaving a minor heir, and having made no last will and testament, the 
 cabinet council, at the time of such decease, shall be a council of 
 regency until the legislative assembly, which shall be called immedi- 
 ately, may be assembled, and the legislative assembly immediately 
 that it is assembled shall proceed to choose, by ballot, a regent, or 
 council of regency, who shall administer the Government in the name 
 of the King, and exercise all the powers which are constitutionally 
 vested in the King until he shall have attained the age of eighteen years, 
 which age is declared to be the legal majority of such sovereigns. 
 
 "'Article 34. The King is sovereign of all the chiefs and of all the 
 people; the Kingdom is his. 
 
 "'Article 35. All titles of honor, orders, and other distinctions 
 emanate from the King. 
 
 '"Article 36. The King coins money and regulates the currency 
 by law. 
 
 " 'Article 37. The King, in case of invasion or rebellion, ean place 
 the whole Kingdom, or any part of it, under martial law. 
 
128 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 "' Article 38. The national ensign shall not be changed except by 
 act of the Legislature. 
 
 " ' Article 39. The King's private lands and other property are 
 inviolable. 
 
 "' Article 40. The King can not be sued or held to account in any 
 court or tribunal of the realm. 
 
 ui Article 41. There shall continue to be a council of state for 
 advising the King in all matters for the good of the State wherein he 
 may require its advice, and for assisting him in administering the 
 executive affairs of the Government in such manner as he may direct ; 
 which council shall be called the King's private council of state, and 
 the members thereof shall be appointed by the King, to hold office 
 during His Majesty's pleasure. 
 
 " ' Article 42. The King's cabinet shall consist of a minister of for- 
 eign affairs, the minister of the interior, the minister of finance, and the 
 attorney- general of the Kingdom, and these shall be His Majesty's spe- 
 cial advisers in the executive affairs of the Kingdom ; and they shall 
 be ex officio members of His Majesty's privy council of state. They 
 shall be appointed and commissioned by the King, and hold office dur- 
 ing His Majesty's pleasure, subject to impeachment. No act of the King 
 shall have any effect unless it be countersigned by a minister, who, by 
 that signature, makes himself responsible. 
 
 " 'Article 43. Each member of the King's cabinet shall keep an I 
 office at the seat of Government, and shall be accountable for the con- 
 duct of his deputies or clerks. The ministry holds seats ex officio as 
 nobles in the legislative assembly. 
 
 " 'Article 44. The minister of finance shall present to the legisla- 
 tive assembly, in the name of the Government, on the first day of the 
 meeting of the Legislature, the financial budget in the Hawaiian and 
 English languages. 
 
 " 'Article 45. The Legislative power of the three estates of this 
 kingdom is vested in the King and the legislative assembly; which 
 assembly shall consist of the nobles, appointed by the King, and of 
 the lepresentatives of the people, sitting together. 
 
 u 'Article 46. The legislative body shall assemble biennially in the 
 month of April, and at such other time as the King may judge neces- 
 sary, for the purpose of seeking the welfare of the nation. This body 
 shall be styled the Legislature of the Hawaiian Kingdom. 
 
 " 'Article 47. Every member of the legislative assembly shall take 
 the following oath : I most solemnly swear, in the presence of Almighty 
 God, that I will faithfully support the constitution of the Hawaiian 
 Kingdom <and conscientiously and impartially discharge my duties as 
 a member of this assembly. 
 
 "'Article 48. The Legislature has full power and authority to 
 amend the constitution as hereinafter provided, and from time to time 
 to make all manner of wholesome laws not repugnant to the provisions 
 of the constitution. 
 
 "'Article 49. The King shall signify his approval of any bill or 
 resolution which shall have passed the legislative assembly by sign- 
 ing the same previous to the final rising of the Legislature. But if he 
 shall object to the passing of such bill or resolution he will return to 
 the legislative assembly, who shall enter the fact of such return on its 
 journal, and such bill or resolution shall not be brought forward there- 
 after during the same session. 
 
 " 'Article 50. The legislative assembly shall be the judge of the 
 qualifications of its own members, and a majority shall constitute a 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 129 
 
 quorum to do business; but a smaller number may adjourn from day 
 to day, and compel the attendance of absent members in such manner 
 and under such penalties as the assembly may provide. 
 
 M 'Article 51. The legislative assembly shall choose its own officers 
 and determine the rules of its own proceedings. 
 
 "'Article 52. The legislative assembly shall have authority to pun- 
 ish by imprisonment, not exceeding thirty days, every person not a 
 member who shall be guilty of disrespect to the assembly by any dis- 
 orderly or contemptuous behavior in its presence, or who, during the 
 time of its sitting, shall make any false report of its proceedings or 
 insulting comments upon the same, or who shall threaten harm to the 
 body or estate of any of its members for anything said or done in the 
 assembly, or who shall assault any of them therefor, or who shall assault 
 or arrest any witness or other person ordered to attend the assembly 
 in his way going or returning or who shall rescue any person arrested 
 by order of the assembly. 
 
 " 'Article 53. The legislative assembly may punish its own mem- 
 bers for disorderly behavior. 
 
 " 'Article 54. The legislative assembly shall keep a journal of its 
 proceedings, and the yeas and nays of its members, or any question, 
 shall, at the desire of one-fifth of those present*, be entered on the 
 journal. 
 
 " 'Article 55. The members of the legislative assembly shall, in 
 all cases except treason, felony, or breach of the peace, be privileged 
 from arrest during their attendance at the sessions of the Legislature 
 and in going to and returning from the same ; and they shall not be held 
 to answer for any speech or debate held in the assembly in any other 
 court or place whatsoever. 
 
 '"Article 56. The representatives shall receive for their services 
 a compensation to be ascertained bylaw and paid out of the public 
 treasury, but no increase of compensation shall take effect during the 
 year in which it shall have been made; and no law shall be passed 
 increasing the compensation of said representatives beyond the sum of 
 two hundred and fifty dollars for each session. 
 
 "' Article 57. The King appoints the nobles, who shall hold their 
 appointments during life, subject to the provisions of article 53, but 
 their number shall not exceed twenty. 
 
 " ' Article 58. No person shall be appointed a noble who shall not 
 have attained the age of twenty-one years and resided in the Kingdom 
 five years. 
 
 " ' Article 59. The nobles shall be a court, with full and sole authority 
 to hear and determine all impeachments made by the representatives, 
 as the grand inquest of the Kingdom, against any officers of the King- 
 dom for misconduct or maladministration in their offices; but, previous 
 to the trial of every impeachment, the nobles shall respectively be sworn 
 truly and impartially to determine the charge in question, according to 
 evidence and the law. Their judgment, however, shall not extend 
 further than to removal from office and disqualification to hold or enjoy 
 any place of honor, trust, or profit under this Government; but the 
 party so convicted shall be, nevertheless, liable to indictment, trial, 
 judgment, and punishment according to the laws of the land. No min- 
 ister shall sit as a noble on the trial of any impeachment. 
 
 " ' Article 60. The representation of the people shall be based 
 
 upon the principle of equality, and shall be regulated and apportioned 
 
 by the Legislature according to the population, to be ascertained, from 
 
 time to time, by the official census. The representatives shall not be 
 
 S. Eep. 227—9 
 
130 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 less in number than twenty-four nor more than forty, who shall be 
 elected biennually. 
 
 " < Article 61. No person shall be eligible for a representative of the 
 people who is insane or an idiot; nor unless he be a male subject of 
 the Kingdom ; who shall have arrived at a full age of twenty-one years, 
 who shall know how to read and write, who shall understand accounts, 
 and shall have been domiciled in the Kingdom for at least three years, 
 the last of which shall be the year immediately preceding his election, 
 and who shall own real estate within the Kingdom of a clear value over 
 and above all incumbrances of at least five hundred dollars, or who 
 shall have an annual income of at least two hundred and fifty dollars 
 derived from any property or some lawful employment. 
 
 " l Article 62. Every male subject of the Kingdom who shall have 
 paid his taxes, who shall have attained the age of twenty years, and 
 shall have been domiciled in the Kingdom for one year immediately pre- 
 ceding the election, and shall be possessed of real property in this 
 Kingdom to the value over and above all incumbrances of one hundred 
 and fifty dollars, or of a leasehold property on which the rent is twenty- 
 five dollars per year, or of an income of not less than seventy- five dol- 
 lars per year, derived from any property or some lawful employment, 
 and shall know how to read and write, if born since the year 1840, 
 and shall have caused his name to be entered on the list of voters of 
 his district as may be provided by law, shall be entitled to one vote for 
 the representative or representatives of that district : Provided, how- 
 ever. That no insane or idiotic person, nor any person who shall have 
 been convicted of any infamous crime within this Kingdom, unless he 
 shall have been pardoned by the King, and by the terms of such par- 
 don have been restored to all the rights of a subject, shall be allowed 
 to vote. 
 
 M < Article 63. The property qualifications of the representatives of 
 the people and of the electors may be increased by law. 
 
 Ui Article 64. The judicial power of the Kingdom shall be vested 
 in one supreme court, and in such inferior courts as the Legislature 
 may, from time to time, establish. 
 
 "'Article 65. The supreme court shall consist of a chief justice and 
 not less than two associate justices, any of who may hold the court. 
 The justices of the supreme court shall hold their offices during good 
 behavior, subject to remoual upon impeachment, and shall, at stated 
 times, receive for their services a compensation which shall not be dimin- 
 ished during their continuance in office': Provided, however, That any 
 judge of the supreme court or any other court of record may be removed 
 from office, on a resolution passed by two-thirds of the legislative assem- 
 bly, for good cause shown to the satisfaction of the King. The judge 
 against whom the legislative assembly may be about to proceed shall 
 receive notice thereof, accompanied by a copy of the causes alleged for 
 his removal, at least ten days before the day on which the legislative 
 assembly shall act thereon. He shall be heard before the legislative 
 assembly. 
 
 Ui Article 66. The judicial power shall be divided among the su- 
 preme court and the several inferior courts of the Kingdom in such 
 manner as the Legislature may from time to time prescribe, and the 
 tenure of office in the inferior courts of the Kingdom shall be such as 
 may be defined by the law creating them. 
 
 iU Article 67. The judicial power shall extend to all cases in law 
 and equity arising under the constitution and laws of this Kingdom, 
 and treaties made, or which shall be made under their authority, to all 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 131 
 
 cases affecting public ministers and councils and to aU c^ses of admir- 
 alty and maritime jurisdiction. 
 
 * Article 68. The chief justice of the supreme court shall be the 
 chancellor of the Kingdom 5 he shall be ex officio president of the nobles 
 in all cases of impeachment, unless when impeached himself, and exer- 
 cise such jurisdiction in equity or other cases as the law may confer 
 upon him, his decisions being subject, however, to the revision of the 
 supreme court on appeal. Should the chief justice ever be impeached 
 some person specially commissioned by the King shall be president of 
 the court of impeachment during such trial. 
 
 "'Article 69. The decisions of the supreme court, when made by 
 a majority of the justices thereof, shall be final and conclusive upon all 
 parties. 
 
 " 'Article 70. The King, his cabinet, and the legislative assembly 
 shall have authority to require the opinions of the justices of the 
 supreme court upon important questions of law and upon solemn 
 occasions. 
 
 "'Article. 71. The King appoints the justices of the supreme court 
 and all other judges of courts of record; their salaries are fixed by law. 
 
 " 'Article 72. No judge or magistrate can sit alone on an appeal or 
 new trial in any case on which he may have given a previous judgment. 
 
 u 'Article 73. No person shall ever hold any office of honor, trust, 
 or profit under the Government of the Hawaiian Islands who shall, in 
 due course of law, have been convicted of theft, bribery, perjury, 
 forgery, embezzlement, or other high crime or misdemeanor, unless he 
 shall have been pardoned by the King and restored to his civil rights, 
 and by the express terms of his pardon declared to be appointable to 
 offices of trust, honor, and profit. 
 
 "'Article 74. No officer of this Government shall hold any office 
 or receive any salary from any other Government or power whatever. 
 
 "'Article 75. The Legislature votes the appropriations biennially, 
 after due consideration of the revenue and expenditures for the two 
 preceding years and the estimates of the revenue and expenditures of 
 the two succeeding years, which shall be submitted to them by the 
 minister of finance. 
 
 '"Article 76. The enacting style in making and passing all acts 
 and laws shall be, " Be it enacted by the King and the legislative 
 assembly of the Hawaiian Islands in the Legislature of the Kingdom 
 assembled." 
 
 " 'Article 77. To avoid improper influences which may result from 
 intermixing in one and the same act such things as have no proper 
 relation to each other every law shall embrace but one object, and 
 that shall be expressed in its title. 
 
 " 'Article 78. All laws in force in this Kingdom shall continue and 
 remain in full effect until altered or repealed by the Legislature, such 
 parts only excepted as are repugnant to this constitution. All laws 
 heretofore enacted, or that may hereafter be enacted, which are con- 
 trary to this constitution shall be null and void. 
 
 "'Article 79. This constitution shall be in force from the twentieth 
 day of August, in the year one thousand eight hundred and sixty-four, 
 but that there may be no failure of justice or inconvenience to the 
 Kingdom from any change, all officers of this Kingdom, at the time this 
 constitution shall take effect, shall have, hold, and exercise all the 
 power to them granted until other persons shall be appointed in their 
 stead. 
 
 " ' Article 80. Any amendment or amendments to this constitution 
 
132 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 may be proposed in the legislative assembly, and if tlie same shall be 
 agreed to by a majority of the members thereof, such proposed amend- 
 ment or amendments sliall be entered on its journal, with the yeas and 
 nays taken thereon, and referred to the next Legislature; which pro- 
 posed amendment or amendments shall be published for three months 
 previous to the -next election of representatives; and if in the next 
 Legislature such proposed amendment or amendments shall be agreed 
 to by two-thirds of all the members of the legislative assembly, and 
 be approved by the King, such amendment or amendments shall 
 become part of the constitution of this country. 
 
 " < Kamehameha R? " 
 (Pp. 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, and 33.) 
 
 Joint resolution of the Hawaiian Legislature of 1856. 
 
 Ui Resolved, That whereas it is desirable to codify our existing laws, 
 His Royal Highness Prince Kamehameha, the honorable W. L. Lee, 
 chief justice, and the honorable George M. Eobertson, associate 
 judge of the supreme court, are appointed a committee to prepare a 
 complete civil code, adding notes with reference to important decisions 
 of court under the laws, wherever they may think necessary, and to 
 report the same for the sanction of the Legislature of 1858, with an 
 appropriate index for facility of reference ? " (p. 39). 
 
 Comment on legislative provision for publication of Hawaiian late reports. 
 
 "'It may not be inappropriate in this connection to state that so 
 highly esteemed are some of the dicta of our Hawaiian courts abroad 
 that their decisions have in more than one instance been quoted in 
 some of the higher courts of the United States. This is no small honor 
 to be attained by a nation which, one generation only ago, had no law 
 but the "word of the chief >■' (p.'40). 
 
 XX. List showing that a very small proportion of the 
 
 OFFICERS IN CHARGE OF THE CONDUCT OF THE GOVERNMENT 
 WERE NATIVE HAWAIIANS, THE LARGER PROPORTION BEING 
 AMERICANS. 
 
 " The court, Government officers, etc. 
 
 " The court. — His Majesty Kamehameha Y, born December 11, 
 1830. Ascended the throne November 30, 1863. Son of Kinau and 
 grandson of Kamehameha I. 
 
 " Her Majesty Queen Dowager Kalama, relict of His Majesty Kaui- 
 keaouli, Kamehameha III. 
 
 " Her Majesty Queen Dowager Emma, relict of His Majesty Alex- 
 ander Liholiho, Kamehameha IV. 
 
 " Privy council of state. — His Majesty the King. Their excellencies 
 the ministers; the governors of Oahu, Kauai, and Maui. Her excel- 
 lency the governess of Hawaii. His honor the chancellor of the 
 Kingdom. 
 
 "H. A. Kahanu, S. N. Castle, E. G. Davis, A. Fornander, C. Kanaina, 
 C. R. Bishop, P. Y. Kaeo, P. S. Kalama, W. Hillebrand, W. 0. Luna- 
 lilo,T. S. Staley, J.W. Makalena, W. P. Kamakau, G.Rhodes, J.-Mott 
 Smith, T. 0. Heuck ; secretary, D. Kalakaua. 
 
 " The cabinet. — His Majesty the King; minister of foreign relations, 
 his excellency 0. de Yarigny; minister of the interior, his excellency 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 133 
 
 F. W\ Hutchison; minister of Nuance, his excellency 0. C. Harris; 
 attorney-general, Hon. S. H. Phillips. 
 
 "Bureau of public instruction. — President, Hon. W. P. Kamakau; 
 members, 0. 0. Harris, O. de Yarigny, F. W. Hutchison, and Bishop 
 Staley; inspector-general of schools, A. Fornander; secretary, W. J. 
 Smith. 
 
 "Bureau immigration. — President, minister of the interior; members, 
 O. R. Bishop, O. C. Harris, D. Kalakaua, W. Hillebrand. 
 
 "Supreme court. — Chief justice, E. H. Allen; first associate justice, 
 Hon. A. S. Hartwell; second associate justice, Hon. H. A. Wideinann; 
 clerk, L. McOully, esq.; assistant clerk, W. Humphreys, esq. 
 
 " Circuit judges. — First circuit, Oahu, Hon. W. P. Kamakau; second 
 circuit, Maui, Hon. A. J. Lawrence; third circuit, Hawaii, Hons. D. 
 K. JSTaiapaakai, 0. F. Hart, and E. A. Lyman; fourth circuit, Kauai, 
 Hon. D. McBryde. 
 
 "Board of health. — President, minister of the interior; members, W. 
 Hillebrand, M. D.; Godfrey Rhodes, W. P. Kamakau, T. C. Heuck; 
 port physician, A. C. Buffum. 
 
 "Government officers. — Jailer, Oahu prison, Capt. J. H. Brown; col- 
 lector-general of customs, W. F.Allen, esq.; postmaster-general, A. 
 P. Brickwood, esq.; registrar of conveyances, Thomas Brown, esq.; 
 superintendent waterworks, Capt. Thomas Long; superintendent pub- 
 lic works, Robert Sterling, esq.; harbor master of Honolulu, Capt. 
 John Meek; pilots in Honolulu, Capts. A. Mclntyre and C. S. Chad- 
 wick" (p. 75). 
 
 XXI. And the following statement of admiral belknap, 
 
 FROM THE BOSTON HERALD OF JANUARY 31, 1893. 
 
 To the Editor of the Herald : 
 
 The revolution in the Hawaiian Islands, resulting in the deposition 
 of the Queen and the establishment of a provisional government, is an 
 event not unexpected to diplomatic, naval, and consular officers who 
 have had any acquaintance or familiarity with the course of affairs in 
 that island Kingdom for the past twenty years. 
 
 To the people of the United States the present situation is of momen- 
 tous interest and of vital importance. Indeed, it would seem that nature 
 had established that group to be ultimately occupied as an outpost, as 
 it were, of the great liepublic on its western border, and that the time 
 had now come for the fulfillment of such design. 
 
 A glance at a chart of the Pacific will indicate to the most casual 
 observer the great importance and inestimable value of those islands 
 as a strategic point and commercial center. Situated in mid-north 
 Pacific, the group looks out on every hand toward grand opportunities 
 of trade, political aggrandizement, and polyglot intercourse. 
 
 To the north and northwest it beckons to the teeming populations of 
 China, Japan, Korea, and Eussian coast of Asia; to the north and 
 northeast it calls to Alaska and British Columbia; to the east it bows 
 to the imperial domain of the western United States, holding out its 
 confiding hands for closer clasp and more binding tie; to the southeast 
 it nods to Mexico, Central America, Colombia, Bolivia, Peru, and Chile; 
 to the south and southwest it salutes the growing influence and tropic 
 opportunities of Australia, New Zealand, and the numerous island 
 groups constituting Polynesia. 
 
 Its chief commercial point, Honolulu, is already a port of call for our 
 lines of steamships to Japan and Polynesia, and for the British lines 
 
134 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 to New Zealand and Australia from Vancouver. That port also stands 
 directly in the track of the commerce that will flow through the Nicara- 
 gua Canal when that great commercial need is completed. Indeed, in 
 that coining day the enchanting coral, reef-locked harbor of Honolulu 
 will hardly suffice to take in the ships that will put in there. 
 
 The interests in the group are mainly American, or substantially 
 connected commercially with the United States. In the palmy days of 
 the whale fishery the ports of Honolulu and Lahaina used to be packed 
 at certain seasons of the year with the ships of that great and adven- 
 turous industry. 
 
 The advent of our missionaries at the islands in 1820, and the excel- 
 lent work they did there, won the hearts of the natives and increased 
 American influence. The treaty of reciprocity made with King Kala- 
 kaua in 1875 welded in closest bonds the ties of friendship and trade, 
 and gave to the group its present wealth and prosperity. 
 
 The group now seeks annexation to the United States; the consum- 
 mation of such wish would inure to the benefit of both peoples, com- 
 mercially and politically. Annex the islands, constitute them a terri- 
 tory, and reciprocal trade will double within ten years. Let the island- 
 ers feel that they are once and forever under the folds of the 
 American flag, as part and parcel of the great Kepublic, and a develop- 
 ment will take place in the group that will at once surprise its people 
 and the world. 
 
 Not to take the fruit within our grasp and annex the group now beg- 
 ging us to take it in would be folly indeed — a mistake of the gravest 
 character, both for the statesmen of the day and for the men among us 
 of high commercial aims and great enterprises. 
 
 Our statesmen should act in this matter in the spirit and resolve 
 that secured to us the vast Louisiana purchase, the annexation of 
 Texas, and the acquisition of California. The administration that 
 secures to the United States the u coign of vantage" in the possession 
 of those beautiful islands will score a great measure of beneficent 
 achievement to the credit side of its account. 
 
 But in the path of annexation England will throw down the gauntlet 
 of protest and obstruction. To that end she will bend all the powers 
 of her diplomacy; all the cunning of her foreign-office procedures; all 
 the energy, unwearied effort, and unvarying constancy that has ever 
 made her secretly hostile in,her diplomatic methods and commercial 
 policies to the welfare, growth, and advancement of the United States. 
 
 She wants to gather the group under her own control; she would 
 like to Egyptianize that vital point in the Pacific; she burns to estab- 
 lish a Pacific Bermuda off our Western coast, to hold the same relation 
 toward the ports of Esquimalt and Victoria on Vancouver Island that 
 Bermuda bears toward Halifax, all strongly fortified, connected by 
 cable with Downing street, and stored with munitions of war. 
 
 Let the British lion once get its paw upon the group and Honolulu 
 would soon become one of the most important strongholds of Great 
 Britain's power. With her fortified port of Esquimalt dominating the 
 entrance to Puget Sound, constituting an ever-standing menace to our 
 domain in that region, she wants to supplement such commanding 
 advantage by another stronghold at Hawaii, where, within six days' 
 easy steaming from San Francisco, she could immediately threaten that 
 port with one of her fleets in the event of the sudden outbreak of war. 
 
 Great Britain will undoubtedly propose a joint arrangement for the 
 government of the islands, but we want none of that — no entangling 
 alliances. We have had enough of such business at Samoa. 
 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 135 
 
 No; we want no joint protectorate, no occupation there by any Euro- 
 pean power, no Pacific Egypt. We need the group as part and parcel 
 of the United States, and should take what is offered us, even at the 
 hazard of war. 
 
 Westward the star of empire takes its way. Let the Monroe doc- 
 trine stay not its hand until it holds Hawaii securely within its grasp. 
 
 In this matter the undersigned speaks from personal knowledge, 
 gained through official visits to the islands in 1874 and 1882, and could 
 readily pursue the subject further and more into detail, but for the 
 present forbears. 
 
 George E. Belknap. 
 
 Brookline, January 30, 1803. 
 

14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 KEC ' D LP 
 
 MAY 24 1960 
 
 U1BRXRY USE 
 
 JUL 1 1 1960 
 
 Ji^Q: 
 
 JW^f 
 
 ~~~ 
 
 mo 
 
 rary usi 
 
 ftEC'DLD 
 
 MAY 2$ 
 
 
 mz 
 
 
 r\<&%W 
 
 \\0\ ^ 
 
 # 
 
 %* 
 
 KEC'D LD 
 
 NOV 2 7 1962 
 
 t 
 
 W^ 
 
 
 JAN 1 1 1363 
 
 LD 21A-50m-4,'60 
 (A9562sl0)476B 
 
 -»w^i j.^ IOf| 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of California 
 
 Berkeley 
 
 Uvmu 
 
 ?2ky_J_^f&C 
 
 *»^>u 3 /9frd 
 
 LD 21-100i»-7, , S9(402s) 
 
YB 34680 
 
 OMSK from WHICH BORKOW ED 
 
 IOAN DEPT 
 
 THIS BOOK K nTTT. * 
 
 co "t7asoi s 
 
Hit